َ‫تَسَهَيَلََالنَحَو‬

TASHEEL AL-NAHW

based on
‘Ilm al-Nahw of Mawlana Mushtaq Ahmad Charthawali
 Copyright © DÉr al-Sa‘Édah Publications 2011
First Online Edition July 2011

“General and unrestricted permission is granted for the unaltered

duplication, distribution, and transmission of this text.”

In Plain English: Make as many copies as you want.

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Table of Contents i
List of Tables vii
Introduction to the Text & Translation ix
ُ‫ات الا َعَربِيَّة‬ ِ ‫ – اَاِْل‬Arabic Terms
ُ ‫صط ََل َح‬
‫ا‬ xi

CHAPTER 1 1
1.1. ‫ح ُو‬
‫ – اَلنَّ ا‬Arabic Grammar 1
1.2 ُ‫ – اَلا َكلِ َمة‬The Word 2
‫ – اِ اسم‬Noun 2
‫ – فِ اعل‬Verb 2
‫ – َح ارف‬Particle 3
1.3 4
ِ ‫ – أَقاسام‬Types of Noun
‫اْل اس ِم‬ 4
َُ
ِ
‫ – أَقا َس ُام الاف اع ِل‬Types of Verb 4
‫ف‬ِ ‫الر‬
‫ – أَقا َس ُام اَا‬Types of Particle 4

ُ َ‫ – اَ اْلُ َم ُل َو الا ُمَرَّكب‬Sentences and Phrases

1.4 ‫ات‬ 6
1.4.1 ‫َبيَِّة‬ ََِ‫اْل‬‫اْلُ املَ ِة ا‬‫أَقا َس ُام ا‬ 6
‫ – جُالَة اِ اِسيَّة َخ ََِبيَّة‬Nominal Sentence 6
‫ – جُالَة فِ اعلِيَّة َخ ََِبيَّة‬Verbal Sentence 7
1.4.2 ‫شائِيَّ ِة‬ َ ‫اْلُ املَ ِة ا ِلنا‬
‫أَقا َس ُام ا‬ 8
1.4.3 ‫ص‬ ِ ِ‫ب النَّاق‬ ِ ‫ – أَقاس ُام الامرَّك‬Types of Phrases 9
َُ َ
ِ
1. ‫كب تَ اوصايفى‬ ِ َّ‫ – ُمر‬Descriptive Phrase 9
َ
2. ‫ضاف‬ ِ ِ َّ
َ ‫ – ُمَركب إ‬Possessive Phrase 9
3. ‫شا ِرى‬ َ ِ‫ – ُمَرَّكب إ‬Demonstrative Phrase 10
4. ‫ َع َد ِدى‬/‫كب بِنَائِي‬ َّ‫ – ُمر‬Numerical Phrase 10
َ
5. ‫ف‬ ِ ‫الصر‬ ‫ع‬ ‫ن‬ ‫م‬ ‫ب‬ َّ
‫ك‬‫ر‬ ‫م‬
‫ – ُ َ َ ا ُ َّ ا‬Indeclinable Phrase 11
1.4.4 Additional Notes About ‫سيَّة‬ ِ‫جلَة اِ ا‬
‫ُا‬ 13
Summary 14

i
1.5 15
ِ‫ – ع ََلمات ا‬Signs of a Noun
‫اْل اس ِم‬ ُ َ َ 15
‫ات الا ِف اع ِل‬
ُ ‫ – َع ََل َم‬Signs of a Verb 15
‫ف‬ِ ‫الر‬
‫ – َع ََل َمةُ اَا‬Sign of a Particle 15
1.5.1 General Notes 16
1.6 ‫ض َمائُِر‬ َّ ‫ – اَل‬Personal Pronouns 17
1.7 ُ‫ارة‬
َّ َ‫اْل‬
‫وف ا‬ ُ ‫ – اَ الُار‬Prepositions 18
1.8 ‫شبَّ َهةُ بِالا ِف اع ِل‬
َ ‫وف الا ُم‬
ُ ‫ – اَ الُُر‬Those Particles That Resemble the Verb 20
1.9 ُ‫صة‬ ِ ُ ‫ – اَالَفا ع‬Auxiliary (Defective) Verbs
َ ‫ال النَّاق‬ َ 22

CHAPTER 2
25
‫ – المعرب و المبنى‬Declinable and Indeclinable Nouns
2.1 25
‫اب‬ِ ‫ال اعر‬ ِ ُ ‫ – َع ََل َم‬Signs of I‘raab
َ ‫ات ا‬ 25
‫ب‬ ِ ‫ت الام اعر‬
َ ُ ُ ‫ – َح َاْل‬Conditions of Mu‘rab 25
Difference Between ‫ض َّمة‬ َ – ‫ َك اسَرة – فَ ات َحة‬and ‫ضم‬
َ – ‫َك اسر – فَ اتح‬ 26
2.2 ‫ن‬‫ – اَلا َماب ِ ى‬Indeclinable Noun 27
2.3 ‫ب‬ ُ ‫ – اَلا ُم اعَر‬Declinable Noun 28
ِ ‫ – أَقاسام االَ اس‬Types of Indeclinable Nouns
2.4 ‫اء الا َمابنِيَّ ِة‬ َ َُ 29
2.4.1 ‫ض َمائُِر‬ َّ ‫ – اَل‬Personal Pronouns 30
2.4.2 ُ‫وصولَة‬ ُ ‫ اَالَ اسَاءُ الا َم‬- Relative Pronouns 36
2.4.3 ِ‫ارة‬ َ ‫ – أَ اسَاءُ اال َش‬Demonstrative Pronouns 39
2.4.4 ‫ال‬ ِ ‫ – أَ اسَاء االَفا ع‬Those Nouns Which Have the Meaning of Verbs 41
َ ُ
2.4.5 ‫ص َوات‬ ِ
‫ – أَ اسَاءُ االَ ا‬Those Nouns Which Denote a Sound 42
2.4.6 ‫وف‬ ِ ‫ – أَ اساء الاظُر‬Adverbs
ُ َُ 43
ِ‫ف الَّزمان‬
َ ُ ‫ – ظَار‬Adverb of Time 43
ِ ‫ف الام َك‬
‫ان‬ َ ُ ‫ – ظَار‬Adverb of Place 45
2.4.7 ‫ات‬ ِ ‫ – أَ اساء الا ِكنَاي‬Those Nouns Which Indicate an Unspecified 47
َ َُ
Quantity
2.4.8 ‫ب الابِنَائِ ىي‬ ُ ‫ – اَلا ُمَرَّك‬Numerical phrase 47
2.5 ُ‫ – اَالَ اسَاءُ الا ُم اعَربَة‬Types of Declinable Nouns 48
‫ص ِرف‬
َ ‫ُمان‬ 48

ii
 ‫ص ِرف‬
‫َغاي ُر ُمان َ‬ ‫‪48‬‬
‫الصر ِ‬
‫ف‬ ‫اب َمان ِع َّ ا‬ ‫أَ اسبَ ُ‬ ‫‪48‬‬
‫َس ِاء الامعرب ِ‬
‫ات ‪2.6‬‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫اب أَقا َسام اال اَ ُ ا ََ‬‫‪ – I‘raab of the Various Types of Mu‘rab Nouns‬إ اعَر ُ‬ ‫‪52‬‬

‫‪CHAPTER 3‬‬
‫‪55‬‬
‫‪Further Discussion of Nouns‬‬
‫ب ‪3.1‬‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ – Relative Adjective‬اَاْل اس ُم الا َمان ُس او ُ‬ ‫‪55‬‬
‫صغِيُ ‪3.2‬‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ – Diminutive Noun‬اَاْل اس ُم الاتَ ا‬ ‫‪57‬‬
‫‪ – Definite and Common Nouns‬اَلا َم اع ِرفَةُ َو النَّكَِرةُ ‪3.3‬‬ ‫‪58‬‬

‫‪ – Masculine and Feminine Nouns‬اَاِْل اس ُم الا ُم َذ َّكُر َو الا ُم َؤن ُ‬

‫َّث ‪3.4‬‬ ‫‪59‬‬
‫احد َو تَثانِيَة َو جَاع ‪3.5‬‬ ‫‪ – Singular, Dual and Plural‬و ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫‪61‬‬
‫اْلَ ام ِع ‪3.6‬‬
‫‪ – Types of Plural‬أَقا َس ُام ا‬ ‫‪62‬‬
‫وعات ‪3.7‬‬ ‫‘‪َ - Words Which Are Always Marfoo‬م ارفُ َ‬ ‫‪66‬‬
‫‪ – Subject/Doer‬فَ ِ‬
‫اعل ‪3.7.1‬‬ ‫‪66‬‬
‫ب الا َفاعِ ِل ‪3.7.2‬‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫فَاعل ‪ – Substitute of‬ف اع ُل َما ََلا يُ َس َّم فَاعلُهُ ‪ /‬نَائ ُ‬ ‫‪68‬‬
‫‪َْ, Which Is Similar‬ل ‪َ and‬ما ‪ – The Noun of‬اِ اسم َما و َْل اَلام َشبَّ َهتَ ا ِ‬
‫ْي بِلَايس ‪3.7.3‬‬ ‫‪69‬‬
‫َ‬ ‫ُ َ ُ‬
‫لَايس ‪to‬‬
‫َ‬
‫خبَ ُر َْل اَلَِِّت لِنَ اف ِي ا اْلانس ‪3.7.4‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪َْ Which Negates an Entire‬ل ‪َ of That‬خبَ ر ‪َ – The‬‬ ‫‪69‬‬
‫ا‬
‫)‪ِ (Class‬جانس‬
‫ص اوبَات ‪3.8‬‬ ‫‪َ – Words Which Are Always Mansoob‬مان ُ‬ ‫‪71‬‬
‫‪َ – Object‬م افعُ اول بِِه ‪3.8.1‬‬ ‫‪71‬‬
‫َم افعُ اول ُمطالَق ‪3.8.2‬‬ ‫‪73‬‬
‫َجلِ ِه ‪َ /‬م اف ُعول لَهُ ‪3.8.3‬‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َم افعُول ل ا‬ ‫‪73‬‬
‫َم افعُ اول َم َعهُ ‪3.8.4‬‬ ‫‪73‬‬
‫ف ‪ /‬م افعول فِ ِ‬
‫يه ‪3.8.4‬‬ ‫اَلظَّار ُ َ ُ ا‬ ‫‪74‬‬
‫ال ‪3.8.5‬‬ ‫‪ – State / Condition‬اَ الَ ُ‬ ‫‪76‬‬
‫َّماي ُز ‪3.8.6‬‬ ‫اَلتَّميِي ز ‪ /‬اَلت ِ‬ ‫‪79‬‬
‫ا اُ‬
‫)‪ (Numerals‬أَ اسَاءُ الا َع َد ِد ‪Rules for‬‬ ‫‪80‬‬
‫ستَثا ٰن ‪3.8.7‬‬ ‫اَلا ُم ا‬ ‫‪84‬‬
‫ات ‪3.9‬‬‫‪ – Words Which Are Always Majroor‬اَلا َم اجُراوَر ُ‬ ‫‪87‬‬
‫اَلتَّ َوابِ ُع ‪3.10‬‬ ‫‪88‬‬

‫‪iii‬‬
 ‫لص َفةُ ‪3.10.1‬‬
‫ت أَاو اَ ِّ‬
‫‪ – Adjective‬اَلن اَّع ُ‬ ‫‪88‬‬
‫‪ – Emphasis‬اَلتَّأاكِاي ُد ‪3.10.2‬‬ ‫‪91‬‬
‫‪ – Substitute‬اَلابَ َد ُل ‪3.10.3‬‬ ‫‪94‬‬
‫س ِق ‪3.10.4‬‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ف النَّ َ‬
‫‪َ – Conjunction‬عطاف بَارف‪َ /‬عطا ُ‬ ‫‪95‬‬
‫عطاف الاب ي ِ‬
‫ان ‪3.10.5‬‬‫َ ُ ََ‬ ‫‪96‬‬

‫‪CHAPTER 4‬‬
‫‪97‬‬
‫‪ – Governing Words‬العوامل‬
‫ف الاع ِ‬
‫املَةُ ‪4.1‬‬ ‫‪ – Governing Particles‬اَ الُُراو ُ َ‬ ‫‪98‬‬
‫‪Particles Which Govern Nouns‬‬ ‫‪98‬‬
‫ضا ِرع ‪Particles Which Govern‬‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ف اعل ُم َ‬ ‫‪98‬‬
‫ف النَّ ِ‬
‫اصبَةُ ‪4.1.1‬‬ ‫‪ – Particles That Give Nasb‬اَ الُُراو ُ‬ ‫‪99‬‬
‫اْلَا َِمةُ ‪4.1.2‬‬
‫ف ا‬ ‫‪ – Particles That Give Jazm‬اَ الُُراو ُ‬ ‫‪102‬‬
‫ال الاع ِ‬
‫املَةُ ‪4.2‬‬ ‫‪ – Governing Verbs‬اَالَفا َع ُ َ‬ ‫‪104‬‬
‫ل الا ُمتَ َع ِّدى ‪4.2.1‬‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ – Transitive Verb‬اَلاف اع ُ‬ ‫‪105‬‬
‫ىراوِع ‪4.2.2‬‬ ‫ال الامقارب ِة و َّ ِ‬
‫الر َجاء َوالشُ‬‫أَفا َع ُ ُ َ ََ َ‬ ‫‪107‬‬
‫ال الام اد ِح و َّ‬
‫الذم ‪4.2.3‬‬ ‫‪ – Verbs of Praise and Blame‬أَفا َع ُ َ َ‬ ‫‪109‬‬
‫َّع ىج ِ‬
‫ب ‪4.2.4‬‬ ‫ال الت َ‬
‫‪ – Verbs of Wonder‬أَفا َع ُ‬ ‫‪111‬‬
‫‪ – Governing Nouns‬اَالَ اساء الاع ِ‬
‫املَةُ ‪4.3‬‬ ‫َُ َ‬ ‫‪112‬‬
‫َّر ِطيَّةُ ‪4.3.1‬‬
‫‪ – Conditional Nouns‬اَالَ اسَاءُ الش ا‬ ‫‪112‬‬
‫اِسم الا َف ِ‬
‫اع ِل ‪4.3.2‬‬ ‫اُ‬ ‫‪114‬‬
‫اِ اس ُم الا َم افعُ اوِل ‪4.3.3‬‬ ‫‪116‬‬
‫لص َفةُ الام َشبَّهةُ بِاس ِم الا َف ِ‬
‫اع ِل ‪4.3.4‬‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ا اس ُم ‪ – That Adjective Which Is Similar to‬اَ ِّ ُ َ ا‬
‫‪117‬‬
‫الا َف ِ‬
‫اع ِل‬
‫ضاي ِل ‪4.3.5‬‬‫اِسم التَّ اف ِ‬
‫اُ‬ ‫‪118‬‬
‫ص َد ُر ‪4.3.6‬‬
‫اَلا َم ا‬ ‫‪120‬‬
‫اف ‪4.3.7‬‬
‫ض ُ‬‫اَلا ُم َ‬ ‫‪120‬‬
‫اَاِْل اس ُم التَّامى ‪4.3.8‬‬ ‫‪121‬‬

‫‪iv‬‬
 ‫كنَايَِة ‪4.3.9‬‬
‫أَ اساء الا ِ‬
‫َُ‬ ‫‪122‬‬
‫اِ اس ُم الا ُمبَالَغَ ِة ‪4.3.10‬‬ ‫‪123‬‬
‫املَ ِة ‪4.4‬‬
‫ف الاغَي ر الاع ِ‬
‫‪ – Non-Governing Particles‬اَ الُُراو ُ ا ُ َ‬ ‫‪124‬‬
‫ف التَّ انبِاي ِه ‪1.‬‬
‫‪ُ – Particles of Notification‬حُراو ُ‬ ‫‪124‬‬
‫ال اْيَ ِ‬
‫اب ‪2.‬‬ ‫ف اِ‬
‫‪ُ – Particles of Affirmation‬حُراو ُ‬ ‫‪124‬‬
‫‪َ – Particles of Clarification‬حرفَا التَّ اف ِس اِ‬
‫ي ‪3.‬‬ ‫ا‬ ‫‪125‬‬
‫ص َد ِريَّةُ ‪4.‬‬
‫ف الا َم ا‬
‫اَ الُُراو ُ‬ ‫‪125‬‬
‫ف التَّح ِ‬
‫ضاي ِ‬
‫ض ‪5.‬‬ ‫‪ُ – Particles of Exhortation‬حُراو ُ ا‬ ‫‪125‬‬
‫َّوقى ِع ‪6.‬‬
‫ف الت َ‬
‫‪َ – Particle of Anticipation‬ح ار ُ‬ ‫‪126‬‬
‫اْل استِ اف َه ِام ‪7.‬‬
‫‪ – Particles of Interrogation‬حرفَا اِ‬
‫َا‬ ‫‪126‬‬
‫الراد ِع ‪8.‬‬
‫ف َّ‬‫‪َ – Particle of Rebuke‬ح ار ُ‬ ‫‪126‬‬
‫اَلتَّ ان ِويا ُن ‪9.‬‬ ‫‪126‬‬
‫نُ او ُن التَّأاكِاي ِد ‪10.‬‬ ‫‪127‬‬
‫ف َل ‪11.‬‬
‫َح ار ُ‬ ‫‪127‬‬
‫الزائِ َدةُ ‪12.‬‬
‫ف َّ‬‫‪ – Extra Particles‬اَ الُُراو ُ‬ ‫‪127‬‬
‫َّر ِط ‪13.‬‬
‫‪َ – Conditional Particles‬ح ارفَا الش ا‬ ‫‪128‬‬
‫لَ اوَْل ‪14.‬‬ ‫‪129‬‬
‫ام ‪15.‬‬
‫َما – َما َد َ‬ ‫‪129‬‬
‫ف الاعطا ِ‬
‫ف ‪16.‬‬ ‫ُحُراو ُ َ‬ ‫‪129‬‬
‫‪Bibliography‬‬ ‫‪131‬‬

‫‪v‬‬
 ‫‪LIST OF TABLES‬‬

‫‪Table No‬‬ ‫‪Page No‬‬

‫‪1.1‬‬ ‫‪ – Personal Pronouns‬اَلضَّ ََّمائَّ َّر‬ ‫‪17‬‬

‫‪1.2‬‬ ‫الَ َّارةَّ‬
‫‪َّ – Prepositions‬اَ َّْلَّْرَّْوفََّّ َّْ‬ ‫‪18‬‬
‫‪1.3‬‬ ‫شبَّ ََّهةََّّبَّاَّلْفَّ َّْعلَّ‬
‫‪َّ – Those Particles That Resemble the Verb‬اَ َّْلَّرَّْوفََّّاَّلْمَّ ََّ‬ ‫‪20‬‬
‫‪1.4‬‬ ‫صةَّ‬ ‫‪َّ – Auxiliary (Defective) Verbs‬اََّْلَفَّْ ََّعالََّّالنَّاقَّ ََّ‬ ‫‪22‬‬
‫‪2.1‬‬ ‫ضمْي رََّّمْن َفصلَّ‬ ‫الرَّفْعَّ ‪َّ( in‬بَ َّارزَّ)َّ َ‬ ‫ضمْي رََّّ َم ْرفَّْوعَّمْن َفصلَّ ‪ََّ (also called‬حاَّلَةََّّ َّ‬
‫)َ‬ ‫‪31‬‬
‫‪2.2‬‬ ‫ضمْي رََّّمتصلَّ‬ ‫الرَّفْعَّ ‪َ in‬‬ ‫ضمْي رََّّ َم ْرفَّْوعَّمتصلَّ ‪ََّ (also called‬حاَّلَةََّّ َّ‬ ‫)َ‬ ‫‪32‬‬
‫‪2.3‬‬ ‫ضمْيَّرََّّمْن َفصلَّ‬ ‫ضمَّْيَّرََّّمتصلَّ ‪َ and‬‬ ‫صبَّ ‪َ in‬‬ ‫ضمْيَّرََّّ َمنْص َّْوبَّ ‪ََّ (also called‬حاَّلَةََّّالنَّ َّْ‬
‫َ‬ ‫‪33‬‬
‫ضمْيَّرََّّ َمنْص َّْوبَّمتصلَّ ‪ and‬مْن َفصلَّ‬ ‫)َ‬
‫‪2.4‬‬ ‫ضمْي رََّّمتصلََّّ(بَارزَّ)‬ ‫الَرَّ ‪َ in‬‬ ‫ضمْي رََّّ ََْمرَّْورَّمتصلَّ ‪ََّ (also called‬حاَّلَةََّّ َّْ‬ ‫)َ‬ ‫‪34‬‬
‫‪2.5‬‬ ‫سَاءََّّاَّلْ ََّم َّْوصَّ َّْوَّلَةََّّ(مَّ َذكرَّ)‬ ‫َّاََّْلَ َّْ‬ ‫‪36‬‬
‫‪2.6‬‬ ‫سَاءََّّاَّلْ ََّم َّْوصَّ َّْوَّلَةََّّ(م َؤنثَّ)‬ ‫َّاََّْلَ َّْ‬ ‫‪36‬‬
‫‪2.7‬‬ ‫ال ََش َارةَّلْم َذكرَّ‬ ‫سَاءََّّ َّْ‬ ‫َّأَ َّْ‬ ‫‪39‬‬
‫‪2.8‬‬ ‫ال ََش َارةَّلْم َؤنثَّ‬ ‫سَاءََّّ َّْ‬ ‫َّأَ َّْ‬ ‫‪39‬‬
‫‪2.9‬‬ ‫اَلْف ْعلَّالْ َماضي ‪Nouns in the Meaning of‬‬ ‫‪41‬‬
‫‪2.10‬‬ ‫َّالَاضرَّ ‪Nouns in the Meaning of‬‬ ‫اَْل َْمر ْ‬ ‫‪41‬‬
‫‪2.11‬‬ ‫َسَاءَّالْم ْعَربَاتَّ‬ ‫َّال ْ‬ ‫إ ْعَرابَّأَقْ َسام ْ‬ ‫‪53‬‬
‫‪3.1‬‬ ‫أََّْوَزانََّجَْعَّقْةَّ‬ ‫‪63‬‬
‫‪3.2‬‬ ‫أََّْوَزانََّجَْعََّّ َكثْ َرةَّ‬ ‫‪63‬‬
‫‪3.3‬‬ ‫َّالَ ْمعَّ‬ ‫أ َْمثَالََّجَْع ْ‬ ‫‪64‬‬
‫‪3.4‬‬ ‫ىَّالمَّْوعَّ‬ ‫أََّْوَزانَّمنْتَ َه ْ‬ ‫‪64‬‬
‫‪3.5‬‬ ‫بَّالْ َفاعلَّ‬ ‫َّح ْس َ‬ ‫ا ْست ْع َمالَّالْف ْعل َ‬ ‫‪66‬‬
‫‪3.6‬‬ ‫ل ‪Different Forms of the Noun of‬‬ ‫‪ََّ and Its I‘raab‬‬ ‫‪69‬‬
‫‪3.7‬‬ ‫منَادٰى ‪Rules Governing the I‘raab of the‬‬ ‫‪72‬‬
‫‪3.8‬‬ ‫إ ْعَرابَّالْم ْستَثْ ٰ َّ‬
‫ن‬ ‫‪85‬‬
‫‪4.1‬‬ ‫َّاَ َّْلَّرَّْوفََّّالنَّاصََّّبَةَّ‬ ‫‪99‬‬

‫‪vii‬‬
‫‪4.2‬‬ ‫الَازََّمَّة‬
‫َّاَ َّْلَّرَّْوفََّّ َّْ‬ ‫‪102‬‬
‫‪4.3‬‬ ‫َّأَفْ َعالَّالْقْ ْوبَّ‬ ‫‪105‬‬
‫‪4.4‬‬ ‫َّاََّلْ ََّم َّْفعَّ َّْولََّّبَّوَّ ‪Verbs Requiring Three‬‬ ‫‪106‬‬
‫‪4.5‬‬ ‫أََّفْ َعالَّالْم َق ََّارَّبَةَّ َوالر َجاء ََّوالشُّرْو َّ‬
‫ع‬ ‫‪107‬‬
‫‪4.6‬‬ ‫سَاءََّّالش ْرطيةَّ‬
‫َّاََّْلَ َّْ‬ ‫‪112‬‬
‫‪4.7‬‬ ‫أ َْوَزانَّا ْسمَّالت ْفضْيلَّ‬ ‫‪118‬‬

‫‪viii‬‬
 َّ‫بسمَّاهللَّالرمحنَّالرحيم‬
‫حنمدهَّوَّنصْيَّعْىَّرسولوَّالكرمي‬

Introduction to the Text & Translation

This book is a revised edition of Tasheel al-Nahw, which in turn is a somewhat expanded
translation of the Urdu language primer of Arabic grammar, ‘Ilm al-Nahw by Mawlana
Mushtaq Ahmad Charthawali. Mawlana Charthawali’s primers for Nahw (Arabic grammar)
and Sarf (Arabic Morphology) are standard textbooks in Western madrasahs. The original
English translation of ‘Ilm al-Nahw was prepared by scholars from Madrasah Islamiyyah,
Benoni, South Africa. They put in a lot of hardwork and made the English translation much
more beneficial than the Urdu original. May Allah reward them. At least two versions of this
translation are available online. The first one had many errors and typing issues. The newer
version has made some improvements but issues remain, especially with regards to language
and clarity of the English and Arabic texts. We decided to bring out a revised edition of this
translation to address these issues. During the course of our revision and editing, we consulted
various grammar works including al-Nahw al-Wadih, Sharh ibn ‘Aqeel, Mu‘jam al-Qawa‘id al-
‘Arabiyyah, and A Simplified Arabic Grammar of Mawlana Hasan Dockrat. We have
completely revised some sections, as well as a number of definitions. The organization has
been changed in a way that we feel will make it easier for the student to understand how each
section fits in the overall picture.
This is a beginner-to-intermediate level text; therefore, we have not transliterated Arabic
words exactly, keeping in mind that most people at this stage will not be comfortable with
Arabic transliteration schemes. Rather, we have used approximate equivalents that are easier to
read for the untrained. Nevertheless, non-English words have been italicized.
As for duals and plurals of Arabic words, we have not used the original Arabic duals and
plurals; rather, their plurals have been created the English way by adding an ‘s’ to the singular.
Thus, two dammahs is used instead of dammahtain. The word still remains italicized so as to
reflect its non-English origin.
It should also be noted that the English equivalents of Arabic grammar terms are mere
approximations. In some cases, they convey the exact meaning. In many cases, they do not.
The student is, therefore, urged to focus on the original term in Arabic.
To the best of our ability, we have tried to remove all errors. However, we are merely
human. There are bound to be some mistakes in it. Your comments, constructive criticism,
and suggestions are all welcome. You can contact us with your feedback at the email address
given at the end.

ix
 We hope and pray that this revised translation will be of benefit to the students. We also
pray that Allah, the Exalted, accepts this humble effort from all those who have contributed to
it in any way, especially the typists; and gives us the power to continue with more. We also
request the readers and all those who benefit from it in any way to remember us in their
prayers.
And He alone gives success.
َّ‫ي‬
َ ْ ‫ََجَع‬ ْ ‫َّع ْٰىَّاٰلو ََّوَّأ‬
ْ ‫َص َحابوَّأ‬ َ ‫َّم ْوَلنَاَََّحَمدَّو‬
َ ‫اَّو‬
َ َ‫َّسيدن‬
َ ‫َّخْقو‬ َ ْٰ ‫َّع‬
َ ‫ىَّخ َّْي‬ َ ‫َّصْىَّاهللَّتَ َع ٰاٰل‬
َ ‫َو‬

‘Aamir Bashir
Buffalo, NY
9 Sha‘ban, 1432 (8 July, 2011)
E-mail: ainbay97@yahoo.com

x
 ُ ‫ص ِط ََل َح‬
ُ‫ات ال َاع َربِيَّة‬ ‫اَاِْل ا‬
ARABIC TERMS

Approximate Equivalent English Term /

Arabic Term
Transliteration Description of the meaning
َّ‫ا ْسم‬ ism Noun

َّ‫ف ْعل‬ fi‘l Verb

َّ‫َح ْرف‬ harf Particle

َّ‫م َذكر‬ mudhakkar Masculine

َّ‫م َؤنث‬ mu’annath Feminine

َّ‫َواحد‬ waahid Singular

َّ‫تَثْنيَة‬ tathniyah Dual

َّ‫َجَْع‬ jam‘ Plural

َّ‫ضمة‬
َ dammah ‫ﹹ‬

َّ‫فَ ْت َحة‬ fathah ‫ﹷ‬

‫َك ْسَرَّة‬ kasrah ‫ﹻ‬

َّ‫َحَرَكة‬ harakah
Short vowels, i.e., dammah ‫ﹹ‬, fathah ‫ﹷ‬, kasrah ‫ﹻ‬
َّ‫َّ َحَرَكات‬:َّ‫َجَْع‬ plural: harakaat

َّ‫حرْوفَّالْعْة‬ huroof al-‘illah Long vowels i.e., ‫َّاَّ–َّي‬-َّ‫و‬

These are the variations at the end of the word, which
َّ‫إ ْعَراب‬ i‘raab
take place in accordance with the governing word.
َّ‫تَْنويْن‬ tanween two fathahs ‫ﹱ‬, two dammahs ‒ٌَّ‒, two kasrahs ‒ٌَّ‒

َّ‫سك ْون‬ sukoon ‫ﹿ‬

َّ‫َساكن‬ saakin a letter with sukoon

َّ‫تَ ْشديْد‬ tashdeed ‫ﹽ‬

َّ‫م َشدد‬ mushaddad A letter with tashdeed

َّ‫فَاعل‬ faa‘il Subject i.e. the doer

xi
 Object i.e. the person or thing upon whom or which
َّ‫َم ْفع ْول‬ maf‘ool
the work is done.
Governing word i.e. that word, which causes i‘raab
َّ‫َعامل‬ ‘aamil
change in the word(s) following it.
The governed word i.e. that word in which the i‘raab
َّ‫َم ْعم ْول‬ ma‘mool
change occurred.
The active verb i.e. that verb whose doer is
َّ‫ف ْعل ََّم ْعرْوف‬ fi‘l ma‘roof
known/mentioned.
The passive verb i.e. that verb whose doer is not
َّ‫ََّمه ْول‬
َْ ‫ف ْعل‬ fi‘l majhool
known/mentioned.
The intransitive verb i.e. that verb, which can be
َّ‫ف ْعل ََّلزم‬ fi‘l laazim
understood without a َّ‫ َم ْفع ْول‬.
The transitive verb i.e. that verb, which cannot be
‫اَلْف ْعلَّالْمتَ َعدى‬ fi‘l muta‘addi
fully understood without a َّ‫ َم ْفع ْول‬.
Definite noun. It is generally indicated by an ‫ال‬. For
‫َم ْعرفََّو‬ ma‘rifah
example, َّ‫ اَلْبَ ْيت‬the house (a particular/specific house).
Common noun. It is generally indicated by a tanween.
‫نَكَرَّة‬ nakirah
e.g. َّ‫ بَْيت‬a house (any house).
It is that word, which is in the state of َّ‫ َرفْع‬, which is
َّ‫َم ْرف ْوع‬ marfoo‘
generally represented by a dammah on the last letter.
It is that word, which is in the state of ‫ب‬
َّ ‫ص‬
ْ َ‫ن‬, which is
َّ‫َمْنص ْوب‬ mansoob
generally represented by a fathah on the last letter.
It is that word, which is in the state of َّ‫جر‬
َ , which is
َّ‫ََْمرْور‬ majroor
generally represented by a kasrah on the last letter.

xii
 CHAPTER 1

Section 1.1
َ‫ – اَلنَحَ ُو‬Arabic Grammar
Definition:
Nahw is that science, which teaches us how to join a noun, verb and particle to form a correct
ٌٌ ‫( إِ ْعَر‬condition) of the last letter of a word should be.
sentence, as well as what the ‫اب‬

Subject Matter:
Its subject matter is ٌ‫(ٌ َكلِ َمة‬word) and ‫(ٌ َك ََل ٌٌم‬sentence).

Objective:
 The immediate objective is to learn how to read, write and speak correct Arabic, and to
avoid making mistakesٌin this. For example, ‫ َزيْد‬, ‫ َدار‬, ‫ل‬ ٌ ِ are four words. The
ٌَ ‫ َد َخ‬, and ‫ف‬
science of Nahw teaches us how to put them together to form a correct sentence.
 The mid-term objective is to use our Arabic skills to understand the Qur’an, Hadeeth,
Fiqh and other Islamic sciences, so that we can act upon them.
 The ultimate objective through the above is to gain the pleasure of Allah, the Exalted.

1
Section 1.2
ُ‫ – َالَ َكَلِ ََم َة‬The Word
Any word uttered by humans is called a ٌ‫لَ ْفظ‬. If it has a meaning, it is called ٌ‫ع‬ ٌ ‫ض ْو‬
ُ ‫َم ْو‬
(meaningful); and if it does not have any meaning, it is called ‫ل‬
ٌٌ ‫( ُم ْه َم‬meaningless).
In Arabic, ٌ‫ع‬
ٌ ‫ض ْو‬
ُ ‫ظٌ َم ْو‬ ٌٌ ‫ ُمرَّك‬.
ٌ ‫( لَ ْف‬meaningful word) is of two types: ‫ ُم ْفَرٌٌد‬and ‫ب‬ َ
1. ٌ‫ – ُم ْفَرٌد‬Singular: It is that single word, which conveys one meaning. It is also called ‫ َكلِ َم ٌة‬.

ٌ ‫ – ُمَرَّك‬Compound: It is a group of words. They may form a complete sentence or an

2. ٌ‫ب‬
incomplete one.

Types of ٌ‫َكَلِ َم َة‬

There are three types of ‫ َكلِ َم ٌة‬:
ٌْ ِ‫( ٌا‬noun)
1. ‫س ٌٌم‬
ٌٌ ‫( ٌفِ ٌْع‬verb)
2. ‫ل‬
3. ‫ف‬
ٌٌ ‫( ٌَحٌْر‬particle)
َ‫ – اِس ٌم‬Noun:
 It is that ‫ َكلِ َم ٌة‬whose meaning can be understood without the need to combine it with
another word.
 It is the name of a person, place or thing.
 It does not have any tense.
e.g. ٌ‫ل‬
ٌ ‫َر ُج‬ man
ٌ‫ت‬
ُ ‫ اَلْبَ ْي‬house
ٌٌ ْ‫( تَْن ِوي‬tanween) and an ‫ ال‬at the same time.
Note: A noun can never have a ‫ن‬

َ‫ – فِع ٌل‬Verb:
 It is that ‫ َكلِ َم ٌة‬whose meaning can be understood without the need to combine it with
another word.
 It has one of the three tenses: past, present, or future.
 It denotes an action.
e.g. ‫ب‬
ٌَ ‫ضَر‬ َ He hit.
ٌ‫صَر‬
َ َ‫ن‬ He helped.
ٌٌ ‫ فِ ْع‬can never have a ‫( تَْن ِويْ ٌٌن‬tanween) or an ‫ال‬.
Note: A ‫ل‬

2
َ‫ف‬
ٌ ‫ – َحر‬Particle:
ٌْ ِ‫ ٌا‬or a ‫ فِ ْع ٌٌل‬or both to
It is that ٌ‫ َكلِ َمة‬whose meaning cannot be understood without joining a ‫س ٌٌم‬
it.
e.g. ٌ‫( ٌ ِم ْن‬from)
ٌ‫( َعلى‬on top)

EXERCISE

ٌْ ِ‫ٌٌا‬،ٌ‫ فِ ْع ٌٌل‬or ‫ف‬

1. State with reason whether the following words are ٌ‫س ٌٌم‬ ٌٌ ‫ ٌَحٌْر‬.
i. ٌ‫س‬ َ َ‫( َجل‬He sat.) iii. ٌ‫ت‬ ٌ ‫ٌبِْن‬ (girl)
ii. ‫ٌَو‬ (and) iv. ‫َك َسٌَر‬ (He broke.)

2. Find the meaning and the plural of the following nouns using a dictionary.

ٌ‫قَلَ ٌم‬ ٌ‫اب‬ ِ

i. iii. ٌ َ‫كت‬
ii. ‫ص ٌٌل‬ْ َ‫ف‬ iv. ٌ‫ُسبُّ ْوَرة‬

3
Section 1.3

َ‫َم‬ِ ‫َالَس‬ِ ‫ – أَقسام‬Types of Noun

َُ
‫ اِ ْس ٌٌم‬is of three types:
1. ‫ام ٌد‬ ٌِ ‫ – ٌَج‬Primary Noun: It is that ‫ اِ ْس ٌٌم‬which is neither derived from another word nor is any
word derived from it.
e.g. ٌٌ ‫فَ َر‬
‫س‬ horse ٌ ‫بِْن‬
ٌ‫ت‬ girl
ٌْ ‫ – ٌَم‬Root Noun: It is that ‫ اِ ْس ٌٌم‬from which many words are derived.
2. ٌ‫ص ٌَدٌر‬
e.g. ٌٌ ‫ض ْر‬
‫ب‬ َ to hit ‫صٌٌر‬
ْ َ‫ ن‬to help
ٌْ ‫ – ٌُم‬Derived Noun: It is that ‫ اِ ْس ٌٌم‬which is derived from a masdar.
3. ٌ‫شٌتَ ّّق‬
e.g. ٌٌ ‫ضا ِر‬
‫ب‬ َ hitter ‫ص ْوٌٌر‬
ُ ‫ َمْن‬the helped

َ‫َل‬ ِ ‫ – أَقسامٌَال‬Types of Verb

ِ ‫َفَع‬ َُ
‫ فِ ْع ٌٌل‬is of four types:
1. ‫اضى‬ ِ ‫ اَلْم‬Past tense ٌ‫ب‬
َ e.g. َ ‫ضَر‬َ He hit.
2. ُ‫ع‬ ٌ‫ضاٌِر‬
ٌَ ‫ اٌَلْ ٌُم‬Present and Future tense e.g. ٌُ ‫ض ِر‬
‫ب‬ ْ َ‫ي‬ He is hitting or will
hit.
ِ
3. ٌ‫اٌَْلٌَْمُر‬ Positive Command/ e.g. ْ ‫ض ِر‬
ٌ‫ب‬ ْ‫ا‬ Hit!
Imperative

4. ٌ‫اَلنٌَّ ٌْه ُى‬ Negative Command/ e.g. ْ ‫ض ِر‬

ٌ‫ب‬ ْ َ‫ََلٌت‬ Don’t hit!
Prohibitive

ِ ‫ – أَقسامَالَحَر‬Types of Particle
َ‫َف‬ َ َُ
ٌ‫ف‬
ٌ ‫ َح ْر‬is of two types:
1. ‫ل‬ ٌِ ‫ – ٌَع‬Causative Particle: It is that ‫ف‬
ٌٌ ‫ام‬ ٌٌ ‫ َح ْر‬, which causes ‫اب‬ ٌٌ ‫ إِ ْعَر‬change in the word after it.
e.g. ‫ َزيْ ٌد ٌِفٌالْ َم ْس ِج ٌِد‬Zayd is in the mosque.
2. ‫ل‬ ٌِ ‫ – ٌَغْيٌٌُر ٌاٌلْ ٌَع‬Non Causative: It is that ‫ف‬
ٌِ ‫ام‬ ٌٌ ‫ َح ْر‬, which does not cause ‫اب‬ ٌٌ ‫ إِ ْعَر‬change in the
following word.
e.g. َّ‫ٌُث‬ then ٌ‫َو‬ and

4
 EXERCISE
1. Correct the following words (stating a reason) and give its meaning.

i. ٌ‫ت‬ ٌ ‫اَلْبَ ْي‬ iii. ٌ‫اَلْ َوَر ٌق‬

ii. ‫اَلْ َفتَ ٌَح‬ iv. ‫ََِس ٌٌع‬

2. Find the meaning and the plural of the following nouns using a dictionary.

i. ٌ‫بُ ْستَان‬ iii. ٌ‫اب‬

ٌ َ‫ب‬
ii. ‫قَ َمٌٌر‬ iv. ٌٌ ‫َك ْل‬
‫ب‬

5
Section 1.4
َ‫ات‬
ُ َ‫َوَال ُم َركب‬
َ ‫ – اَل ُج َم ُل‬Sentences and Phrases
ِ ٌ ‫ مرَّك‬and ‫بٌغَي رٌم ِفي ٌٍد‬
ٌ ‫ ُمَرَّك‬is of two types: ‫بٌ ُمفْي ٌد‬
ٌ‫ب‬ ٌ َُ ْ ُ ُ ْ ٌٌ ‫ ُمَرَّك‬.
 ‫ب ٌ ُم ِفْي ٌد‬
ٌٌ ‫ ُمَرَّك‬is also called ّّ‫ب ٌتَا ٌم‬ ٌٌ ‫ ُمَرَّك‬, ٌ‫ٌم ِفْي َدة‬ُ ٌ‫ ُجُْلَة‬and ّّ‫َل ٌم ٌتَا ٌم‬ ٌَ ‫ َك‬. This is a complete sentence.
Often, it is just called ‫ َك ََل ٌٌم‬.
 ‫ٌم ِفْي ٌٍد‬ ٌٌ ‫ ُمَرَّك‬is also called ‫ص‬
ُ ‫ب ٌ َغْي ُر‬ ٌٌ ِ‫ب ٌنَاق‬ ٌٌ ‫ ٌ ُمَرَّك‬, ٍ‫ ُجُْلَةٌٌ َغْي ُر ٌ ُم ِفْي َدٌة‬and ‫ص‬ ٌٌ ِ‫ َك ََل ٌم ٌنَاق‬. This is a phrase, i.e.,
an incomplete sentence.
From now onwards, when we use sentence, we will be referring to complete sentences; and
when we use phrase, we will be referring to incomplete sentences.

Types of Sentences
There are two types of sentences:
ٌَِ ‫ُجٌُْلٌَةٌ ٌَخ‬
A. ‫بٌيٌَّة‬ ٌ : It is that sentence, which has the possibility of being true or false.
B. ٌ‫ش ٌائٌِيَّة‬
ٌَ ْ‫ُجٌُْلٌَةٌٌإٌِن‬
ٌ : It is that sentence, which does not have the possibility of being true or false.

Section 1.4.1
َ‫امَال ُجملَ ِةَال َخبَ ِري ِة‬
ُ‫س‬ َ ‫أَق‬
‫ُجٌُْلٌَةٌ ٌَخ ٌَِبٌيٌَّة‬
ٌ is of two types:
1. ٌ‫َبَ ِرَيَ َة‬ َ‫ََخ‬ ِ ‫ – جَمََلةٌََاَِس‬Nominal Sentence:
َ ٌ‫َمَيَة‬ ُ
 Definition: It is that sentence, which begins with a noun.
 The second part of the sentence can be a noun or a verb.
 The first part of the sentence is called ٌ‫( ٌُمٌْبٌتَ ٌَدأ‬subject) or ‫سٌنَ ٌد ٌٌإٌِلٌَْي ٌِو‬
ٌْ ‫( ٌُم‬the word about which
information is being given).
 The second part of the sentence is called ‫خبٌٌٌَر‬
ٌَ (predicate) or ‫سٌنَ ٌد‬
ٌْ ‫( ٌُم‬the word giving the
information).
 ٌَ generally ٌ‫ٌنَ ٌِكٌَرة‬.
The ٌ‫ ٌُمٌْبٌتَ ٌَدأ‬is generally ٌ‫ ٌَم ٌْعٌِرٌفَة‬and the ‫خبٌٌٌَر‬
 Both parts (ٌ‫ ٌُمٌْبٌتَ ٌَدأ‬and ‫خبٌٌٌَر‬
ٌَ ) are ٌ‫ع‬
ٌ ‫ ٌَمٌْرفٌٌُْو‬.

Sentence Analysis

ٌ ‫نَ ِظي‬
َ‫ف‬ َ‫ت‬
ُ ‫ اَلبَ ي‬The house is clean.
ٌِْ ِ‫ُجٌُْلَةٌٌٌا‬
ٌ‫َسٌيَّةٌٌ ٌَخ ٌَِبٌيَّة‬ ٌ = ‫ ٌَخبٌٌٌَر‬+ ٌ‫ٌُمٌْبٌتَ ٌَدأ‬

6
Note: A sentence may have more than one ‫خبٌٌٌَر‬
ٌَ .
Sentence Analysisَ

َ‫قَ ِوي‬ َ‫طَ ِوي ٌل‬ َ‫ اَلر ُج ُل‬The man is tall and strong.
ٌِْ ِ‫ = ُجٌٌُْلَةٌٌٌا‬2ٌ‫ َخٌبٌٌٌَر‬+ 1ٌ‫ ٌَخبٌٌٌَر‬+ ٌ‫ٌُمْبٌٌتَ ٌَدأ‬
ٌ‫َسٌيَّةٌٌ ٌَخ ٌَِبٌيَّة‬

َ ٌ‫ – ُجَمَلَةٌََفِعلِية‬Verbal Sentence:
2. ٌ‫َبَ ِرَيَ َة‬
َ‫َخ‬
 Definition: It is that sentence, which begins with a verb.
ٌٌ ‫ ٌفِ ٌْع‬or ‫سٌنَ ٌد‬
 The first part of the sentence is called ‫ل‬ ٌْ ‫ ٌُم‬.
 The second part of the sentence is called ‫ل‬ ٌِ َ‫ ٌف‬or ‫سٌنَ ٌدٌٌإٌِلٌَْيٌِو‬
ٌٌ ‫اع‬ ٌْ ‫ ٌُم‬and is always ٌ‫ع‬
ٌ ‫ ٌَمٌْرفٌٌُْو‬.

Sentence Analysis

َ‫َزي ٌد‬ َ‫س‬

َ َ‫ َجل‬Zayd sat.
‫ُجٌُْلٌَةٌفِ ْعلِيٌَّةٌ ٌَخ ٌَِبٌيٌَّة‬
ٌ = ‫اع ٌٌل‬ٌِ َ‫ٌف‬ + ‫ل‬ ٌٌ ‫ٌفِ ٌْع‬

ٌَّ ٌ‫ ٌاٌَلْ ٌِف ٌْع ٌُل‬i.e. it is a verb whose meaning can be

Note: In the above example, the verb is ‫الَلٌِزٌُم‬
understood without a ‫ل‬
ٌٌ‫ ٌَم ٌْف ٌُعٌْو‬.

ٌُ ‫ ٌاٌَلْ ٌِف ٌْع‬i.e. a verb whose meaning cannot be fully understood without
Note: If the verb is ‫لٌاٌلْ ٌُمتٌَ ٌَع ٌّْدى‬
a‫ل‬
ٌٌ‫ ٌَم ٌْف ٌُعٌْو‬, then a ‫ ٌَم ٌْف ٌعٌُْوٌٌل‬will be added and will be ‫ب‬
ٌٌ ‫ص ٌْو‬
ٌُ ‫ ٌَمٌْن‬.
Sentence Analysis

َ‫اء‬
َ ‫الس َم‬ ُ‫الل‬
َ َ‫َخلَ َق‬ Allah created the sky.
‫ ٌَم ٌْف ٌعٌُْوٌٌل = ُجٌٌُْلٌَةٌفِ ْعلِيٌَّةٌ ٌَخ ٌَِبٌيٌَّة‬+ ‫اع ٌٌل‬
ٌِ َ‫ٌف‬ + ‫ٌفِ ٌْع ٌٌل‬

EXERCISE
1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab, and analyze the following sentences.

i. ‫املعلمٌحاضر‬ ii. ‫البستانٌُجيل‬ iii. ‫فتحٌنمدٌالباب‬

iv. ‫املدرسةٌكبريةٌنظيفة‬ v. ‫وقفٌالرجل‬ vi. ‫الرجلٌوقف‬

2. What is the difference between (v) and (vi) above?

7
Section 1.4.2
ٌ‫ش َائِيَ َة‬
َ َ‫ َُجمَلَ َةٌََإِن‬is of ten types:

ِ
1. ٌ‫اٌَْلٌَْمُر‬ Positive Command e.g. ٌ‫ب‬ْ ‫ض ِر‬
ْ‫ا‬ Hit!

2. ‫اَلنٌَّ ٌْه ٌُى‬ Negative Command e.g. ‫ب‬ٌْ ‫ض ِر‬

ْ َ‫ََلٌت‬ Don’t Hit!

3. ‫اٌََِْل ٌْسٌتِ ٌْف ٌَه ٌُام‬ Interrogative e.g. ‫ب ٌَزيْ ٌد؟‬

َ ‫ٌضَر‬
َ ‫َى ْل‬ Did Zayd hit?

4. ٌّْ ‫اَلٌتَّ ٌّم‬

‫ّن‬ Desire e.g. !‫لَيتٌالشَّبابٌعائِ ٌد‬ I wish youth would
َ َ َ َْ
return.
Note: ‫ت‬
ٌَ ‫ لَْي‬is generally used for something unattainable.
‫اَلتٌٌََّر ٌّْجى‬ ٌ‫ٌس ْه ٌل‬ ِ ِْ ‫لَع َّل‬
َ ‫ٌاَل ْمت َحا َن‬
5. Hope e.g. Hopefully, the
َ
examination will be easy.
Note: ‫ل‬
ٌَّ ‫ لَ َع‬is generally used for something attainable.

6. ُ‫اَلٌنّْ ٌَد ٌاء‬ Exclamation e.g. !ُ‫اٌالل‬

ٌ َ‫ي‬ O Allah!
ٌُ ‫اٌَلْ ٌَعٌْر‬
‫ض‬ ِ ‫ أٌَََلٌتَاٌْتِي ِِنٌفَاُع ِطي‬Will you not come to me
e.g. !‫ٌدي نَارا‬
ً ْ ‫ك‬
7. Request/Offer ََ ْ ْْ
so that I may give you a
Note: ‫ض‬
ٌُ ‫ اٌَلْ ٌَعٌْر‬is a mere request; no answer is anticipated.
dinar?
8. ٌ‫س ُم‬
ٌَ ‫اَلْ ٌَق‬ Oath e.g. !ِ‫الل‬
ٌ ‫َو‬ By Allah!

9. ٌُ ‫ج‬
‫ب‬ ٌُّ ‫اَلتٌَّ ٌَع‬ Amazement e.g. !‫َماٌأٌَ ْح َس َن ٌَزيْ ًدا‬ How good Zayd is!

10. ٌ‫اٌَلْ ٌع ٌُق ٌود‬

ُْ ُ Transaction e.g. ٌَ َ‫تٌى َذاٌالْ ِكت‬
The seller says ‫اب‬ ُ ‫ – بِ ْع‬I sold this book.
and the buyer says ُ‫ – اِ ْشتَ َريْتٌُو‬I bought it.
ٌَِ ‫ ٌَخ‬. However, in Islamic law, contracts require the
Note: The sentences for ‫ اٌَلْ ٌُع ٌُق ٌْوٌُد‬appear to be ‫بٌيٌَّة‬

use of past tense verbal sentences to convey the meaning of ٌ‫شٌ ٌائٌِيَّة‬
َ ْ‫ُجٌُْلَةٌ ٌٌإٌِن‬
ٌ . Hence, these will be
classified as ٌ‫ش ٌائٌِيَّة‬
ٌَ ْ‫ٌإٌِن‬.
Sentence Analysis:

‫َزي ٌد؟‬ َ‫ب‬

َ ‫ض َر‬ َ َ‫َىل‬ Did Zayd hit?
ٌ‫ش ٌائٌِيَّة‬
ٌَ ْ‫ُجٌُْلَةٌٌٌإٌِن‬ ٌِ َ‫ٌف‬
ٌ = ‫اع ٌٌل‬ + ‫ل‬ ٌٌ ‫ ٌفِ ٌْع‬+ ‫اَل ٌْسٌتٌِْف َهٌ ٌِام‬
ٌِْ ٌ‫ف‬
ٌُ ‫ٌَح ْر‬

EXERCISE
1. State what type of ٌ‫ش ٌائٌِيَّة‬
ٌَ ْ‫ُجٌُْلَةٌٌٌإٌِن‬
ٌ are the following sentences.
ِ ‫ياٌاِب ر‬
i. ٌ‫اىْي ُم‬ iii. ‫ك؟‬
َْ َ َ ُ‫ٌحال‬ َ ‫ف‬ َ ‫َكْي‬
ِ
ii. ‫اَسَ ٌْع‬ iv. ‫ل‬ٌْ ‫ََلٌتَ ْد ُخ‬

8
Section 1.4.3
ِ ِ‫َبََالنَاق‬
َ‫َص‬ ِ ‫َمَرَك‬
َ ُ ‫امَال‬
ُ‫س‬ َ ‫ أَق‬- Types of Phrases

Phrases are of five types:

ِ ‫َصَي‬
1. َ‫َفَى‬ ِ ‫ – مَرَكَبََتََو‬Descriptive Phrase:ٌ It is a phrase in which one word describes the other.
ٌ َُ
ِ.
 The describing word is called ‫ص َف ٌة‬
 The object being described is called ‫ف‬
ٌٌ ‫ص ٌْو‬
ٌُ ‫ ٌَم ٌْو‬.
 The ‫ف‬ ٌُ ‫ ٌَم ٌْو‬and ‫ ِص َفٌة‬must correspond in four things:
ٌٌ ‫ص ٌْو‬
1. I‘raab.
2. Gender i.e. being masculine or feminine.
3. Number i.e. being singular, dual or plural.
4. Being ma‘rifah or nakirah.

For example,

َ‫الصالِ ُحون‬ َُ‫اَ ِّلر َجال‬ the righteous men

ٌ‫ِص َفة‬ ٌ‫ف‬
ٌ ‫ص ٌْو‬
ٌُ ‫ٌَم ٌْو‬

ِ ‫صالِح‬
َ‫ان‬ َ‫َر ُج ََل ِن‬
َ َ two righteous men
ٌ‫ِص َفة‬ ٌٌ ‫ص ٌْو‬
‫ف‬ ٌُ ‫ٌَم ٌْو‬

ُ‫ال َعاقِلََة‬ ُ ‫اَلبِن‬

َ‫ت‬ the intelligent/wise girl
ٌ‫ِص َفة‬ ٌٌ ‫ص ٌْو‬
‫ف‬ ٌُ ‫ٌَم ٌْو‬

2. َ ِ‫َضَاف‬
‫َى‬ َ ِ‫َبََإ‬
ٌ ‫َرَك‬
َ ‫ – ُم‬Possessive Phrase: It is a phrase in which the first word (‫ٌاف‬ ٌٌ ‫ٌض‬
َ ‫ ) ُم‬is attributed
to the second one (‫اف ٌٌإٌِلٌَْي ٌِو‬
ٌٌ ‫ض‬
ٌَ ‫) ٌُم‬. In some cases, this means that the second word owns or
possesses the first.
 The ‫اف‬ ٌَ ‫ ٌُم‬never gets an ‫ ال‬or a ‫تَْن ِويْ ٌٌن‬.
ٌٌ ‫ض‬
 The ‫افٌٌإٌِلٌَْي ٌِو‬
ٌٌ ‫ض‬
ٌَ ‫ ٌُم‬is always ‫ ٌَْمٌُرٌْوٌٌر‬.
 The i‘raab of the ‫اف‬
ٌٌ ‫ض‬ ٌِ ‫ ٌَع‬governing it. For example,
ٌَ ‫ ٌُم‬will be according to the ‫ام ٌٌل‬
َ‫َزي ٍد‬ َ‫اب‬ ِ
ُ َ‫كت‬ Zayd’s book
ٌ‫افٌٌإِلَْي ِو‬
ٌ ‫ض‬َ ‫ٌ ُم‬ ٌٌ ‫ض‬
‫اف‬ َ ‫ُم‬ ٌٌٌ

9
Notes:
ِ ٌٌ ‫ ٌمض‬are found in one single phrase. For example,
1. Sometimes many ‫اف‬ َ ‫ ُم‬/‫افٌإِلَْيٌو‬
ٌٌ ‫ض‬ َُ
َ‫الر ُج ِل‬ َِ ‫بَي‬
‫ت‬ َُ َ‫ب‬
‫اب‬ the door of the man’s house
‫افٌإِلَْيٌِو‬
ٌٌ ‫ض‬ َ ‫اف ُم‬ ٌٌ ‫ض‬ ِ ٌٌ ‫مض‬
َ ‫افٌإِلَْيٌوٌوٌ ُم‬ َُ ٌٌ ‫ض‬
‫اف‬ َ ‫ُم‬
ِ of the ‫اف‬ ِ ٌٌ ‫ مض‬with an ‫ال‬
2. ٌIf a ٌ‫ص َفة‬ ٌٌ ‫ض‬َ ‫ ُم‬is brought, it should come immediately after the ‫اف ٌإِلَْيٌو‬ َُ
and should have the same i‘raab as that of the ‫اف‬ ٌٌ ‫ض‬
َ ‫ ُم‬. For example,
‫ال َج ِدي َُد‬ َِ ‫البَ ي‬
‫ت‬ َُ َ‫ب‬
‫اب‬ the new door of the house
ٌِ ‫ض‬
‫اف‬ ٌَ ‫ِص َفةٌاٌلْ ٌُم‬ ‫افٌإِلَْيٌِو‬
ٌٌ ‫ض‬ َ ‫ُم‬ ٌٌ ‫ض‬
‫اف‬ َ ‫ُم‬
ِ of the ‫افٌإِلَيٌِو‬ ِ ٌٌ ‫)مض‬, and it
3. ٌIf a ٌ‫ص َفة‬ ْ ٌٌ ‫ض‬ َ ‫ ُم‬is brought, it should come immediately after it (‫افٌإِلَْيٌو‬ َُ
should correspond to it (‫افٌإلَْي ٌو‬ ِ ِ ٌٌ ‫ض‬َ ‫ ) ُم‬i.e. in the four aspects mentioned earlier. For example,
‫ال َج ِدي َِد‬ َِ ‫البَ ي‬
‫ت‬ َُ َ‫ب‬
‫اب‬ The door of the new house.

‫ِص َفٌة‬ ٌٌ ‫ص ٌْو‬

‫ف‬ ٌُ ‫ٌَم ٌْو‬

ٌ‫افٌٌإٌِلٌَْي ِو‬
ٌٌ ‫ض‬
ٌَ ‫ٌُم‬ ٌ‫اف‬
ٌ ‫ض‬ٌَ ‫ٌُم‬
َ ‫َبَََإِ َشَا ِر‬
3. ‫َى‬ It is a phrase in which one noun (ِ‫ٌارٌة‬ ِْ ‫ٌم‬ ِ
ٌ ‫َرَك‬
َ ‫ – ُم‬Demonstrative Phrase: ٌَ ‫ٌش‬
َ ‫ٌال‬ ٌُ ‫ٌس‬
ْ ‫)ا‬
points towards another noun (‫ارٌٌإٌِلٌَْي ٌِو‬
ٌٌ ‫ش‬
ٌَ ‫) ٌُم‬.
 The ‫ارٌٌإٌِلٌَْي ٌِو‬
ٌٌ ‫ش‬
ٌَ ‫ ٌُم‬must have an ‫ال‬.
e.g. َ‫الر ُج ُل‬ ‫ٰى َذا‬ This man
‫ارٌٌإٌِلٌَْيٌِو‬ ِ‫ال ٌَش ٌارٌة‬ ِ
ٌٌ ‫ش‬
ٌَ ‫ٌُم‬ َ ٌِْ ٌ‫ٌا ٌْس ٌُم‬
Note: If the ‫ارٌٌإٌِلٌَْي ٌِو‬
ٌٌ ‫ش‬
ٌَ ‫ ٌُم‬does not have an ‫ال‬, it would be a complete sentence.
e.g. َ‫َر ُج ٌل‬ ‫ٰى َذا‬ This is a man.
ٌِْ ِ‫ُجٌُْلٌَةٌٌا‬
‫َسٌيٌَّة‬ ٌ = ‫ٌَخبٌٌٌَر‬ + ٌ‫ٌُمٌْبٌتَ ٌَدأ‬
4. ‫َى‬ِ ‫َع َد‬/َ
َ ‫َد‬ ََ ‫َبََبَِنََائَِي‬
ٌ ‫َرَك‬
َ ‫َم‬
ُ – Numerical Phrase: It is a phrase in which two numerals are joined to
form a single word (number).
 A‫ف‬ٌٌ ‫ ٌَحٌْر‬originally linked the two.
 This phrase is found only in numbers 11-19.
 Both parts of this phrase will be ‫ح‬ ٌٌ ‫ ٌَم ٌْفتٌٌُْو‬except the number 12 (‫اٌع َشٌَر‬ ِ
َ َ‫)اثْن‬.
e.g. ٌ‫ٌع َشَر‬
َ ‫( ٌأَ َح َد‬eleven)
It was originally ‫شٌٌر‬ َ ‫ٌع‬
َ ‫ٌأَ َح ٌد ٌَو‬.

10
 Note: The first part of the number ‫شٌَر‬ ِ ٌَ ْ‫)اِث‬
َ ‫اٌع‬
َ َ‫ اثْن‬will be given a ‫ ي‬in place of the ‫ِن ٌ َع َشٌَر( ا‬ ْ
ٌِ ‫ص‬
in ‫ب‬ ٌْ َّ‫ ٌَحاٌلٌَةٌُالٌن‬and ‫ ٌَحاٌلٌَةٌُا ٌْلٌَّْر‬.
e.g. ٌَْ ْ‫تٌاِث‬
ٌ‫ِنٌ َع َشَر ٌَر ُج ًَل‬ ٌُ ْ‫ٌَرٌأَي‬ ٌِ ‫ص‬
(‫ب‬ ٌْ َّ‫) ٌَحاٌلٌَةٌُالٌن‬ ٌ‫ٌع َشَر ٌَر ُج ًَل‬ ِ ‫مرر‬
َ ‫تٌبِاثْ َ ّْن‬
ُ ََْ (‫الٌَّْر‬
ٌْ ٌُ‫) ٌَحاٌلٌَة‬
I saw twelve men. I passed by twelve men.

َِ ‫َعََالصَر‬
5. ‫َف‬ ُ ‫ََمَن‬
َ ‫َب‬
ٌ ‫َرَك‬
َ ‫ – ُم‬Indeclinable Phrase: It is a phrase in which two words are joined to form
a single word.
 The first part of this phrase is always ‫ح‬
ٌٌ ‫ ٌَم ٌْفتٌٌُْو‬.
 The second part changes according to the ‫ل‬ ٌِ ‫ ٌَع‬.
ٌٌ ‫ام‬
e.g. ٌ‫ت‬ ُ ‫ٌم ْو‬
َ ‫ضَر‬
َ ‫َح‬ (‫ت‬
ٌٌ ‫ٌ ٌَمٌْو‬+ٌ‫ضٌَر‬
ٌَ ‫) ٌَح‬ A region in Yemen.
‫ضٌَر‬
ٌَ ‫ ٌَح‬is a verb, which means “he/it became present” and ‫ت‬ٌٌ ‫ ٌَمٌْو‬is a noun, which
means “death.”

ٌُّ َ‫بَ ٌْعلَب‬

‫ك‬ (ٌَّ‫ٌٌبَك‬+ٌ‫ل‬
ٌٌ ‫)بٌَ ٌْع‬ A city in Lebanon.
‫ بٌَ ٌْع ٌٌل‬was the name of an idol and ٌَّ‫ ٌبَك‬was the name of a king.

Note: The above mentioned various types of phrases/incomplete sentences form part of a
complete sentence.

Example 1 َ‫الَِمي ُن‬ ِ ‫الت‬

َ‫اج ُر‬ َ‫َربِ َح‬ The trustworthy/honest trader
gained profit.
ٌِ
‫ص ٌَفٌة‬ + ٌ‫ف‬
ٌ ‫ص ٌْو‬
ٌُ ‫ٌَم ٌْو‬

‫ُجٌُْلٌَةٌٌفٌِْعٌلٌِيٌَّةٌ ٌَخ ٌِْبٌيٌَّة‬

ٌ = ٌِ َ‫ٌف‬
ٌ‫اع ٌل‬ + ٌ‫ل‬ ِ
ٌ ‫ٌف ٌْع‬

Example 2 ٌ‫ع‬
َ ‫َمرفُو‬ ِ َ‫ف‬
َ‫اع ٍل‬ َ‫ُكل‬ Every faa‘il is marfoo‘

َ‫َمفَعُو ٍل‬
and every maf‘ool is
َ‫ب‬
ٌ ‫صو‬
ُ ‫َمن‬ َ‫ُكل‬ ٌ‫َو‬
mansoob.
ٌ‫افٌٌإٌِلٌَْي ِو‬
ٌٌ ‫ض‬
ٌَ ‫ ٌُم‬+ ٌ‫اف‬
ٌ ‫ض‬ٌَ ‫ٌُم‬

ٌِْ ِ‫ُجٌُْلٌَةٌٌا‬
‫َسٌيٌَّةٌ ٌَخ ٌِْبٌيٌَّة‬ ٌ = ٌ‫َخبَ ٌر‬ + ٌ‫ٌُمٌْبٌتَ ٌَدأ‬

11
 ‫ابَ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫الكتَ َ‬ ‫ٰى َذا‬ ‫تَ‬
‫اشتَ َري ُ‬
‫‪Example 3‬‬ ‫‪I bought this book.‬‬
‫ارٌٌإٌِلٌَْيٌِو‬
‫ش ٌٌ‬ ‫ٌاِ ٌْس ٌُمٌ ٌِْ‬
‫ال ٌَش ٌَارٌةِ ‪ٌُ +‬م ٌَ‬

‫ُجٌُْلَةٌٌفِ ْعلِيَّةٌٌ ٌَخ ٌِْبٌيَّةٌ‬

‫= ٌ‬ ‫ولٌ‬
‫ٌَم ٌْف ٌعُ ٌ‬ ‫اعِلٌٌِِو ‪+‬‬
‫ٌفِ ٌْع ٌٌلٌ ٌَم ٌَعٌٌفَ ٌ‬

‫‪Example 4‬‬ ‫َر ُج ًَلَ‬

‫ش َر َ‬‫َع َ‬
‫أََربَ َع َ‬ ‫‪َ Fourteen men came.‬ج ََ‬
‫اء‬
‫ُجٌُْلٌَةٌفِ ْعلِيٌَّةٌ ٌَخ ٌِْبٌيٌَّة‬
‫= ٌ‬ ‫ٌفَ ٌِ‬
‫اع ٌٌل‬ ‫لٌ ‪+‬‬‫ٌفِ ٌْع ٌٌ‬

‫‪Example 5‬‬ ‫بَعَلَبَكَ‬ ‫‪ٰ This is Ba‘labakk.‬ى ِذَهِ‬

‫ُمٌٌْبٌتَ ٌَدأٌ ‪َ +‬خبَ ٌٌر = ُجٌٌُْلَةٌٌٌاِ ٌِْ‬
‫َسٌيَّةٌٌ ٌَخ ٌِْبٌيَّةٌ‬

‫‪EXERCISE‬‬
‫‪1.‬‬ ‫‪Translate, fill in the i‘raab and analyze the following phrases.‬‬

‫‪i.‬‬ ‫سيارةٌالرجل‬ ‫الوردةٌالميلة‬

‫‪v.‬‬
‫أربعٌعشر ‪ii.‬‬ ‫قلمٌرخيص ‪vi.‬‬
‫بابٌفصلٌاملدرسة ‪iii.‬‬ ‫معديكرب ‪vii.‬‬
‫قلمٌالرجلٌالطويل ‪iv.‬‬ ‫ذلكٌالكتاب ‪viii.‬‬

‫‪2.‬‬ ‫?‪What is the difference between the following sentences‬‬

‫‪i.‬‬ ‫ٌعاقِ ٌلٌ‬

‫غُ ََل ٌم َ‬ ‫‪and‬‬ ‫ٌعاقِ ٍلٌ‬
‫غُ ََل ُم َ‬
‫ىذهٌتفاحة ‪ii.‬‬ ‫‪and‬‬ ‫ىذهٌالتفاحة‬
‫نافذةٌالسيارةٌالكبريٌةُ ‪iii.‬‬ ‫‪and‬‬ ‫نافذةٌالسيارةٌالكبريةِ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫الثوبٌنظيف ‪iv.‬‬ ‫‪and‬‬ ‫الثوبٌالنظيف‬

‫‪3.‬‬ ‫‪Correct the following and state the reason(s).‬‬

‫ٌالقبيحٌ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪i.‬‬ ‫َوٌلَ ٌد ٌ‬ ‫ٌاملدرسةٌ ‪iii.‬‬ ‫املعلم‬
‫ُ‬
‫الرجَلنٌالطويل ‪ii.‬‬ ‫ش ٌِر ‪iv.‬‬
‫ٌع َ‬
‫مثانيةُ َ‬
‫‪4.‬‬ ‫‪Translate, fill in the i‘raab and analyze the following.‬‬
‫‪i.‬‬ ‫بابٌفضلٌقيامٌليلةٌالقدر‬

‫‪12‬‬
Section 1.4.4
ِ ‫جَمَلَةٌََاَِس‬
Additional Notes About ٌ‫َمَيَ َة‬ ُ
1. Sometimes, the ‫خبَ ٌٌر‬
َ is not mentioned, in which case it will be regarded as hidden (‫َّر‬
ٌٌ‫) ُم َقد‬.1
e.g. ٌ‫ٌفٌالْ َم ْس ِج ِد‬
ٌ ِ ‫اٌَِْل َم ُام‬ The Imam is in the mosque.

َ‫ال َمس ِج ِد‬ ‫فَِي‬ ]‫َر‬ ِ ‫[ح‬

ٌَ ‫َاض‬
َ َ‫ام‬ َ ‫اَ ِل‬
ُ ‫َم‬
ٌ‫ٌَْمٌُرٌْوٌر‬ + ٌ‫فٌ ٌَجر‬
ٌُ ‫ٌَحٌْر‬

ٌِْ ِ‫ُجٌُْلَةٌٌٌا‬
ٌ‫َسٌيَّةٌٌ ٌَخ ٌِْبٌيَّة‬ ٌ = ٌْ ِ‫ٌُمتٌَ ٌَعٌلّْ ٌٌقٌٌب‬
ٌ‫الَِْب‬ + ٌ‫َخبَ ٌٌرٌ ٌُم ٌَق ٌَّدٌر‬ + ٌ‫ٌُمٌْبٌتَ ٌَدأ‬

2. The ‫خبَ ٌٌر‬

َ can be a complete sentence.
Example 1: ٌِ ‫ٌع‬
ٌ‫ال‬ َ ُ‫َزيْ ٌدٌأَبُ ْوه‬ Zayd’s father is knowledgable.

َ‫َعالِ ٌم‬ ُ‫أَبُوَه‬ َ‫َزي ٌد‬

‫افٌٌإٌِلٌَْيٌِو‬
ٌٌ ‫ض‬
ٌَ ‫ٌ ٌُم‬+ٌ‫اف‬
ٌٌ ‫ض‬
ٌَ ‫ٌُم‬

ٌِْ ِ‫ُجٌُْلَةٌٌٌا‬
ٌ‫َسٌيَّةٌٌ ٌَخ ٌِْبٌيَّة‬ ٌ = ٌ‫َخبَ ٌر‬ + ٌ‫ٌُمٌْبٌتَ ٌَدأ‬

ٌِْ ِ‫ُجٌُْلَةٌٌٌا‬
ٌ‫َسٌيَّةٌٌ ٌَخ ٌِْبٌيَّة‬ ٌ = ٌ‫ٌٌٌٌٌٌٌٌٌ َخبَ ٌٌر‬ + ٌٌ‫ٌُمٌْبٌتَ ٌَدأ‬

Example 2: ٌ‫ َزيْ ٌدٌأَ َك َلٌالطَّ َع َام‬Zayd ate the food.

َ‫ام‬
َ ‫الط َع‬ َ‫أَ َك َل‬ َ‫َزي ٌد‬
ٌ‫ُجٌُْلَةٌٌفِ ْعٌلٌِيَّةٌٌ ٌَخ ٌِْبٌيَّة‬
ٌ = ‫ َم ْفعُ ْوٌٌل‬+ ‫ٌم َعٌفَاعِلٌِِو‬
ٌَ ‫فِ ْع ٌل‬

ٌِْ ِ‫ُجٌُْلٌَةٌٌا‬
‫َسٌيٌَّةٌ ٌَخ ٌِْبٌيٌَّة‬ ٌ = ٌ‫ٌٌٌٌٌٌ َخبَ ٌٌر‬ + ٌٌ‫ٌُمٌْبٌتَ ٌَدأ‬

EXERCISE
1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab, and analyze the following sentences.
i. ‫القلمٌىفٌالفصل‬ ii. ‫الثورٌحيرثٌاَلرض‬

1
ٌٌ ّْ‫ ٌُمتٌَ ٌَعٌل‬is taken to be ‫ َخبَ ٌٌر‬. See Hasan Dockrat, A
However, generally, to simplify matters, the ‫ق‬
Simplified Arabic Grammar, (Azaadvillle: Madrasa Arabia Islamia, 2003 ), 37.

13
‫‪Summary‬‬
‫ٌلَْفظٌ‬

‫عٌ‬
‫ض ْو ٌ‬
‫َم ٌْو ُ‬ ‫ُم ْه َم ٌلٌ‬

‫ُم ْفَرٌدٌ‬ ‫ُمَرَّك ٌ‬

‫بٌ‬

‫اِ ْس ٌمٌ‬ ‫فِ ْع ٌلٌ‬ ‫فٌ‬

‫َحْر ٌ‬ ‫ٌم ِفْي َدةٌٌ‬
‫ُجُْلَةٌ ُ‬
‫ُجلَةٌٌ َغي رٌم ِفي َدٌةٍ‬
‫ُْ ْ ُ ُ ْ‬

‫َج ِامدٌ‬ ‫َما ٍ‬

‫ضٌ‬ ‫َع ِام ٌلٌ‬ ‫بٌتَ ْو ِصْي ِف ّّيٌ‬
‫ُمَرَّك ٌ‬

‫ص َد ٌرٌ‬
‫َم ْ‬ ‫ضا ِرٌ‬
‫عٌ‬ ‫ُم َ‬ ‫َغْي ُرٌالْ َع ِام ِلٌ‬ ‫ض ٌِ‬
‫افّّ‬ ‫بٌإِ َ‬
‫ُمَرَّك ٌ‬
‫ٌٌ‬ ‫ٌ‬
‫ٌٌٌٌٌ ُم ْشتَ ٌّّق‬ ‫أ َْمٌرٌ‬ ‫بٌإِ َشا ِر ّّ‬
‫يٌ‬ ‫ُمَرَّك ٌ‬
‫ٌ‬ ‫ُجُْلَةٌٌإِنْ َشائِيَّةٌ‬
‫ٌ‬ ‫ٌٌ‬ ‫ُجُْلَةٌٌ ٌَخ ٌَِبٌيَّةٌ‬
‫ٌٌٌٌٌٌٌٌ‬ ‫نَ ْه ٌيٌ‬ ‫بٌبِنَائِ ّّيٌ‬
‫ُمَرَّك ٌ‬

‫ٌالصر ِ‬
‫فٌ‬ ‫ُمَرَّك ٌ‬
‫ب ٌَمْن ُع َّ ْ‬
‫ٌٌٌٌٌٌٌٌٌ‬
‫ُجُْلَةٌٌفِ ْعلِيَّةٌ‬ ‫ُجُْلَةٌٌاِ َِْسيَّةٌ‬

‫بٌ‬
‫تَ َع ُّج ٌ‬ ‫ضٌ‬
‫َعْر ٌ‬ ‫تَ َر ّْجى‬ ‫اِ ْستِ ْف َه ٌامٌ‬ ‫أ َْمٌرٌ‬
‫ُع ُق ْوٌدٌ‬ ‫قَ َس ٌمٌ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ن َد ٌاءٌ‬ ‫َتََّّْنٌ‬ ‫نَ ْه ٌيٌ‬

‫‪14‬‬
Section 1.5

َ‫َم‬ ِ ‫َات‬
ِ ‫ََالَس‬
ُ ‫َم‬
َ ‫ََل‬
َ ‫ – َع‬Signs of a Noun:َ
1. It is preceded by an ‫ال‬. e.g. ٌ‫اَ َّلر ٌُج ُل‬ the man
2. It is preceded by a ٌ‫جر‬
ٌَ ٌ‫ف‬
ٌُ ‫ ٌَحٌْر‬. e.g. ‫بِاٌلْ ٌَقٌلَ ٌِم‬ with the pen
3. There is tanween on the last letter. e.g. ‫َر ُج ٌٌل‬ a man
4. It ends with a round ‫ة‬. e.g. ٌ‫َكلِ َمة‬ a word
5. It is a dual )ٌ‫(تٌٌَثٌْنٌِيَة‬.2 e.g. ‫َر ُج ََل ٌِن‬ two men
6. It is a plural )‫ُجَْ ٌٌع‬
ٌ (. e.g. ٌٌ ‫ِر َج‬
‫ال‬ men
7. It is a ‫سنَ ٌدٌٌإِلَْي ٌِو‬ ٌِ َ‫(ٌف‬
ْ ‫ ٌُمٌْبٌتَ ٌَدأٌ)ٌ ُم‬or ‫اع ٌٌل‬ e.g. ٌ‫ى‬ ّّ ‫ا َّلر ُج ُلٌقَ ِو‬ The man is strong.
e.g. ‫س ٌَزيْ ٌد‬ َ َ‫َجل‬ Zayd sat.
8. It is ‫اف‬
ٌٌ ‫ض‬
َ ‫ ُم‬. e.g. ‫ابٌ ِزيْ ٌٍد‬ ُ َ‫كت‬
ِ book of Zayd
9. It is ‫ف‬
ٌٌ ‫ص ْو‬
ُ ‫ َم ْو‬. e.g. ‫َر ُج ٌلٌطَ ِويْ ٌٌل‬ tall man
10. It is ‫ ُمنَادٌى‬. e.g. ‫اٌر ُج ٌُل‬ َ َ‫ي‬ O man!
11. It is ‫َّر‬
ٌٌ‫صغ‬َ ‫ ُم‬. e.g. ‫ُر َجْي ٌٌل‬ a little man
12. It is ‫ب‬
ٌٌ ‫ َمْن ُس ْو‬. e.g. ‫َم ّْك ٌّّى‬ a Makkan

َ‫َل‬ ِ ‫َاتََال‬
ِ ‫َفَع‬ ُ ‫َم‬
َ ‫ََل‬
َ ‫ – َع‬Signs of a Verb:
1. It is preceded by ‫قَ ٌْد‬. e.g. ٌ‫ٌخَر َج‬
َ ‫قَ ْد‬ He has gone out.
2. It is preceded by ‫س‬
ٌَ . e.g. ٌُ ‫َسيَ ْخُر‬
‫ج‬ He will soon go out.
3. It is preceded by ‫ف‬
ٌَ ‫ َس ْو‬. e.g. ٌُ ‫ٌَيُْر‬
‫ج‬ َ‫ف‬ َ ‫َس ْو‬ He will go out after a while.
4. It is preceded by ‫ٌج ْزٌٍم‬َ ‫ف‬ ُ ‫ َح ْر‬. e.g. ٌْ ‫ٌَيُْر‬
‫ج‬ َ ْ‫َل‬ He did not go out.
5. It is preceded by ‫ب‬ ٌٍ ‫ص‬ ٌْ َ‫فٌن‬ ُ ‫ َح ْر‬. e.g. ٌَ ‫ٌَيُْر‬
‫ج‬ َ ‫لَ ْن‬ He will never go out.
6. It has a hidden ‫ض ِمْي ٌٌر‬
َ. e.g. ٌَ ‫َخَر‬
‫ج‬ He went out.
7. It is an imperative )‫(أ ٌْمٌٌر‬. e.g. ٌْ ‫اُ ْخُر‬
‫ج‬ Go out.
8. It is a prohibitive )‫ى‬ ٌٌ ‫(نٌَ ٌْه‬. e.g. ٌْ ‫ٌَتُْر‬
‫ج‬ َ ‫ََل‬ Do not go out.

ِ ‫َمةََُالَحَر‬
َ‫َف‬ َ ََ ‫ََل‬ َ ‫ – َع‬Sign of a Particle:
That word which has no sign of a noun or verb is a particle (a particle has no sign of its own).

2
Verbs are said to be dual and plural with respect to their doers )‫ل‬ َِ ‫(َف‬. The action is one. Thus, duality
ٌَ ‫اع‬
and plurality are signs of a noun and not a verb.

15
Section 1.5.1
General Notes

ٌْ ِ‫ (ٌا‬is indicated by a tanween. Such a noun is called ٌ‫ٌنَ ٌِكٌَرة‬.

1. The indefiniteness of a noun )‫س ٌٌم‬
e.g. ٌ‫ت‬
ٌ ‫بَْي‬ a house (any house)
2. The definiteness of a noun is indicated by an ‫ال‬. Such a noun is called ‫ ٌَم ٌْعٌِرٌفٌَة‬.
e.g. ٌ‫ت‬
ُ ‫اَلْبَ ْي‬ the house (a specific house)
3. A noun can never have a tanween and an ‫ ال‬at the same time.
e.g. ٌ‫ت‬
ٌ ‫ اَلْبَ ْي‬is incorrect.
4. When the last letter of a word and the first letter of the following word have sukoon (‫)ﹿ‬, it
ٌِ ْ َ‫ٌالساكِن‬ ِ
is called ‫ي‬ َّ ُ‫( ا ْجتِ َماع‬the meeting of two sukoons). In this case, the first sukoon will be
changed to a kasrah.
e.g. ‫ت‬ ٌُ ‫ت ٌالْبِْن‬ ِ ‫ضرب‬. The ‫ص ٌِل‬
ٌُ ‫ت ٌالْبِْن‬
ْ َ‫ضَرب‬
َ will become ‫ت‬ ََ َ ٌْ ‫ ٌَهٌَْزٌةُ ٌاٌلٌَْو‬before the ‫ ل‬will not be
pronounced.
ٌِ ‫الش ٌْم‬
5. When an ‫ ال‬appears before a noun, which begins with a letter from ُ‫سٌيٌَّة‬ ٌَّ ٌ ‫وف‬
ٌُ ‫( ٌاَ ٌْلٌُُر‬sun
letters) then the ‫ ل‬of ‫ ال‬must not be pronounced. The ‫ ل‬of ‫ ال‬will not get a sukoon. Instead
the ‫ي‬ ٌِ ْ‫ش‬
ٌّّ ‫س‬ ٌَ ٌ‫ف‬
ٌٌ ‫ َح ْر‬will get a tashdeed.
e.g. ُ‫َّجَرٌة‬
َ ‫اَلش‬
ٌِ ‫الش ٌْم‬
ُ‫سٌيٌَّة‬ ٌَّ ٌ‫وف‬ ٌُ ‫تٌٌٌثٌٌٌدٌٌٌذٌٌٌرٌٌٌزٌٌٌسٌٌٌشٌٌٌصٌٌٌضٌٌٌطٌٌٌظٌٌٌلٌٌٌنٌٌٌ=ٌٌاَ ٌْلٌُُر‬
6. The remaining letters are known as ُ‫وفٌاٌلْ ٌَق ٌَمٌِرٌيٌَّة‬ ٌُ ‫( ٌاَ ٌْلٌُُر‬moon letters). In these, the ‫ ل‬of ‫ ال‬will get
a sukoon and will be pronounced. The ‫ي‬ ٌّّ ‫فٌٌقَ ٌَمٌِر‬
ٌٌ ‫ ٌَح ْر‬will not get a tashdeed.
e.g. ‫ اَلْ َقلَ ٌُم‬the pen
7. Generally, a noun ending with a round ‫اءٌُاٌلْ ٌَمٌْرٌبُو ٌطٌَةُ) ة‬ ٌ َّ‫ (ٌاَلٌت‬is a feminine )‫ث‬ ٌٌ َّ‫ ( ٌُمٌَؤٌن‬noun.
e.g. ٌ‫سبُّ ْوَرة‬ َ blackboard
8. The ٌ‫ص ٌَفة‬ ٌِْ ٌ‫ولٌ–ٌٌفِ ٌْع ٌٌلٌ–ٌٌاِ ٌْس ٌُم‬
ٌِ ٌ–ٌِ‫ال ٌَش ٌَارٌة‬ ٌُ ‫ َخبَ ٌٌرٌ–ٌاٌََِْل ٌْس ٌُمٌاٌلْ ٌَم ٌْو‬etc. of a ‫( ٌَغْيٌٌُرٌاٌلْ ٌَع ٌاقِ ٌِل‬non-human) plural will be
ٌُ ‫ص‬
ٌٌ َّ‫اح ٌدٌ ٌُمٌَؤٌن‬
‫ث‬ ٌِ ‫ٌَو‬.
e.g.
‫صنَ ٌامٌ َكثِْي َرٌة‬
ْ َ‫ٌأ‬ many idols ‫صنَ ُام ٌََلٌتَْن َف ٌُع‬
ْ َ‫اٌَْل‬ The idols do not benefit.
‫صنَ ٌُام‬ ٌْ ٌِ‫ ى ٌِذٌه‬These idols.
ْ َ‫ال‬ ‫ٌجالِ َسٌة‬َ ُ‫ٌالَا ِر َسة‬
ْ ‫ب‬ ِ
ُ ‫ اَلْك ََل‬The guard dogs are sitting.
ً‫تٌ َكثِْي َرٌة‬ ِ
ُ ‫َكانَتٌالْبُيُ ْو‬ The houses were many.
9. When writing a noun ending with two fathahs (‫)ﹱ‬, an alif )ٌ‫ (ٌا‬must be added at the end.
e.g. ‫َزيْ ًدا‬

16
Section 1.6
َ‫ – اَلضَ ََم َائُِر‬Personal Pronouns

Definition: ‫ض َمٌ ٌائٌُِر‬

ٌَ (singular: ٌ‫ض ِم ٌري‬
َ ) are those words, which refer to the speaker )‫ ( ٌُمٌتَ ٌَكٌلّْ ٌٌم‬or the
second person )‫اضٌٌر‬ ٌِ ‫ ( ٌَح‬or the third person )‫ب‬ٌٌ ِ‫( ٌَغ ٌائ‬.

Table 1.1
َ‫ – اَلضَ ََم َائُِر‬Personal Pronouns

Unattached Form )‫ل‬ َِ ‫( َُمنَ َف‬

ٌَ ‫ص‬ Attached Form )‫ل‬ َِ َ‫( َُمت‬
ٌَ ‫ص‬
ِ ٌِ ‫ٌَو‬
ٌ‫ُى َو‬ He (one male), it ٌ‫ُه‬ his, its, him ٌ‫ب‬ ٌ ‫اح ٌدٌ ٌُمٌَذ ٌَّكٌٌرٌ ٌَغ ٌائ‬
‫ُهَا‬ They (two males) ‫ُهَا‬ their, them ٌٌ ِ‫تٌٌَثٌْنٌِيَةٌٌ ٌُمٌَذ ٌَّكٌٌرٌ ٌَغ ٌائ‬
‫ب‬
‫ُى ٌْم‬ They (many males) ‫ُى ٌْم‬ their, them ٌٌ ِ‫ُجَْ ٌٌعٌ ٌُمٌَذ ٌَّكٌٌرٌ ٌَغ ٌائ‬
‫ب‬ ٌ
‫ٌِى ٌَي‬ She (one female), it ‫َىا‬ her, its ٌٌ ِ‫ثٌ ٌَغ ٌائ‬
‫ب‬ ٌٌ َّ‫اح ٌدٌ ٌُمٌَؤٌن‬ ٌِ ‫ٌَو‬
‫ُهَا‬ They (two females) ‫ُهَا‬ their, them ٌٌ ِ‫ثٌ ٌَغ ٌائ‬
‫ب‬ ٌٌ َّ‫تٌٌَثٌْنٌِيَةٌٌ ٌُمٌَؤٌن‬
‫ُى ٌَّن‬ They (many females) ‫ُى ٌَّن‬ their, them ٌٌ ِ‫ثٌ ٌَغ ٌائ‬
‫ب‬ ٌٌ َّ‫ُجَْ ٌٌعٌ ٌُم ٌَؤٌن‬
ٌ
ٌَ ْ‫ٌأَن‬
‫ت‬ You (one male) ٌ‫َك‬ your ‫اضٌٌر‬ ٌِ ‫اح ٌدٌ ٌُمٌَذ ٌَّكٌٌرٌ ٌَح‬ ٌِ ‫ٌَو‬
‫ٌأَنْتُ َما‬ You (two males) ‫ُك َما‬ your ‫اضٌٌر‬ ٌِ ‫تٌٌَثٌْنٌِيَةٌٌ ٌُمٌَذ ٌَّكٌٌرٌ ٌَح‬
‫ٌأَنْتُ ٌْم‬ You (many males) ‫ُك ٌْم‬ your ‫اضٌٌر‬ ٌِ ‫ُجَْ ٌٌعٌ ٌُمٌَذ ٌَّكٌٌرٌ ٌَح‬ ٌ
ٌِ ْ‫ٌأَن‬
‫ت‬ You (one female) ‫ٌِك‬ your ‫اضٌٌر‬ ٌِ ‫ثٌ ٌَح‬ ٌٌ َّ‫اح ٌدٌ ٌُمٌَؤٌن‬ٌِ ‫ٌَو‬
‫ ٌأَنْتُ َما‬You (two females) ‫ُك َما‬ your ‫اضٌٌر‬ ٌِ ‫ثٌ ٌَح‬ ٌٌ َّ‫تٌٌَثٌْنٌِيَةٌٌ ٌُمٌَؤٌن‬
ٌَّ ُ ْ‫ ٌأَن‬You (many females)
‫ت‬ ‫ُك ٌَّن‬ your ‫اضٌٌر‬ٌِ ‫ثٌ ٌَح‬ ٌٌ َّ‫ُجَْ ٌٌعٌ ٌُم ٌَؤٌن‬
ٌ
‫ ٌأَنَا‬I (one male or female) ‫ى‬ my )‫ث‬ ٌٌ َّ‫وٌمٌَؤٌن‬ ٌِ ‫ٌَو‬
ٌُ ٌ‫اح ٌدٌ ٌُمٌتَ ٌَكٌلّْ ٌٌمٌ( ٌُمٌَذ ٌَّكٌٌر‬
‫ ََْن ٌُن‬We (many males or ‫نَا‬ our ٌ ٌ‫تٌٌَثٌْنٌِيٌَةٌ ٌَو‬
‫ُجَْ ٌٌعٌ ٌُمٌتَ ٌَكٌلّْ ٌٌم‬
females)
)‫ث‬ٌٌ َّ‫وٌمٌَؤٌن‬ ٌُ ٌ‫( ٌُمٌَذ ٌَّكٌٌر‬

e.g. ٌ‫ُى َو ٌَزيْد‬ He is Zayd. ٌ‫ك‬َ ‫قَلَ ُم‬ your pen

ٌٌ ِ‫ٌأَنَاٌطَال‬
‫ب‬ I am a student. ‫ص ْرتُ َها‬
َ َ‫ن‬ I helped her.

17
Section 1.7
ُ‫ج َارَة‬
ََ َ‫وفَال‬
َُ ‫ح َر‬
َُ ‫ – َاَل‬Prepositions

Effect: A ٌ‫جر‬
َ ٌ‫ف‬
ٌٌ ‫ َح ْر‬gives a ‫ َجٌّّر‬to the noun it enters upon, which is then known as ‫ور‬
ٌٌ ‫ ٌَْمٌُر‬.

Table 1.2
ُ‫ج َارَة‬
ََ َ‫وفَال‬
َُ ‫حَر‬
َُ َ‫ – َال‬Prepositions

َ‫فَ َجر‬
َُ ‫َحر‬ Meaning Example
1. ‫ب‬ ٌِ with ٌ‫تٌبِالْ َقلَ ِم‬
ُ ‫َكتَْب‬ I wrote with the pen.
ٌ‫ت‬ ِ‫الل‬
ٌ َ‫ت‬
2. َ by (for oath) By Allah!
3. ‫ٌَك‬ like ٌ‫الَ َس ِد‬ ٌْ ‫َزيْ ٌدٌ َك‬ Zayd is like a lion.
4. ‫ٌِل‬ for ‫اَ ْلَ ْم ُد ٌٌلِ ٌِلو‬ All praise is for Allah.
5. ٌ‫َو‬ by (oath) ِ‫الل‬
ٌ ‫َو‬ By Allah!
6. ‫ُمْن ٌُذ‬ since ٌ‫ٌمْن ُذٌأٌُ ْسبُ ْوٍع‬ ُ ُ‫اٌرأٌَيْتُو‬
ٌَ ‫َم‬ I have not seen him since a week.
7. ‫ُم ٌْذ‬ since/for ‫ٌم ْذٌأٌَْربَ َع ِةٌٌأَيَّ ٌٍام‬
ُ ُ‫اٌرأٌَيْتُو‬
ٌَ ‫َم‬ I did not see him for four days.
8. ٌ‫َخ ََل‬ besides, except ‫ٌزيْ ٌٍد‬ َ ‫ٌخ ََل‬ َ ‫َّاس‬ ُ ‫َجاءٌَالن‬ The people came except Zayd.
ٌَّ ‫ُر‬
‫ب‬ many a…
‫الٌيَ ْع َم ُلٌبِعِْل ِمٌِو‬ ٍِ ‫ٌع‬ Many a learned person acts on his
َ ‫ب‬ َّ ‫ُر‬
9.
knowledge.
10. ‫اشا‬
َ ‫َح‬ besides, except ‫اٌزيْ ٌٍد‬ َ ‫اش‬ َ ‫ٌح‬ َ ‫َّاس‬ ُ ‫َجاءٌَالن‬ The people came except Zayd.
11. ٌ‫ِم ْن‬ from َّ ‫ت ٌِم َن‬
‫ٌالس ٌَف ٌِر‬ ُ ‫َر َج ْع‬ I returned from the journey.
12. ‫َع َدا‬ besides, except ‫اٌزيْ ٌٍد‬ َ ‫ٌع َد‬ َ ‫َّاس‬ ُ ‫َجاءٌَالن‬ The people came except Zayd.
13. ٌ‫ف‬
ْ
ِ in, regarding ٌِ ‫ٌفٌالْبَ ْي‬
‫ت‬ ٌ ِ ‫َزيْ ٌد‬ Zayd is in the house.
ٌِ ْ‫ٌع ِنٌالْ َم ِري‬ َِّ
14. ٌ‫َع ْن‬ from, regarding ‫ض‬ َ ‫ب‬ ُ ‫ٌَسٌأَ َلٌالطبْي‬ The doctor asked about the patient.
15. ٌ‫َعلى‬ on ‫لىٌالْ ُك ْرٌِس ٌّْي‬ ٌَ ‫بٌ َع‬ ُ ‫اَلث َّْو‬ The cloth/clothes is/are on the chair.
16. ٌ‫ح ّت‬ ٌِ‫الصْبح‬ُّ ٌ‫ت‬ ٌّ ‫تٌ َح‬ ِ
َ up to, until ُ ْ‫ِن‬ I slept till dawn.
17. ٌ‫ٌإِل‬ up to, towards ‫لٌالْ َم ِديْنٌَِة‬ ٌَ ِ‫تٌٌإ‬ُ ‫َسافَ ْر‬ I travelled to Madinah.

Example 1: ٌ ِ ‫َلِمٌ ٌَكاٌلْ ٌِمٌْل ِح‬

ٌ‫ٌىفٌال ٌطٌََّع ِام‬ ٌ ِ ٌ‫ح ٌُو‬
ٌَ ‫ىفٌاٌلْ ٌَك‬ ٌْ َّ‫ٌٌٌٌٌٌ ٌاَلٌن‬Grammar in speech is like salt in food.

18
Example 2 with Sentence Analysis:
َ‫َََبِال َقلَ ِم‬ َ‫ت‬
ُ ‫َكتَب‬ I wrote with the pen.
ٌٌ ‫ ٌَْمٌُر‬+ ٌ‫ٌجر‬
‫ور‬ َ ‫ف‬
ٌ ‫َح ْر‬

‫ُجٌُْلٌَةٌفِ ْعٌلٌِيٌَّةٌ ٌَخ ٌَِبٌيٌَّة‬

ٌ = ‫ٌُمتٌَ ٌَعٌلّْ ٌٌقٌٌبِاٌلْ ٌِف ٌْع ٌِل‬ + ‫ل‬ ٌِ َ‫ٌٌف‬+ٌ‫ٌفِ ٌْع ٌٌل‬
ٌٌ ‫اع‬
Note: Together, the ٌ‫جر‬ َ ٌ‫ف‬ ٌٌ ‫ َح ْر‬and ‫ور‬ ٌِْ ِ‫ُجٌُْلَةٌٌٌا‬
ٌٌ ‫ ٌَْمٌُر‬are known as ‫( ٌُمتٌَ ٌَعٌلّْ ٌٌق‬connected) of the ‫ َخبَ ٌٌر‬in ٌ‫َسٌيَّة‬ ٌ and
ٌٌ ‫ ٌفِ ٌْع‬in ٌ‫ُجٌُْلَةٌٌٌفٌِْعٌلٌِيَّة‬
of the ‫ل‬ ٌ.

EXERCISE
1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and analyze the following sentences.
i. ‫املسجدٌقريبٌمنٌبيتٌزيد‬ iii. ‫الكتبٌعلىٌاملنضدة‬
ii. ‫نزلٌاملطرٌمنٌالسماء‬ iv. ‫زينبٌجالسةٌعلىٌالكرسىٌىفٌالجرة‬

19
Section 1.8
َ‫شبَ ََه َةََُبِالَ َِفعَ ِل‬
َ ‫وفَ َال َُم‬
َُ ‫ح َُر‬
َُ ‫ – َاَل‬Those Particles That Resemble the Verb

 ٌِ ‫شبٌَّ ٌَه ٌةٌٌُبِاٌلْ ٌِف ٌْع‬

These are called ‫ل‬ ٌُ ‫ ٌاَ ٌْلٌُُر‬because like ‫ٌاٌَلْ ٌِف ٌْع ٌُلٌاٌلْ ٌُمتٌَ ٌَع ٌّْدى‬, they also govern two words.
ٌَ ‫وفٌاٌلْ ٌُم‬
 These ‫وف‬ ٌِْ ِ‫ُجٌُْلَةٌٌٌا‬
ٌٌ ‫ ٌُحٌُر‬appear before a ٌ‫ ٌُمٌْبٌتَ ٌَدأ‬and ‫َسٌيَّةٌ)ٌ َخبَ ٌٌر‬ ٌ (.
ِ ِ
Effect: Such a particle gives a ‫ب‬ ْ َ‫ ٌن‬to the ٌ‫ ٌُمٌْبٌتَ ٌَدأ‬which is then known as ‫( ا ْس ُم ٌٌإِ ٌَّن‬or ‫ ٌا ْس ٌُم ٌأٌَ ٌَّن‬and so
ٌٌ ‫ص‬
َ which is then known as ‫( َخبٌَُرٌٌإِ ٌَّن‬or ‫ َخبٌَُرٌأٌَ ٌَّن‬and so on).
on) and a ‫ َرفْ ٌٌع‬to the ‫خبَ ٌٌر‬

Table 1.3
‫شبَ ََه َةََُبِالَ َِفعَ َِل‬
َ ‫وفَالَ َُم‬
َُ ‫حَُر‬
َُ َ‫ – َال‬Those Particles That Resemble the Verb

Meaning Example
1. ٌ‫ٌإِ َّن‬ certainly, verily, indeed ٌ‫ٌعلِْي ٌم‬
َ َ‫ٌإِ َّنٌالل‬ Verily Allah is All Knowing.
2. ‫ٌأَ ٌَّن‬ certainly, verily; that ٌ ‫ٌاَلمتِحا َنٌقَ ِري‬
‫ب‬ ِْ ‫علِمتٌأٌَ َّن‬ I knew that the examination
ٌْ َ ْ ُ َْ
was near.
3. َّ ‫ َكأ‬as if
ٌ‫َن‬ ٌ‫ٌج ِديْد‬
َ ‫ت‬ َّ ‫َكأ‬
َ ‫َنٌالْبَ ْي‬ It is as if the house is new.
4. ‫ن‬ٌَّ ‫ لٌ ِك‬but, however ِ َ‫ اَلْب يتٌج ِدي ٌدٌلٌكِ ٌَّنٌ ْالَث‬The house is new but the
ٌ‫اثٌقَد ٌْي‬
َ ْ َ ُ َْ
furniture is old.
5. ٌ‫ت‬ َ ‫ لَْي‬if only, I wish ٌ‫ٌعائِد‬ َ ‫اب‬
َ َ‫تٌالشَّب‬ َ ‫لَْي‬ I wish youth would return.
6. ‫ل‬ٌَّ ‫ لَ َع‬maybe, hopefully, ‫ٌس ْه ٌٌل‬ ِ ِْ ‫لَع َّل‬
َ ‫ٌاَل ْمت َحا َن‬
Hopefully, the examination
َ
perhaps will be easy.

Sentence Analysis:
َ‫َعلِي ٌم‬ َ‫الل‬
َ َ ِ‫إ‬
‫َن‬ Indeed, Allah is All-Knowing.
‫َخْب ُرٌٌإِ ٌَّن‬ ‫اِ ْس ُمٌٌإِ ٌَّن‬ ‫شبٌَّ ٌَهٌةٌٌُبِاٌلْ ٌِف ٌْع ٌِل‬
ٌَ ‫فٌاٌلْ ٌُم‬
ٌُ ‫ٌاَ ٌْلٌَْر‬

Notes:
1. Difference between ‫ ٌإِ ٌَّن‬and ‫ٌأَ ٌَّن‬:
a. ‫ ٌإِ ٌَّن‬is generally used at the beginning of a sentence.
ٌ‫ ٌأَ َّن‬is generally used in the middle of a sentence.
b. Sometimes, ‫ ٌإِ ٌَّن‬appears in the middle of a sentence. This happens when it is used after
a word with root letters ‫قٌ–ٌوٌ–ٌل‬.
e.g. َ ٌ‫يَ ُق ْو ُلٌٌإِن ََّهاٌبَ َقَرة‬
ُ‫ٌص ْفَر ٌاء‬ He says, it is a yellow cow.

20
‫خبَ ٌٌر ‪2. The‬‬
‫‪َ can be a complete sentence.‬‬
‫ٌإِ ٌَّنٌزيداٌٌأُُّم ٌوٌص ِ‬
‫الٌَة‬
‫ٌ‪Example 1:‬‬ ‫َْ ً ُ َ‬ ‫‪Indeed, Zayd’s mother is pious.‬‬

‫صالِ َح َةٌ‬
‫َ‬ ‫أَُم َوُ‬ ‫َزي ًدا‬ ‫إَِنَ‬
‫افٌٌإٌِلَ ِيوٌ‬
‫ض ٌٌ‬
‫افٌ‪ٌُ ٌ+‬م ٌَ‬
‫ض ٌٌ‬
‫ٌُم ٌَ‬

‫ُجٌُْلٌَةٌٌاِ ٌِْ‬
‫َسٌيٌَّةٌ َخ َِبيٌَّة)‬ ‫= (ٌ‬ ‫َخبَ ٌرٌ‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫ٌُمٌْبٌتَ ٌَدأٌ‬

‫َخْب ُرٌٌإِ َّنٌ‬ ‫اِ ْس ُمٌٌإِ َّنٌ‬ ‫شبٌَّ ٌَهٌةٌٌُبِاٌلْ ٌِف ٌْع ِلٌ‬
‫فٌاٌلْ ٌُم ٌَ‬
‫ٌاَ ٌْلٌُْر ٌُ‬

‫‪Example 2:‬‬ ‫ٌإِ ٌَّنٌ َزيْ ًداٌٌأَ َك ٌَلٌالطَّ َع َامٌ‬ ‫‪Indeed, Zayd ate the food.‬‬

‫امَ‬
‫الط َع َ‬ ‫أَ َك َلَ‬ ‫َزي ًدا‬ ‫إَِنَ‬
‫ُجٌُْلَةٌٌفِ ْعٌلٌِيَّةٌٌ َخ َِبيَّةٌ)‬
‫ول = ( ٌ‬
‫‪ٌَ +‬م ٌْف ٌعُ ٌٌ‬ ‫اعٌِلٌِِو‬
‫ٌفِ ٌْع ٌٌلٌ ٌَم ٌَعٌٌفَ ٌ‬

‫َخبٌَُرٌٌإِ َّنٌ‬ ‫اِ ْس ُمٌٌإِ َّنٌ‬ ‫شبٌَّ ٌَهٌةٌٌُبِاٌلْ ٌِف ٌْع ِلٌ‬
‫فٌاٌلْ ٌُم ٌَ‬
‫ٌاَ ٌْلٌُْر ٌُ‬

‫جرٌ ‪3. If there is a‬‬ ‫‪ second.‬اِ ْس ٌٌم ‪َ will appear first and the‬خبَ ٌٌر ‪َ , then the‬خبَ ٌٌر ‪َ before the‬ح ْر ٌٌ‬
‫فٌ َ‬
‫‪e.g.‬‬ ‫إِ ٌَّنٌإِلَينَاٌإِيَابَ ُه ْمٌ‬ ‫‪Indeed, to us is their return.‬‬

‫إِيَابَ ُهمَ‬ ‫إِلَينَا‬ ‫إِنَ‬

‫افٌٌإٌِلَ ِيوٌ‬
‫ض ٌٌ‬
‫افٌ‪ٌُ ٌ+‬م ٌَ‬
‫ض ٌٌ‬
‫ٌُم ٌَ‬ ‫ٌمُر ٌٌ‬
‫ور‬ ‫َج ّّار ٌَو َْ‬

‫اِ ْس ُمٌإِ ٌَّنٌ( ٌُمٌَؤ ٌَّخٌٌر)‬ ‫َخْب ُرٌإِ ٌَّنٌ( ٌُم ٌَق ٌَّد ٌٌم)‬ ‫شبٌَّ ٌَهٌةٌٌُبِاٌلْ ٌِف ٌْع ِلٌ‬
‫فٌاٌلْ ٌُم ٌَ‬
‫ٌاَ ٌْلٌَْر ٌُ‬

‫كاٌفٌَّةُ ‪4. When‬‬

‫وف ‪ٌَ is joined to any of these‬ماٌاٌلْ ٌَ‬
‫‪ٌُ , their effect will be cancelled.‬حٌُر ٌٌ‬
‫‪e.g.‬‬ ‫ٌإٌَِِّنَاٌٌإِ ٌلُ ٌُك ٌْمٌٌإِلٌ ٌوٌٌٌَو ٌِ‬
‫احدٌ‬ ‫‪Your god is only one god.‬‬

‫‪EXCERISE‬‬
‫‪1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab, and analyze the following sentences.‬‬

‫لعلٌاملريضٌنائم ‪i.‬‬ ‫‪iv.‬‬ ‫كأنٌالقمرٌمصباح‬

‫اعلمٌأنٌزيداٌعاقل ‪ii.‬‬ ‫ليتٌالقمرٌطالع ‪v.‬‬
‫إنٌرجَلٌدخلٌالبيت ‪iii.‬‬ ‫إنٌعليناٌبيانو ‪vi.‬‬

‫‪21‬‬
Section 1.9
ََ ‫ – َالَفَ ََعالََُالنَ َِاق‬Auxiliary (Defective) Verbs
ُ‫ص َة‬

 Such a verb is called ‫ص‬ ٌٌ ِ‫( ٌنَ ٌاق‬incomplete) because even though it is a ‫ٌفِ ٌْع ٌٌل ٌََلٌٌِزٌٌم‬, it needs two
ma‘mools (‫ي‬
ٌَ ْ َ‫) َم ْع ُمول‬. The sentence remains incomplete with one ‫ول‬ ٌٌ ‫ َم ْع ُم‬.
e.g. ٌ‫َكا َن ٌَزيْد‬ Zayd was (the sentence remains incomplete).
 These verbs enter on a ٌ‫ ٌُمٌْبٌتَ ٌَدأ‬and a ‫خبَ ٌٌر‬ ٌِْ ِ‫ُجٌُْلٌَةٌٌا‬
َ ٌ)‫َسٌيٌَّة‬ ٌ (.
Effect: They give ‫ ٌَرفْ ٌٌع‬to the ٌ‫ ٌُمٌْبٌتَ ٌَدأ‬, which becomes known as ‫( اِ ْس ُم ٌ َكا ٌَن‬or ‫ار‬
ٌَ ‫ص‬ ِ
َ ٌ ‫ ٌا ْس ٌُم‬and so on) and
ٌٌ ‫ص‬
‫ب‬ ْ َ‫ ن‬to the ‫ َخبَ ٌٌر‬, which becomes known as ‫( َخبٌَُرٌ َكا ٌَن‬or ‫ار‬
ٌَ ‫ص‬
َ ٌ‫ َخبٌَُر‬and so on).

Table 1.4

َ‫ص‬ ِ ِ
ٌ َ‫فَعَ ٌَلََنَاق‬ Meaning Example
1. ‫َكا ٌَن‬ was ‫تٌنَ ٌِظْي ًفا‬ُ ‫َكا َنٌالْبَ ْي‬ The house was clean.

2. ‫ار‬
ٌَ ‫ص‬َ
became ‫ٌالر ُج ُلٌ َغنِيِّا‬
َّ ‫ص َار‬ َ
The man became wealthy.

3. ‫ح‬
ٌَ َ‫صب‬
ْ َ‫ٌأ‬ happen in the morning ‫ضا‬ً ْ‫ٌم ِري‬َ ‫صبَ َح ٌَزيْ ٌد‬
ْ ٌَ‫أ‬ Zayd became ill in the
morning.
OR

became ‫صبَ َح ٌَزيْ ٌدٌ َغنِيِّا‬

ْ ٌَ‫أ‬ Zayd became rich.

4. ‫أٌَْمسٌى‬ happen in the evening, ‫ٌمْتعِبًا‬ ِ

ُ ‫أٌَْم َسىٌالْ َعام ُل‬
The worker became tired in
became the evening.
5. ‫ضحى‬
ْ َ‫ٌأ‬ happen at mid-morning, ‫ضحىٌالْغَمامٌ َكثِي ًفا‬
َ ْ ٌَ‫أ‬
The clouds became dense at
ْ َُ
became mid morning.
6. ‫ل‬
ٌَّ َ‫ظ‬ happen during the day, ٌ‫ظَ ٌَّلٌالْ َمطَُرٌنَا ِزًَل‬ It rained the whole day.
became
7. ‫ات‬
ٌَ َ‫ب‬ happen during the ‫ات ٌَزيْ ٌدٌنَائِ ًما‬
َ َ‫ب‬ Zayd passed the night
night, became sleeping.
8. ‫ام‬
ٌَ ‫اٌد‬ ‫ٌجالِ ًسا‬ ِ ِ
َ ‫َم‬ as long as
َ ‫اٌد َام ٌَزيْ ٌد‬
َ ‫ٌم‬ َ‫س‬ ْ ‫ا ْجل‬
Sit as long as Zayd is sitting.

9. ‫ال‬
ٌَ ‫اٌز‬
َ ‫َم‬ always, continuously ‫ضا‬ً ْ‫ٌم ِري‬
َ ‫اٌز َال ٌَزيْ ٌد‬
َ ‫َم‬ Zayd was continuously sick.

10. ‫ِح‬
ٌَ ‫َماٌبَر‬ always, continuously ‫ٌصائِ ًما‬
َ ‫َماٌبَر َِح ٌَزيْ ٌد‬
Zayd was always fasting.

ٌَ ِ‫َماٌفٌَت‬
11. ‫ئ‬ always, continuously ‫َماٌفٌَتِ ٌَئٌ َزيْ ٌدٌنَ ِشْيطًا‬ Zayd was always active.

12. ٌَّ‫ َماٌانْ َفك‬always, continuously ‫ٌص ِادقًا‬ ِ َّ ‫ماٌانْ َف‬

َ ‫كٌالتَّاجُر‬ َ
The businessman was always
truthful.
13. ‫س‬
ٌ ‫لَْي‬
َ
no, not ‫ٌالَ ِاد ُمٌقَ ِويِّا‬
ْ ‫س‬ َ ‫لَْي‬
The servant is not strong.

22
Sentence Analysis:
‫نَ ِظي ًفا‬ َ‫ت‬
ُ ‫البَ ي‬ َ‫َكان‬ The house was clean.
ٌ‫َخبٌَ ُرٌ َكا َن‬ ‫ٌاِ ْس ُمٌ َكا ٌَن‬ ٌٌ ِ‫ٌفِ ٌْع ٌٌلٌٌنَ ٌاق‬
‫ص‬

Notes:
ٌ‫ضاٌِر‬
1. When ‫ َكا ٌَن‬is used with ٌ‫ع‬ ٌَ ‫ ٌُم‬, it gives the meaning of past continuous.
e.g. ٌ‫ب‬
ُ ُ‫َكا َن ٌَزيْ ٌدٌيَكْت‬ Zayd was writing/Zayd used to write.
Note: Here, the ‫خبَ ٌٌر‬ ِِ ٌ.
َ of ‫ َكا ٌَن‬is a ٌ‫ُجٌُْلَةٌٌف ْعٌلٌيَّة‬

2. ٌ‫ارٌ–ٌ َكا َن‬

ٌَ ‫ص‬
َ ٌ–ٌ‫صبَ ٌَح‬
ْ َ‫ضحٌىٌ–ٌٌأَْمسٌىٌ–ٌٌأ‬
ْ ٌَ‫اتٌ–ٌظَ ٌَّلٌ–ٌأ‬ ٌ‫ضاٌِر‬
ٌَ َ‫ ب‬can be used in ٌ‫ع‬ ٌَ ‫ ٌُم‬and ‫ ٌأٌَْمٌٌر‬as well.

3. ٌ‫اٌز َال‬ ٌَ ‫ َماٌانْ َفكٌٌَّ–ٌ َماٌفٌَتِ ٌَئٌ–ٌ َماٌبَر‬can be used in ٌ‫ع‬

َ ‫ِحٌ–ٌ َم‬ ٌ‫ضاٌِر‬
ٌَ ‫ ٌُم‬but not in ‫ٌأٌَْمٌٌر‬.

4. ٌ‫اٌد َام‬
َ ‫ َم‬and ‫س‬ ٌ‫ضاٌِر‬
ٌَ ‫ لَْي‬have a past tense only (no ٌ‫ع‬ ٌَ ‫ ٌُم‬or ‫)ٌأٌَْمٌٌر‬.

5. ٌ‫اٌد َام‬
َ ‫ َم‬must be preceded by another sentence.

6. The ‫خبَ ٌٌر‬

َ of ‫س‬
ٌَ ‫ لَْي‬is sometimes prefixed with a ‫ب‬. ٌِ
e.g. ٌَ ْ ‫ٌالَاكِ ِم‬
‫ي‬ ْ ‫ ٌأَلَْيسٌاللٌٌُبٌِأَ ْح َك ِم‬Is Allah not the greatest of rulers?
َ

7. If there is a ٌ‫جر‬ ٌُ ‫ ٌَحٌْر‬before the ‫ َخبَ ٌٌر‬, then the ‫ َخبَ ٌٌر‬will appear first and the ٌ‫ ٌُمٌْبٌتَ ٌَدأ‬second.
ٌَ ٌ‫ف‬

e.g. َ‫َاب‬
ٌ ‫َس َح‬ َ‫فَِيَالس َم ِاء‬ َ‫َكان‬ There were clouds in the sky.
ٌَّ ‫اِ ْس ُمٌ َكا َنٌ( ٌُمٌَؤ‬
)‫خٌٌر‬ )‫َّم‬
ٌٌ ‫َخبٌَُرٌ َكا ٌَنٌ( ُم َقد‬ ٌٌ ِ‫ٌفِ ٌْع ٌٌلٌٌنَ ٌاق‬
‫ص‬

EXERCISE
1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab, and analyze the following sentences.

i. ‫ليسٌالعاملٌنشيطا‬ v. ‫صارٌالكبشٌَسينا‬
ii. ‫كانٌمناموٌمناماٌصادقا‬ vi. ‫َلٌيزالٌلسانكٌرطباٌمنٌذكرٌالل‬
iii. ‫أمسىٌالغِنٌفقريا‬ vii. ‫يصبحٌاملدادٌجافا‬
iv. ‫نويتٌاَلعتكافٌماٌدمتٌفٌاملسجد‬

23
 CHAPTER 2
‫بَ ََوَ َال ََمبََنِ َى‬
َُ ‫ – َاَل َُمعَََر‬Declinable and Indeclinable Nouns

Words are of two types with respect to changes, which may or may not take place at their
َ‫ ; ََمَْب ِ ي‬and that word
ends. If the end of a word remains the same in all conditions, it is called ‫ن‬
whose end changes is called ‫ب‬
ٌَ ‫ َُم َْعََر‬.

Section 2.11
َِ َ‫أَن َواعَُالبِن‬: Those conditionsَ(‫َت‬
‫اء‬ ٌَ ‫َال‬ َ‫ َمَْب ِ ي‬words are four:
َ ‫) َح‬, which remain unchanged at the end of ‫َن‬
ِ َ ‫أََنَْوا‬.
َ , ‫فَ ْت ٌَح‬, ‫ َك ْسٌَر‬and ‫ ُس ُك َْو ٌَن‬. These are called ‫عَالْبِنَ َاء‬
‫ض يَم‬ َُ

ِ ‫أََن َواعُ َا ِإلع‬: Those conditions (‫َت‬

َ‫راب‬ ٌَ ‫َال‬
َ ‫) َح‬, which occur at the end of ‫َب‬ ٌَ ‫َعََر‬
ْ ‫ ُم‬words are four: ‫َع‬
ٌَ ْ‫ََرف‬,
ٌَ ‫ص‬
‫ب‬ َْ َ‫َن‬, ‫ ََجيَر‬, and . These are called ‫اب‬ َِ ‫ع َا ِإل ْعر‬ َُ ‫ َاََِْإل َْعََر‬for short). These changes are brought
َُ ‫اب( أََنََْوا‬
about at the end of a ‫ب‬ ٌَ ‫ َُم َْعََر‬word in accordance with the requirement of the ‫( َع ِام ٌَل‬governing
word).

ِ ‫َاإلَعَر‬
َ ِ ‫ات‬
َ‫َاب‬ ُ ‫ – َع ََل َم‬Signs of I‘raab
َِ ‫اإل َْعََر‬
I‘raab can be shown in two ways. These are called ‫اب‬ َِْ َ‫ات‬
ُ ‫( َع ََل َم‬signs of i‘raab).
1. َ‫ك ِة‬
َ‫ابََبِا ْلَََر‬
َُ ‫َاََِْإل َْعََر‬: These are the basic signs and are the most common. I‘raab is shown by means
of a ٌ‫ك َة‬ َ‫ ََحر‬i.e. ٌ‫ضمََة‬ ََ or ٌ‫حَة‬
ََ ‫ فََْت‬or ٌ‫سََرَة‬
َْ ‫ َك‬, or ‫( ُس ُك َْو ٌَن‬which is the absence of a ٌ‫) ََحرَكَة‬.
َ َ
e.g. َ‫َر ُج ٌل‬ َ‫َر ُج ٍل‬ َ‫ََر ُج ًَل‬ ْ ‫ض ِر‬
َ‫ب‬ ْ َ‫ََلَْي‬
َِ ‫الَُُر‬
2. ‫وف‬ َُ ‫َاََِْإل َْعََر‬: Sometimes, the i‘raab is shown by means of any of the ‫وفَ َِعلٍََة‬
َْ ِ‫ابََب‬ َُ ‫ َُحَُر‬i.e. ‫ و‬or ‫ ا‬or
‫ي‬.
e.g. َ‫وك‬
َ ُ‫َأََب‬ َ‫اك‬
َ َ‫َأََب‬ َ ِ‫أَََب‬
َ‫يك‬

ِ ‫َتََال ُمعر‬
َ‫ب‬ َ ُ ‫َال‬ َ ‫ – َح‬Conditions of Mu‘rab
As mentioned above, the conditions that occur at the end of ‫ب‬
ٌَ ‫ َُم َْعََر‬words are four. Below, we
look at them in more detail.

1
This section is based upon the discussion in al-Nahw al-Wadih. See ‘Ali al-Jaarim & Mustafa Ameen, al-Nahw
al-Wadih li al-Madaris al-Ibdtida’iyyah, (Cairo: Dar al-Ma’arif, n.d.), 2:7-17.

25
1. ‫الرفَ َِع‬ ََ or its corresponding ‫ف َ َِعَلٍَة‬
َ َُ‫ ََحالََة‬is that when a ٌ‫ضمَ َة‬ َُ ‫ (و)َ ََحَْر‬appears at the end of a word.
Such a word is said to be ٌ‫وع‬ َ ُ‫ ََمَْرَف‬.
e.g. َ‫خ‬
ٌ َ‫َأ‬ َ‫وك‬
َ ‫َأَ َُخ‬
َِ ‫ص‬
2. ‫ب‬ ََ ‫ فََْت‬or its corresponding ‫فَ َِعلٍََة‬
َ َ‫ ََحالََةَُالن‬is that when a ٌ‫حَة‬ َُ ‫ (ا)َ ََحَْر‬appears at the end of a word.
Such a word is said to be ‫وب‬
ٌَ ‫ص‬
َُ ‫ ََمَْن‬.
e.g. ‫َأَ ًخا‬ َ‫اك‬
َ ‫َأَ ََخ‬
3. ‫ج َر‬ َْ ‫ َك‬or its corresponding ‫فَ َِعلٍََة‬
ََ ‫ ََحالََةَُ َال‬is that when a ٌ‫سََرَة‬ َُ ‫ (ي)َ ََحَْر‬appears at the end of a word.
Such a word is said to be ‫ور‬ ٌَ ‫ ََْمَُر‬.
e.g. ٍَ‫َأَخ‬ َ ‫َأَ َِخَْي‬
َ‫ك‬
4. ‫جَزَِم‬
ََ ‫ ََحالََةَُ َال‬is that when a ‫ ُس ُك َْو ٌَن‬appears at the end of a word. Such a word is said to be ‫وم‬
ٌَ ‫ ََْمَُز‬.
e.g. ‫ب‬ َْ ‫ض ِر‬
ْ َ‫ََلَْي‬

Difference Between ٌ‫ضَمَ َة‬

َ َ–ٌَ‫َح َة‬
ََ ‫َرَةٌَ–َفََت‬
ََ‫ َكَس‬and َ‫ضَم‬
َ َ–َ‫َح‬
ٌَ ‫َرَ–َفََت‬
ٌَ ‫َكَس‬
 The words ٌ‫ضمَ َة‬
ََ َ–ٌَ‫ح َة‬
ََ ‫سََرَةٌَ–َفََْت‬
َْ ‫ َك‬are used to describe the conditions at the end of a ‫ب‬
ٌَ ‫ َُم َْعََر‬, e.g.
َ‫ َاََلر َُج ُل‬has a ٌ‫ضمََة‬ ََ at the end, which is a sign of its being ٌ‫وع‬ َ ُ‫ ََمَْرَف‬.
 The words ‫ض يَم‬ ََ َ –َ ‫سٌَر َ– َفََْت ٌَح‬
َْ ‫ َك‬are used to describe the conditions at the end of a ‫ني‬ َ ِ ‫ ََمَْب‬, e.g.
ََ ‫ضََر‬
‫ب‬ ََ has a ‫ فََْت ٌَح‬at the end. It is َِ‫َعلَلَالْ َْْتح‬ َ‫ ََمَْب ِ ي‬.
َ ‫ن‬
In other words, (‫ )ﹹ‬is the same but the name is ٌ‫ضمَ َة‬ ََ when it appears in a ‫ب‬
ٌَ ‫ َُم َْعََر‬and is ‫ض يَم‬
ََ when
it appears in a ‫ني‬ َ ِ ‫ ََمَْب‬. The same is true of (‫ )ﹷ‬and (‫)ﹻ‬.

26
Section 2.2
‫ – َالَ ََمبََنِ َى‬Indeclinable Noun
As mentioned earlier, a ‫ن‬ َ‫ ََمَْب ِ ي‬is that word whose end remains unchanged in all conditions i.e.
irrespective of the requirement of the ‫ل‬ ٌَ ‫ َع ِام‬governing it.
e.g. ‫َجاءََ ٰى َذا‬ ‫تَ ٰى َذا‬
ُ ْ‫ََرأََي‬ ‫تَبِ ٰه َذا‬
ُ ‫َمَرْر‬
This came. I saw this. I passed by this.

Note: The ٌ‫ك َة‬ َ‫ ََحَر‬at the end of ‫ ٰى َذا‬remained constant and did not change according to the
‫ َع ِام ٌَل‬requirement.

Types of َ‫ َمَبَنَِي‬:
1. All Particles )‫وف‬
ٌَ ‫* ( َُحَُر‬
2. Amongst the verbs )‫ال‬ َ ِ ‫ ََمَْب‬.
َُ ‫(اَْلَفَْ ََع‬, the following are ‫ني‬
1) َِ ‫* اَلْ ِْ ْع ُلَاَلْ ََم‬
‫اضل‬
2) ‫ف‬ َِ َ‫* اَْلََْمَُرَاَ َْل‬
َُ ‫اضَُرَاََلْ ََم َْعَُرَْو‬
3) The ‫ث‬ ٍَ َ‫جَْ َُعَ َُم ََؤن‬
َ (‫ب‬ َِ ‫ ) ََح‬and the ‫ َثََِقْيََلَةٌ( نََُْو َُنَالتَأ َكَِْي َِد‬and ٌ‫ ) ََخ َِْْيَ ََْة‬of ٌ‫ع‬
ٌَ ِ‫ َغ َائ‬and ‫اضٌَر‬ ََ ‫َفِ َْع ٌَلَ َُم‬.
َ‫ضاَِر‬
3. Amongst nouns )ُ‫اء‬ َ َ‫س‬
َْ َ‫(اَْل‬, there are some nouns whose ends remain constant. They are
known as ‫ن‬ َِ َ‫ َغْي ُرَالْ ُمتَ َمك‬i.e. nouns, which do not give place to changes. These nouns are ‫ني‬ َ ِ ‫ََمَْب‬
and are recognized by their resemblance with any one of the three types of al-mabny al-
asl words (‫ف‬ َِ ‫ اَلْ ِْ ْع ُلَاَلْ ََم‬or ‫ف‬
ٌَ ‫ َُحَُرَْو‬or ‫اضل‬ َِ َ‫)اَْلََْمَُرَاَ َْل‬. This resemblance can be in any one
َُ ‫اضَُرَاََلْ ََم َْعَُرَْو‬
of the following ways:
a. Resemblance in meaning. For example, the noun ‫( ُرَويْ ََد‬give grace/respite) resembles
the word ‫ل‬َْ ‫َأَْم ِه‬, which is ‫ف‬ َِ َ‫( اَْلََْمَُر َاَ َْل‬one of the al-mabny al-asl) and has the
َُ ‫اضَُر َاَلْ ََم َْعَُرَْو‬
same meaning.
b. Resemblance in dependency. For example, the noun ‫ارةَِ) َ ٰى َذا‬ َِْ َ ‫(َاِ َْس َُم‬, which is
ََ ‫اإل ََش‬
dependent on a ‫ار ََإَِلَْي َِو‬
ٌَ ‫ش‬
ََ ‫ َُم‬to give meaning, resembles a ‫ف‬
ٌَ ‫( ََحَْر‬one of the al-mabny al-
asl), which is also dependent on another word to give meaning.
c. Resemblance in having less than three letters. For example, the noun ‫ن‬ َْ ‫ َم‬, which is
less than three letters, resembles ‫ف‬
ٌَ ‫( ََحَْر‬e.g. ‫) ََو‬, which is also generally less than three
letters.
d. Resemblance in having had a َ‫ف‬ ٌ ‫ ََحَْر‬originally. For example, the noun َ‫َع َشَر‬ َ ‫َأَ َح َد‬
resembles a ‫ف‬
ٌَ ‫ ََحَْر‬in the sense that originally it contained a ‫ف‬ٌَ ‫َع َشٌَر)َ ََحَْر‬
َ ‫(أََ َح ٌد ََو‬.
*These three are known as ‫ل‬
َُ ‫ص‬
َْ َ‫َال‬ ُّ ِ ‫اَلْ َمْب‬.
ْ ‫ِن‬

27
Section 2.3
َ‫ب‬
ُ ‫ – َالَ َُمعَََر‬Declinable Noun
As mentioned above, a ‫ب‬
ٌَ ‫ َُم َْعََر‬is that word whose end accepts any of the i‘raab according to the
ٌَ ‫ َع ِام‬governing it.
requirement of the ‫ل‬
e.g. َ‫َجاءََ َر ُج ٌل‬ َ‫تَ َر ُج ًَل‬
ُ ْ‫ََرأََي‬ َ‫تَبَِر ُج ٍل‬
ُ ‫َمَرْر‬
A man came. I saw a man. I passed by a man.

ٌَ ‫ َع ِام‬.
Note: The i‘raab of ‫ رجل‬kept on changing according to the requirement of the ‫ل‬

Types of ‫َب‬
ٌَ ‫َر‬
َ ‫ ُمَع‬:
1. Amongst verbs )‫ال‬ َُ ‫(اَْلَفَْ ََع‬, all of ٌ‫ع‬ ََ ‫ َفِ َْع ٌَل َ َُم‬besides the ‫ث‬
َ‫ضاَِر‬ ٍَ ‫جَْ َُع َ َُمََؤَن‬ ٌَ ِ‫ َغ َائ‬and ‫اضٌَر‬
َ َ (‫ب‬ َِ ‫ ) ََح‬and the َ ‫نََُْو َُن‬
‫ َثََِقْيَلََةٌ( التَأ َكَِْي َِد‬and ٌ‫ ) ََخ َِْْيَ ََْة‬are ‫ب‬ٌَ ‫ َُم َْعََر‬.
2. Amongst nouns )ُ‫اء‬ َ َ‫س‬
َْ َ‫(اَْل‬, those nouns, which accept i‘raab changes are ‫ب‬
ٌَ ‫ َُم َْعََر‬. They are
known as ‫ن‬
ٌَ ‫ ُمتَ َمك‬i.e. nouns which give place to i‘raab changes.
Note: These nouns will be ‫ب‬ ٌَ ‫ َُم َْعََر‬when they are used in a sentence. If not used in a sentence,
َ ِ ‫ ََمَْب‬. For example, ‫يت‬
such a word will be ‫ني‬ َُ َ‫ َاََلَْب‬on its own, out of a sentence, will have a ‫ض يَم‬
ََ .

EXERCISE

َ‫ ََمَْب ِ ي‬or ‫ب‬

1. State with reason whether the following words are ‫ن‬ ٌَ ‫ َُم َْعََر‬.
i. َ‫َِس َع‬ v. َ‫ْس ْرن‬ ِ ‫يك‬
َ
ii. ‫ُمْن َُذ‬ vi. َ‫َٰلكن‬ِ
iii. ‫ص َُر‬ُ ‫يَْن‬ vii. ‫ك‬ ََ ِ‫ٰذل‬
iv. ‫ن‬ ََ ْ‫ض ِرب‬
ْ َ‫ي‬ viii. ‫ي‬َْ ِ‫اِ ْسََع‬

28
Section 2.4
َِ ‫امَالَسَ ََم‬
َ‫اءَالَ ََمبََنِيَ ِة‬ ُ‫س‬ َ ‫ – أَق‬Types of Indeclinable Nouns
The types of ُ‫اءَُاَلْ ََمَْبَنِيَ َة‬
َ َ‫س‬
َْ َ‫ َاَْل‬are as follows:
1.‫( اَلضَ ََم َائَُِر‬personal pronouns)
2. ُ‫ص َْولََة‬
َُ ‫اءَُاَلْ ََم َْو‬
َ َ‫س‬
َْ َ‫( َاَْل‬relative pronouns)
3. ِ‫ارَة‬ َِْ َُ‫سَ َاء‬
ََ ‫اإل ََش‬ َْ َ‫( َأ‬demonstrative pronouns)
َِ ‫سَ َاءَُ ْالَفَْ ََع‬
4. ‫ال‬ َْ َ‫( َأ‬those nouns which have the meaning of verbs)
َِ ‫صََو‬
5. ‫ات‬ َْ َ‫سَ َاءَُ ْال‬
َْ َ‫( َأ‬those nouns which denote a sound)
َِ ‫سَ َاءَُالظََْر‬
6. ‫ف‬ َْ َ‫( َأ‬adverbs)
َِ َ‫سَ َاءَُاَلْ ِكَنَ َاي‬
7. ‫ات‬ َْ َ‫( َأ‬those nouns which indicate an unspecified quantity)
َُّ ِ‫بَاَلَْبَِنَ َائ‬
8. ‫ل‬
َ َُ َ‫( اََلْ َُمرك‬numerical phrase)

In the following pages, we will look at each of these in detail.

29
Section 2.4.1
ِ ‫ – اَلض‬Personal Pronouns
َ‫َر‬
ُ ‫َمَائ‬
َ

We have discussed ‫ض ََم َائَُِر‬

ََ before. Now, we will look at them in greater detail.
Definition: ‫ض َمَ َائَُِر‬
ََ (singular: ‫ض ِمْيٌََر‬
َ ) are those words, which refer to the speaker )‫ ( َُمَتَ َكلَ ٌَم‬or the
second person )‫اضٌَر‬ َِ ‫ ( ََح‬or the third person )‫ب‬ٌَ ِ‫( َغ َائ‬.
There are two types of dameers:
1. ‫ – َاَلضَ َِمْيَ َُر َاَلَْبَاَِرَُز‬Visible or Independent Pronoun: It is that dameer, which is visible and has a
distinct form. It appears on its own, unattached to another word (known as ‫ل‬ ِ َْ ‫ )مْن‬or
ٌَ ‫ص‬ ُ
attached to another word (known as ‫ل‬ ِ
ٌَ ‫) ُمتص‬.
ِ َ ‫ – َاَلضَ َِميَ َر َاَلْ َم‬Hidden or Implied Pronoun: It is that dameer, which is not visible but is
2. ُ‫سَتَ َت‬
ْ ُ ُْ
implied.
Note: A hidden dameer can only appear in ‫الرَفْ َِع‬
َ َُ‫ ََحاَل َة‬. (refer to Table 2.2)

Below are tables showing different forms that the dameers will assume in the various
conditions (haalaat).

30
 ‫‪Table 2.1‬‬
‫ض ِميَ َرَمن َف ِ‬ ‫ض ِميَ َرَمرفُوعٌَمن َف ِ‬
‫ص ٌلَ‬ ‫الرفَ َِع ‪َ( in‬بَاَِرٌَز)َ َ ٌ ُ‬
‫ص ٌَل ‪ََ (also called‬حالََةَُ َ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫)َ ٌ َ‬

‫ُى َوَ‬ ‫بَ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ََو َِ‬

‫اح ٌَدَ َُمََذكٌََرَ َغ َائ ٌ‬
‫ُُهَا‬ ‫تََثَْنَِيََةٌَ َُمََذكٌََرَ َغ َائِ ٌَ‬
‫ب‬
‫ُى َْم‬ ‫جَْ ٌَعَ َُمََذكٌََرَ َغ َائِ ٌَ‬
‫ب‬ ‫َ‬
‫َِى ََي‬ ‫ثَ َغ َائِ ٌَ‬
‫ب‬ ‫اح ٌَدَ َُمََؤنَ ٌَ‬ ‫ََو َِ‬
‫ُُهَا‬ ‫ثَ َغ َائِ ٌَ‬
‫ب‬ ‫تََثَْنَِيََةٌَ َُمََؤنَ ٌَ‬
‫ُىنَ‬ ‫ثَ َغ َائِ ٌَ‬
‫ب‬ ‫جَْ ٌَعَ َُم ََؤنَ ٌَ‬
‫َ‬
‫تَ‬ ‫َأَنْ َ‬ ‫اضٌَر‬ ‫اح ٌَدَ َُمََذكٌََرَ ََح َِ‬ ‫ََو َِ‬
‫َأَنْتُ َما‬ ‫اضٌَر‬ ‫تََثَْنَِيََةٌَ َُمََذكٌََرَ ََح َِ‬
‫َأَنْتُ َْم‬ ‫اضٌَر‬‫جَْ ٌَعَ َُمََذكٌََرَ ََح َِ‬ ‫َ‬
‫َأَنْ َِ‬
‫ت‬ ‫اضٌَر‬ ‫ثَ ََح َِ‬ ‫اح ٌَدَ َُمََؤنَ ٌَ‬ ‫ََو َِ‬
‫َأَنْتُ َما‬ ‫اضٌَر‬ ‫ثَ ََح َِ‬ ‫تََثَْنَِيََةٌَ َُمََؤنَ ٌَ‬
‫َأَنْ ُتَ‬ ‫اضٌَر‬ ‫ثَ ََح َِ‬ ‫جَْ ٌَعَ َُم ََؤنَ ٌَ‬
‫َ‬
‫َأَنَا‬ ‫ث)‬
‫وَمََؤنَ ٌَ‬ ‫اح ٌَدَ َُمَتَ َكلَ ٌَمَ( َُمََذكٌََرَ َُ‬ ‫ََو َِ‬
‫ََْن ُنَ‬ ‫ث)‬
‫وَم ََؤنَ ٌَ‬ ‫تََثَْنَِيََةٌَ ََوَ َ‬
‫جَْ ٌَعَ َُمَتَ َكلَ ٌَمَ( َُمََذكٌََرَ َُ‬

‫‪e.g.‬‬ ‫َر ُج ٌلَ‬ ‫ُى َوَ‬

‫َخبَ ٌَر‬ ‫َُمَْبَتَ ََدَأٌَ‬
‫الرَفْ َِع)‬
‫( ََحالََةَُ َ‬

‫‪31‬‬
 ‫‪Table 2.2‬‬
‫ض ِميَ َرَمت ِ‬
‫ص ٌلَ‬ ‫عَمت ِ‬ ‫) َِ‬
‫الرفَ َِع ‪ُ ٌ َ in‬‬
‫ص ٌَل ‪ََ (also called‬حالََةَُ َ‬ ‫ضميَ ٌَرَ َمرفُو ٌ ُ‬

‫َبَاَِرٌزَ‬ ‫َُمسََتََتٌِرَ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ََو َِ‬
‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫بَ( ُى ََو)‬
‫ضَر َ‬
‫َ‬ ‫ض ِر ُ‬
‫بَ( ُى ََو)‬ ‫يَ ْ‬ ‫بَ‬ ‫اح ٌَدَ َُمََذكٌََرَ َغ َائ ٌ‬
‫ضَربَاَ(ا)‬
‫َ‬ ‫ض ِربَ َِ‬
‫انَ(ا)‬ ‫يَ ْ‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫تََثَْنَِيََةٌَ َُمََذكٌََرَ َغ َائِ ٌَ‬
‫ب‬
‫ضَربُ ْواَ(و)‬
‫َ‬ ‫ض ِربُ ْو َنَ(و)‬
‫يَ ْ‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫جَْ ٌَعَ َُمََذكٌََرَ َغ َائِ ٌَ‬
‫ب‬ ‫َ‬
‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫تَ( َِى ََي)‬
‫ضَربَ ْ‬
‫َ‬ ‫بَ( َِى ََي)‬
‫ض ِر ُ‬
‫تَ ْ‬ ‫ثَ َغ َائِ ٌَ‬
‫ب‬ ‫اح ٌَدَ َُمََؤنَ ٌَ‬ ‫ََو َِ‬
‫ضَربَتَاَ(ا)‬
‫َ‬ ‫ض ِربَ َِ‬
‫انَ(ا)‬ ‫تَ ْ‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫ثَ َغ َائِ ٌَ‬
‫ب‬ ‫تََثَْنَِيََةٌَ َُمََؤنَ ٌَ‬
‫ضَربْ ََنَ(ن)‬
‫َ‬ ‫ض ِربْ ََنَ(ن)‬
‫يَ ْ‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫ثَ َغ َائِ ٌَ‬
‫ب‬ ‫جَْ ٌَعَ َُم ََؤنَ ٌَ‬
‫َ‬
‫ت)‬
‫تَ( ََ‬
‫ضَربْ ََ‬
‫َ‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫ت)‬ ‫ض ِر ُ‬
‫بَ(أَََنْ ََ‬ ‫تَ ْ‬ ‫اضٌَر‬ ‫اح ٌَدَ َُمََذكٌََرَ ََح َِ‬ ‫ََو َِ‬
‫ضَربْتُ َماَ(ُتَُا)‬
‫َ‬ ‫ض ِربَ َِ‬
‫انَ(ا)‬ ‫تَ ْ‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫اضٌَر‬ ‫تََثَْنَِيََةٌَ َُمََذكٌََرَ ََح َِ‬
‫ضَربْتُ َْمَ( َُْت)‬
‫َ‬ ‫ض ِربُ ْو َنَ(و)‬ ‫تَ ْ‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫اضٌَر‬‫جَْ ٌَعَ َُمََذكٌََرَ ََح َِ‬ ‫َ‬
‫ت)‬ ‫ِ‬
‫تَ( َ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ضَربْ َ‬ ‫يَ(ي)‬ ‫ض ِربِ ْ ََ‬
‫تَ ْ‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫اضٌَر‬ ‫ثَ ََح َِ‬ ‫اح ٌَدَ َُمََؤنَ ٌَ‬ ‫ََو َِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ضَربْتُ َماَ(ُتَُا)‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ض ِربَ َِ‬
‫انَ(ا)‬ ‫تَ ْ‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫اضٌَر‬ ‫ثَ ََح َِ‬ ‫تََثَْنَِيََةٌَ َُمََؤنَ ٌَ‬
‫تَ(تُنَ)‬ ‫ضَربْ ُ َ‬
‫ََ‬ ‫ض ِربْ ََنَ(ن)‬
‫تَ ْ‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫اضٌَر‬ ‫ثَ ََح َِ‬ ‫جَْ ٌَعَ َُم ََؤنَ ٌَ‬
‫َ‬
‫ت)‬
‫تَ( َُ‬ ‫ضَربْ َُ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫بَ(أَََنَا)‬ ‫ض ِر ُ‬
‫أََ ْ‬ ‫ث)‬ ‫وَمََؤنَ ٌَ‬ ‫اح ٌَدَ َُمَتَ َكلَ ٌَمَ( َُمََذكٌََرَ َُ‬ ‫ََو َِ‬
‫ضَربْنَاَ(نَا)‬
‫َ‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫بَ( َََْن َُن)‬‫ض ِر ُ‬
‫نَ ْ‬ ‫ث)‬
‫وَم ََؤنَ ٌَ‬
‫جَْ ٌَعَ َُمَتَ َكلَ ٌَمَ( َُمََذكٌََرَ َُ‬ ‫تََثَْنَِيََةٌَ ََوَ َ‬

‫‪32‬‬
 ‫‪Table 2.3‬‬
‫يرَمن َف ِ‬
‫ص ٌلَ‬ ‫ض ِم َ ِ‬
‫ص َل ‪ِ َ and‬‬ ‫وبَمن َف ِ‬
‫ص ٌَل ‪ََ (also called‬حالََةَُالنَصَ َِ‬ ‫ض ِم ٌَ‬ ‫وبَمت ِ‬ ‫ض ِم ٌَ‬
‫ضم ٌَ ُ‬ ‫يرَ ُمت ٌ‬
‫ب ‪ٌ َ in‬‬ ‫ص ٌ ُ‬‫يرَ َمن ُ‬ ‫ص ٌَل ‪َ and‬‬ ‫ص ٌ ُ‬‫يرَ َمن ُ‬ ‫)َ‬
‫ض ِم َيَمْنصوبَمْن َْ ِ‬
‫ص ٌَلَ(بَا ِرٌَز)‬ ‫ض ِم َيَمْنصوبَمت ِ‬
‫ص ٌَلَ(بَا ِرٌَز)‬
‫َ ٌَ ُ ٌ ُ‬ ‫َ ٌَ ُ ٌ ُ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ََو َِ‬
‫َإِي َاهُ‬ ‫ضَربََوُ‬
‫َ‬ ‫ه‬ ‫بَ‬ ‫اح ٌَدَ َُمََذكٌََرَ َغ َائ ٌ‬
‫َإِيا ُُهَا‬ ‫ضَربَ ُه َما‬
‫َ‬ ‫ُها‬ ‫تََثَْنَِيََةٌَ َُمََذكٌََرَ َغ َائِ ٌَ‬
‫ب‬
‫َإِيا ُى َْم‬ ‫ضَربَ ُه ْمَ‬
‫َ‬ ‫ىم‬ ‫جَْ ٌَعَ َُمََذكٌََرَ َغ َائِ ٌَ‬
‫ب‬ ‫َ‬
‫َإِيا َىا‬ ‫ضَربَ َها‬‫َ‬ ‫ىا‬ ‫ثَ َغ َائِ ٌَ‬
‫ب‬ ‫اح ٌَدَ َُمََؤنَ ٌَ‬ ‫ََو َِ‬
‫َإِيا ُُهَا‬ ‫ضَربَ ُه َما‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ُها‬ ‫ثَ َغ َائِ ٌَ‬
‫ب‬ ‫تََثَْنَِيََةٌَ َُمََؤنَ ٌَ‬
‫َإِيا ُىنَ‬ ‫ضَربَ ُهنَ‬
‫َ‬ ‫ىن‬ ‫ثَ َغ َائِ ٌَ‬
‫ب‬ ‫جَْ ٌَعَ َُم ََؤنَ ٌَ‬
‫َ‬
‫َإِيا ََك‬ ‫كَ‬‫ضَربَ َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ك‬ ‫اضٌَر‬ ‫اح ٌَدَ َُمََذكٌََرَ ََح َِ‬ ‫ََو َِ‬
‫َإِيَا ُك َما‬ ‫ضَربَ ُك َما‬ ‫َ‬ ‫كما‬ ‫اضٌَر‬ ‫تََثَْنَِيََةٌَ َُمََذكٌََرَ ََح َِ‬
‫َإِيَا ُك َْم‬ ‫ضَربَ ُك َْم‬‫َ‬ ‫كم‬ ‫اضٌَر‬‫جَْ ٌَعَ َُمََذكٌََرَ ََح َِ‬ ‫َ‬
‫َإِيا َِك‬ ‫كِ‬
‫ضَربَ َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ك‬ ‫اضٌَر‬ ‫ثَ ََح َِ‬ ‫اح ٌَدَ َُمََؤنَ ٌَ‬ ‫ََو َِ‬
‫َإِيَا ُك َما‬ ‫ضَربَ ُك ََما‬ ‫َ‬ ‫كما‬ ‫اضٌَر‬ ‫ثَ ََح َِ‬ ‫تََثَْنَِيََةٌَ َُمََؤنَ ٌَ‬
‫َإِيَا ُكنَ‬ ‫ضَربَ ُكنَ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫كن‬ ‫اضٌَر‬ ‫ثَ ََح َِ‬ ‫جَْ ٌَعَ َُم ََؤنَ ٌَ‬
‫َ‬
‫يَ‬
‫َإيا َ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ ‪2‬‬
‫ضَربَ َْ‬
‫ن‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ي‬ ‫ث)‬ ‫وَمََؤنَ ٌَ‬ ‫اح ٌَدَ َُمَتَ َكلَ ٌَمَ( َُمََذكٌََرَ َُ‬ ‫ََو َِ‬
‫َإِيانَا‬ ‫ضَربَنَا‬
‫َ‬ ‫نا‬ ‫ث)‬
‫وَمََؤنَ ٌَ‬
‫وَجَْ ٌَعَ َُمَتَ َكلَ ٌَمَ( َُمََذكٌََرَ َُ‬ ‫َتََثَْنَِيََةٌَ َ‬

‫‪e.g.‬‬ ‫نَعبُ ُدَ‬ ‫إَِي َ‬

‫َاكَ‬ ‫‪You alone we worship.‬‬
‫اعَِلَِِو‬
‫َفِ َْع ٌَلَ ََم ََعَفَ َ‬ ‫ص َِ‬
‫ب)‬ ‫ولَ َُم َقدَ ٌَمَ( ََحالََةَُالنَ َْ‬
‫ََم َْ َعُ ٌَ‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫ض َِميٌََْر ‪( is added before the‬نُو ُنَالْ ِوقَايََِة)َن ‪Sometimes, a‬‬ ‫ضَربَِ َ‬
‫ن ‪َ to protect an i‘raab as in‬يَاءَ ََ‬ ‫‪َ , which would otherwise be‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ضَرِ َْ‬
‫ب ‪incorrectly read as‬‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫‪).‬مب ِِنَعلَلَالْ َْْتحَِ ‪ is‬اَلْ ِْعلَاَلْم ِ‬
‫اضل ‪َ of‬ل ُمَالْ َكل َم َة ‪َ (the‬‬ ‫ْ َ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫َْ ي َ‬

‫‪33‬‬
‫لَ(بَا ِرٌَز) ‪There are two ways in which‬‬ ‫‪َ . One is when it is preceded by‬حالََةَُا َْلرَ ‪ appears in‬ض ِميَ َرَمت ِ‬
‫ص ٌَ‬ ‫َ ٌْ ُ‬ ‫َ َ‬
‫َجرَ ‪a‬‬
‫ف َ‬‫اف ‪َ ; and the other is when some other word is‬ح ْر ُ‬ ‫ض ٌَ‬
‫‪ُ to it.‬م َ‬

‫‪Table 2.4‬‬
‫ض ِميَ َرَمت ِ‬
‫ص ٌَلَ(بَا ِرٌَز)‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫) َِ‬
‫ورَ ُمتص ٌَل ‪ََ (also called‬حالََةَُالَ َجرَ ‪ُ ٌ َ in‬‬
‫ضميَ ٌَرَ َمج ٌر ٌ‬

‫جرَ‬ ‫حَر َِ‬

‫فَ َال ََ‬ ‫َبِ ََ‬ ‫ضاَف ِةَ‬ ‫َبِ َِ‬
‫اإل ََ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ََو َِ‬
‫لََوُ‬ ‫َد ُارَهُ‬ ‫بَ‬ ‫اح ٌَدَ َُمََذكٌََرَ َغ َائ ٌ‬
‫ََلَُما‬ ‫َد ُارُُهَا‬ ‫تََثَْنَِيََةٌَ َُمََذكٌََرَ َغ َائِ ٌَ‬
‫ب‬
‫ََلَُْم‬ ‫َد ُارُى َْم‬ ‫جَْ ٌَعَ َُمََذكٌََرَ َغ َائِ ٌَ‬
‫ب‬ ‫َ‬
‫ََلَا‬ ‫َد ُارَىا‬ ‫ثَ َغ َائِ ٌَ‬
‫ب‬ ‫اح ٌَدَ َُمََؤنَ ٌَ‬ ‫ََو َِ‬
‫ََلَُما‬ ‫َد ُارُُهَا‬ ‫ثَ َغ َائِ ٌَ‬
‫ب‬ ‫تََثَْنَِيََةٌَ َُمََؤنَ ٌَ‬
‫ََلُنَ‬ ‫َد ُارُىنَ‬ ‫ثَ َغ َائِ ٌَ‬
‫ب‬ ‫جَْ ٌَعَ َُم ََؤنَ ٌَ‬
‫َ‬
‫كَ‬‫لَ َ‬ ‫َد ُارَكَ‬ ‫اضٌَر‬ ‫اح ٌَدَ َُمََذكٌََرَ ََح َِ‬ ‫ََو َِ‬
‫لَ ُك َما‬ ‫َد ُارُك َما‬ ‫اضٌَر‬ ‫تََثَْنَِيََةٌَ َُمََذكٌََرَ ََح َِ‬
‫لَ ُك َْم‬ ‫َد ُارُك َْم‬ ‫اضٌَر‬‫جَْ ٌَعَ َُمََذكٌََرَ ََح َِ‬ ‫َ‬
‫لَ َِ‬
‫ك‬ ‫َد ُار َِك‬ ‫اضٌَر‬ ‫ثَ ََح َِ‬ ‫اح ٌَدَ َُمََؤنَ ٌَ‬ ‫ََو َِ‬
‫لَ ُك َما‬ ‫َد ُارُك َما‬ ‫اضٌَر‬ ‫ثَ ََح َِ‬ ‫تََثَْنَِيََةٌَ َُمََؤنَ ٌَ‬
‫لَ ُكنَ‬ ‫َد ُارُكنَ‬ ‫اضٌَر‬ ‫ثَ ََح َِ‬ ‫جَْ ٌَعَ َُم ََؤنَ ٌَ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِ َْ‬
‫ل‬ ‫َداَِر َْ‬
‫ي‬ ‫ث)‬ ‫وَمََؤنَ ٌَ‬ ‫اح ٌَدَ َُمَتَ َكلَ ٌَمَ( َُمََذكٌََرَ َُ‬ ‫ََو َِ‬
‫لَنَا‬ ‫َد ُارنَا‬ ‫ث)‬
‫وَمََؤنَ ٌَ‬
‫جَْ ٌَعَ َُمَتَ َكلَ ٌَمَ( َُمََذكٌََرَ َُ‬ ‫َتََثَْنَِيََةٌَ ََوَ َ‬

‫‪e.g.‬‬ ‫ل ََوُ‬ ‫َد ُارَهُ‬ ‫‪His house is his.‬‬

‫َجرَ‪َْ َ+‬مُر ٌَ‬
‫ور‬ ‫ف َ‬‫َح ْر ُ‬ ‫افَإِلَ َِيو‬
‫ض ٌ‬ ‫افَ‪ُ َ+‬م َ‬ ‫ض ٌ‬‫ُم َ‬
‫الَرَ)َ‬ ‫ورََِبََْر َِ‬
‫فَ َْ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫( ِ‬
‫ضم َيٌَ ُمتص ٌَلَ َْمٌر ٌ‬
‫َ‬ ‫ضاَف َِة)‬
‫اإل ََ‬ ‫ورََبِ َِْ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫( ِ‬
‫ضم َيٌَ ُمتص ٌَلَ َْمٌر ٌ‬
‫َ‬

‫الَرَ ‪Note: The dameer baariz in‬‬ ‫‪.‬مت ِ‬

‫ص ٌَل ‪ََ will always be‬حاَل َةَُ َْ‬ ‫ُ‬

‫‪34‬‬
 ِ ‫ض ِمي رَالشَأ‬
َ‫َن‬ ُ َ:
ٌَ ِ‫ض َِمْيٌََر َ َغ َائ‬
It is that ‫ب َ َُمََذكٌََر‬ ََ , which sometimes appears at the beginning of a sentence without a
‫( َم ْر َج ٌَع‬an earlier word that it refers to). The sentence after it clarifies such a ‫ض َِمْيٌََر‬ ََ .
e.g. َ‫َإِنوُ ََزيْ ٌدَقَائِ ٌم‬ Indeed, the matter is that Zayd is standing.

َ‫ض ِمي ُرَال ِقص ِة‬

َ:
It is that ‫ث‬ ٌَ ِ‫ض َِمْيٌََر َ َغ َائ‬
ٌَ ‫ب َ َُم َؤن‬ ََ , which sometimes appears at the beginning of a sentence without a
َ‫( َم ْر ََج ٌع‬an earlier word that it refers to). The sentence after it clarifies such a ‫ض َِمْيٌََر‬
ََ .
e.g. ٌ‫اط َمةَُقَائِ َم َة‬
ِ َ‫َإِن هاَف‬
َ Indeed, the matter is that Fatimah is standing.

َ‫ض ِمي ُرَال َفص ِل‬

َ:
It is that ‫ض َِمْيٌََر‬
ََ , which appears between a ٌ‫ َُمَْبَتَ ََدَأ‬and a ‫ َخبَ ٌَر‬for emphasis.
ِ
e.g. ‫ح ْو َن‬ ُ ‫َى ُمَالْ ُمْل‬
ُ‫ك‬ َ ِ‫َأُوَٰلئ‬ It is they who are successful.

EXERCISE

1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and analyze the following sentences, pointing out all the
dameers, as well as their type and haalaat.

i. ‫القطارَقدمَىفَوقتو‬ iii. ‫صَرنَا‬

َ َ‫ن‬
ii. ‫َننَنرزقك‬ iv. ‫اهللَيرزقهاَوَإياكم‬

35
Section 2.4.2
ُ‫َولََة‬
َ ‫َص‬
ُ ‫َمَو‬ َ ‫ اََلََس‬- Relative Pronouns
َ ‫َمَاءََُال‬

Definition: An ‫ل‬ َُ ‫ َاِ َْس ٌَم َ ََمَْو‬is a ٌ‫ َاِ َْس ٌَم َ َم ْع ِرفََة‬whose purpose is understood through the sentence,
ٌَ‫ص َْو‬
which comes after it, which is called ٌ‫صلََة‬ ِ.
 An َ‫ول‬َُ ‫ َاِ َْس ٌَم َ ََم‬cannot form a complete part of a sentence on its own. It must have a ٌ‫ِصلََة‬
ٌ ‫وص‬
which relates (refers back) to it. The ٌ‫صلََة‬ ِ is a ٌ‫جُْلََةٌَ َخ َِبيََة‬ ِ َ (visible or
َ َ َ , which must have aَ ‫ض َمْيٌََر‬
َ
hidden) referring to the ‫ول‬ َُ ‫َاِ َْس ٌَمَ ََم‬.
ٌَ ‫وص‬

Table 2.5
)‫ص َولََةَُ( ُم َذك ٌَر‬ َ ‫َالَسَ ََم‬
َُ ‫اءَُالَ ََم َو‬

َ‫اح ٌد‬ َِ ‫ََو‬ َ‫اَل َِذ ْي‬ who, that, which

ٌ‫تََثَْنَِيََة‬ َِ ‫اَللَ َذ‬

‫ان‬ those two who, that, which َ‫الرَفْ ِع‬
َ َُ‫ََحالََة‬
ٌ‫تََثَْنَِيََة‬ َ‫اَللَ َذيْ ِن‬ those two, who, that, which َ‫الَر‬
َْ َ‫بَ ََو‬ َِ ‫ص‬َْ َ‫ََحاَلَةَُالن‬
‫جَْ ٌَع‬
َ ‫اَل ِذيْ ََن‬ those who, that, which

Table 2.6
)‫ث‬
ٌَ ‫ص َولََةَُ( ُم َؤن‬ َ ‫اَلَسَ ََم‬
َُ ‫اءَُالَ ََم َو‬

َ‫اح ٌد‬ َِ ‫ََو‬ َ‫اَل ِ ْت‬ who, that, which

ٌ‫تََثَْنَِيََة‬ َِ َ‫َاَللَت‬
‫ان‬ those two who, that, which َ‫الرَفْ ِع‬
َ َُ‫ََحاَلَة‬
ٌ‫تََثَْنَِيََة‬ ِ ْ َ‫َاَللَت‬
َ‫ي‬ those two, who, that, which َ‫الَر‬
َْ َ‫بَ ََو‬ َِ ‫ص‬َْ َ‫ََحالََةَُالن‬
‫جَْ ٌَع‬
َ ‫اَلَلَتِ َْل‬ those who, that, which

‫جَْ ٌَع‬
َ ‫اَللَ َواتِ َْل‬ those who, that, which

e.g. َ‫صَرَك‬ َْ ‫َجاءََال َِذ‬

َ َ‫يَن‬
The man who helped you, came.
‫اك‬ َ ‫تَاللَ َذيْ ِن‬
ََ َ‫َضَرب‬ ُ ْ‫ََرَأَي‬ I saw those two men who hit you.
َْ ِ‫َعل ُم ْو‬
‫ن‬ ِ َُّ ‫َأُ ِح‬
َ ‫بَالذيْ َن‬ I love those men who taught me.

36
Additional Relative Pronouns:
1. ‫ َما‬and َ‫َمن‬
 These are used for all genders and all numbers.
 The difference is that ‫ن‬
َْ ‫ َم‬is used for humans and ‫ َما‬is used for things (non-human).
e.g. َ ‫َم ْنََأَ ْح َس ََنََإِلَْي‬
َ‫ك‬ َ‫ل‬ َ ٰ ِ‫ أََ ْح ِس ْنَا‬Show goodness to that person who has
shown goodness to you.
َ‫ت‬
َ ‫َماَ َكتَْب‬
َ‫ت‬ ُ ْ‫قَََرَأ‬ I read what you wrote.

2. َ‫ أَي‬and ٌ‫أَي َة‬

 They are generally ‫ب‬ ََ ِ‫َإ‬.
ٌَ ‫ َُم َْعََر‬and used in ٌ‫ضاَفَة‬
 َ‫ي‬
‫ َأَ ي‬has the meaning of ‫ي‬ َْ ‫اَل َِذ‬.
e.g. ‫اب‬ ٍَ َ‫ِم ْنََأَيَكِت‬ from which book…
 ٌ‫ َأَيَة‬has the meaning of ‫ت‬ َْ ِ ‫اَل‬.
e.g. ‫ت‬ ٍَ ‫َأَيةَُبِْن‬ which girl…

َِ ‫ َاِ َْس َُمََف‬and an ‫َاِ َْس َُمَ ََم َْ َعَُْوٍَل‬, will have the effect of ‫صَْوٌَل‬
ٍَ ‫اع‬
3. ‫ال‬, which appears before an ‫ل‬ َُ ‫َاِ َْس ٌَمَ ََمَْو‬.
e.g.
ُ ‫اَلضا ِر‬
َ‫ب‬ would equal َ‫ب‬ َ ‫ضَر‬ َْ ‫اَلَ َِذ‬
َ َ‫ي‬
َُ ‫ضُرْو‬
‫ب‬ ْ ‫اَلْ َم‬ would equal ََ ‫ض ِر‬
‫ب‬ َْ ‫اَل َِذ‬
ُ َ‫ي‬
‫اَلس ِام ُع ْو َن‬ َِ ‫اَل ِذين‬
‫َسعُ ْوا‬
would equal َْ

4. ‫َذُ َو‬
According to the dialect of the tribe َ‫بَنُ ْوَطَل‬, it is an ‫ل‬ َُ ‫َاِ َْس ٌَمَ ََمَْو‬.
ٌَ‫صَْو‬
It is used for all genders and all numbers, without its form changing.

e.g. َ‫ك‬
َ َ‫َضَرب‬
َ ‫َجاءََذُ ْو‬ equals َ‫ك‬
َ َ‫ضَرب‬َ َ‫ي‬ َْ ‫َجاءََال َِذ‬ The one who hit you, came.
‫َضَربَك‬ َ ‫تَذُ ْو‬ُ ْ‫ََرَأَي‬ equals ََ َ‫ضَرب‬
‫ك‬ َ َ‫ي‬ َْ ‫تَال َِذ‬ ُ ْ‫ََرأََي‬ I saw the one who hit you.

َ ‫تَبِ ُذ ْو‬
ََ َ‫َضَرب‬
‫ك‬ ُ ‫َمَرْر‬ equals ََ َ‫ضَرب‬
‫ك‬ َ َ‫ي‬ َْ ‫تََبِال َِذ‬
َُ ‫َمَرْر‬ I passed by the one who hit you.

37
‫‪Sentence Analysis:‬‬

‫يََأَبُ ْوَهَُ َع َِ‬

‫اَلٌ‬ ‫اءََال َِذ َْ‬
‫َج َ‬ ‫‪That person whose father is knowledgeable, came.‬‬

‫َعالِ ٌمَ‬ ‫أََبُوَهُ‬ ‫ال ِذَيَ‬ ‫اءَ‬

‫َج َ‬
‫افََإِلَ َِيو‬
‫ض ٌَ‬
‫افَ‪َُ َ+‬م ََ‬‫ض ٌَ‬
‫َُم ََ‬

‫جَُْلَةٌََاِ َِْ‬
‫سيََةٌ‬ ‫‪َ +‬خبَ ٌَر = َ‬ ‫َُمَْبَتَ ََدَأٌ‬

‫ََََ َِ‬
‫صلََةٌ‬ ‫َاِ َْس ٌَمَ ََمَْو َُ‬
‫ص َْوٌلَ‬

‫جَُْلَةٌََفَِْعَلِيَ َةٌَ ََخ َِْبيََةٌ‬

‫= َ‬ ‫َف َِ‬
‫اع ٌَلََََََََََََ‬ ‫َفِ َْع ٌلَ ‪+‬‬

‫‪EXERCISE‬‬
‫‪1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab, and analyze the following sentences.‬‬

‫‪i.‬‬ ‫أينَالذيَضربَزيدا‬
‫اهللَيعلمَماَىفَالرض ‪ii.‬‬
‫جاءتَاللتانَتسكنانَأمامنا ‪iii.‬‬
‫إنَالذينَكْرواَلَيدخلونَالنة ‪iv.‬‬

‫‪38‬‬
Section 2.4.3
ِ‫ – أََسَمَاءََاإلَ ََشارَة‬Demonstrative Pronouns
َ َُ

Definition: An ِ‫ارَة‬ َِْ َ‫ َاِ َْس َُم‬is that noun, which is used to point at something. These nouns are of
ََ ‫اإل ََش‬
of two types.
i. ‫ب‬َُ ْ‫اََلْ َقَِرَي‬: It is used for pointing at something near.
ii. َ‫اََلَْبََعَِْي ُد‬: It is used for pointing at something far.

Table 2.7
َ‫اءَُاإلَ ََش َارَةَِلِل ُم َذك ِر‬
َ ‫أَسَ ََم‬

ِ َ‫َلِلَ َقَِري‬
َ‫ب‬ َ‫َلِلََبَ َِعيَ ِد‬
َِ ‫ََو‬ ِ
َ‫اح ٌد‬ ‫ٰى َذا‬ this َ ‫ ٰذل‬that
َ‫ك‬

ٌ‫تََثَْنَِيََة‬ َ‫ٰى َذ ِان‬ ََ ِ‫ٰذان‬

these those
َ‫الرَفْ ِع‬
َ َُ‫ََحاَلَة‬ ‫ك‬ َ‫الرَفْ ِع‬
َ َُ‫ََحاَلَة‬
two… two…

ٌ‫تََثَْنَِيََة‬ َ ِ‫َذيْن‬
these those
َ‫ٰى َذيْ ِن‬ َ‫الَر‬ َِ ‫ص‬
َْ َ‫بَ ََو‬ َْ َ‫ََحالََةَُالن‬ َ‫ك‬ َ‫الَر‬ َِ ‫ص‬
َْ َ‫بَ ََو‬ َْ َ‫ََحالََةَُالن‬
two… two…
َ‫جَْ ٌع‬
َ ‫ٰى ُؤَل َِء‬ these ََ ِ‫ أَُوَٰلئ‬those
‫ك‬

Table 2.8
َِ ‫اءَُاإلَ ََش َارَةَِلِل ُم َؤن‬
‫ث‬ َ ‫أَسَ ََم‬

ِ َ‫َلِلَ َقَِري‬
َ‫ب‬ َ‫َلِلََبَ َِعيَ ِد‬
َ‫اح ٌد‬ َِ ‫ََو‬ ِ‫ٰى ِذَه‬ َ‫ك‬
this َ ‫تَ ْل‬ that

ٌ‫تََثَْنَِيََة‬ ِ َ‫ىات‬ ََ ِ‫تَان‬

these those
َ‫ان‬ َ َ‫الرَفْ ِع‬
َ َُ‫ََحالََة‬ ‫ك‬ َ‫الرَفْ ِع‬
َ َُ‫ََحالََة‬
two… two…

ٌ‫تََثَْنَِيََة‬ َ ِ‫تَْين‬
ِ ْ َ‫َىات‬ these those
َ‫ي‬ َ‫الَر‬ َِ ‫ص‬
َْ َ‫بَ ََو‬ َْ َ‫ََحاَلَةَُالن‬ َ‫ك‬ َ‫الَر‬ َِ ‫ص‬
َْ َ‫بَ ََو‬ َْ َ‫ََحاَلَةَُالن‬
two… two…
َ‫جَْ ٌع‬
َ ‫ٰى ُؤَل َِء‬ these ََ ِ‫ أَُوَٰلئ‬those
‫ك‬

َ‫اب‬ ِ َ ِ‫ٰذل‬
e.g. ُ َ‫كَالْكت‬ that book
ِ
ُ‫ٰى ُؤَلءَالن َس َاء‬ these women
َُ ‫كَالر َج‬
‫ال‬ ََ ِ‫َأُوَٰلئ‬ those men

39
Notes:
1. The ‫ ك‬of ِ‫ارَة‬ َِْ َ ‫ (اََلَْبَ َعَِْي َُد)ََاِ َْس َُم‬is sometimes changed according to the number of persons being
ََ ‫اإل ََش‬
addressed. The meaning will not be affected.
ِ
e.g. َ ‫ٰذل ُك َم‬
‫اَربُّ ُك َما‬ He is the Lord of both of you.

َِ َ‫ارََإِل‬
2. If the ‫يو‬ ٌَ ‫ش‬
ََ ‫ َُم‬is a ‫اف‬
ٌَ ‫ض‬ َِْ َ‫ َاِ َْس َُم‬will come after the ‫افََإِلَ َِيو‬
ََ ‫ َُم‬, then the ِ‫اإل ََش ََارَة‬ ٌَ ‫ض‬
ََ ‫ َُم‬.
e.g. َ ُ‫كِتَاب‬
‫ك َٰى َذا‬ This book of yours.

3. If the ِ‫ارَة‬ َِْ َ‫ َاِ َْس َُم‬occurs as a ٌ‫ َُمَْبَتَ ََدَأ‬, then the ‫ َخبَ ٌَر‬will generally be a ٌ‫َنَ َِكََرَة‬.
ََ ‫اإل ََش‬
َ‫اب‬ ِ
e.g. ٌ َ‫ٰى َذاَكت‬ This is a book.
ِ َ should be added between the ٌ‫ َمَبَتَ ََدَأ‬,
However, if the ‫خبَ ٌَر‬ َ is also ٌ‫ ََم َْعَِرَفَة‬, then a suitable ‫ض َمْيٌََر‬
َ ُْ
which is an ِ‫ارَة‬ ِ
َِْ َ‫َا َْس َُم‬, and the ‫ َخبَ ٌَر‬for it to remain a complete sentence.
ََ ‫اإل ََش‬
e.g. ‫اب‬ َُ َ‫اَى َوَالْ ِكت‬
ُ ‫ ٰى َذ‬This is the book.
َ ‫ض َِم‬
If no ٌ‫ي‬ ََ is added, it would be an incomplete sentence.
e.g. ‫اب‬ َُ َ‫ٰى َذاَالْ ِكت‬ This book

4. If the ‫خبَ ٌَر‬

َ is a ‫اف‬ ََ ‫ َُم‬, then there will be no need for a ٌ‫ض َِم َي‬
ٌَ ‫ض‬ ََ to be added between the ٌ‫ َُمَْبَتَ ََدَأ‬and
the ‫خبَ ٌَر‬
َ.
ِ ِ‫ٰى َذاَابنَالْمل‬
َ‫ك‬
e.g. َ ُْ This is the son of the king.

َِْ َ ‫َاِ َْس َُم‬. However, they do not have any special
ََ َ‫( ُىن‬there) are also ِ‫اإل ََش ََارَة‬
5. ‫ ُىنَا‬or ‫( ٰى ُهنَا‬here) and ‫اك‬
rules.

Sentence Analysis:

َ‫س‬ ِ
ٌ ‫نَفي‬ َ‫ال َقلَ ُم‬ ‫ٰى َذا‬ This pen is precious.
‫ارََإِلَ َِيو‬
ٌَ ‫ش‬ َِْ َ‫َاِ َْس َُم‬
ََ ‫ َُم‬+ ِ‫اإل ََش ََارَة‬

َِْ ِ‫جُْلََةٌََا‬
ٌ‫سيََةٌَ ََخ َِْبيََة‬ َ = ‫َخبَ ٌَر‬ + ٌ‫َُمَْبَتَ ََدَأ‬

EXERCISE

1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab, and analyze the following sentences.

i.‫تلكَالسيارةَقدمية‬ iv. ‫ىذهَحجرةَواسعة‬

ii. ‫أولئكَجتارَصادقون‬ v. ‫ىؤلءَطَلبَاملدرسة‬
iii. ‫ىذانَولدانَمهذبان‬ vi. ‫ىذانَالولدانَمهذبان‬

40
Section 2.4.4
ِ ‫ – أََسَمَاءََالََف َع‬Those Nouns Which Have the Meaning of Verbs
َ‫ال‬ َُ

Definition: These are nouns that have the meaning of verbs.

That which has the meaning of ‫اضي‬ ِ ‫اَلْ ِْعل َالْم‬, gives the noun after it a raf‘; and the one which
َ ُْ
ِ ‫اَْلَمرَا ْل‬, gives the noun after it a nasb.
has the meaning of ‫اض َُر‬َ ُْ

Table 2.9
ِ ‫اَل ِفعلَالم‬
Nouns in the Meaning of ‫اضي‬ َ ُ
Noun Verb Meaning Example
َ‫ات‬
َ ‫َىْي َه‬ َ‫بَ َُع َد‬ beyond, far from ‫ات ََزيْ ٌدَأََ ْنَيَْ َع َل َٰى َذا‬
َ ‫َىْي َه‬ It is far from (beyond)
Zayd to do this.
َ‫َشتان‬ َ‫ اِفْ تَ َر َق‬what a difference, ِ ‫َال‬
َ‫اى ِل‬ ِ
َْ ‫يَالْ َعاَل ََو‬
َ ْ َ‫َشتا َنَب‬ What a difference there is
there is a difference between the learned and
between the ignorant!
َ‫َس ْر َعان‬ َ‫ع‬
َ ‫َأَ ْسَر‬ hastened, made quick َ‫َس ْر َعا َن ََزيْ ٌد‬ Zayd hastened.

Table 2.10
ِ ‫اَلَمرَالح‬
Nouns in the Meaning of ‫اض َُر‬ َ ُ
Noun Verb Meaning Example
َ‫ُرَويْ َد‬ َ‫َأَْم ِه ْل‬ give respite, ‫ُرَويْ َد ََزيْ ًدا‬ Give Zayd respite.
let him be slow
َ‫بَْلَو‬ َ‫َد ْع‬ leave, give up َ ‫بَْلوََالت َْ ُّكَرَفِْي َم‬
َ‫اَل‬ Give up thinking about
ََ ‫يَ ْعنِْي‬
that which does not
‫ك‬ concern you.
‫كَ–َ َىا‬
َ َ‫ُد ْون‬ َ‫ُخ ْذ‬ take َ‫ب‬ ََ ‫كَالل‬ َ َ‫ُد ْون‬ Take the milk.

َ‫ك‬
َ ‫َعلَْي‬ ‫َاِلََْزَْم‬ hold on to, َْ ِ ‫كَبِ ُسن‬
‫ت‬ َ ‫َعلَْي‬ Hold on to my
incumbent on you Sunnah.
َ‫َحي َه ْلَ–َ َحي‬ َ‫تَ–َ َعج ْل‬ ِ ْ‫َاَِئ‬
come, hasten ِ‫َلَة‬
ََ ‫ََحيََ َعلَلَالص‬ Come to salaah.

َ‫تَ–َ َىلُم‬
َ ‫َىْي‬ ‫َأَقْبِ َْل‬ come, hasten

Notes:
1. There are some other nouns which have the meaning of verbs. These are as follows:
َِ ْ‫ – اِئ‬come)
ََ ‫ت( تَ َع‬
‫ال‬ ‫ي‬ َْ ‫ – اِ ْستَ ِج‬accept)
ََ ْ ‫ب( َاٰ ِم‬
َ‫ص ْو‬
َ (‫ت‬
َْ ‫ – اُ ْس ُك‬keep quite) َِ َ‫ – اِ ْكت‬suffice)
َ‫ف( فَ َق ْط‬

41
 َ‫ات‬ ِ ‫ط( ى‬
َ َِ ‫ – اِ ْع‬bring, give) َ‫َع ْن‬
َ ‫ك‬َ ‫ن( َإِلَْي‬
َْ ‫ – تَبَ ع َْد َ َع‬away from me)
َْ ‫َعْن َِد‬
‫ي( َعلَلَبَِِو‬ ِ ‫ – َِج َئَبِِو‬bring him/it to me)
ْ

2. Some of these nouns are inflectable, i.e. their form changes.

َِ ‫اَََََى‬
i. ‫ات‬ َ
ِ
َ‫اَََََىاتي‬ َْ ِ ‫اَََََى‬
َ ‫اتَََََ َىاتُ ْو‬ َ
ِ
َ‫َََََىاتي‬
َ ‫ي‬
ِ
َ ْ ‫َىات‬
َ‫ي‬ ِ ِ َٰ َ‫قُلَىاتُواَب رَٰىن ُكمََإِ ْنَ ُكْنتم‬
e.g. َ ْ ‫صدق‬ ُْ ْ َ ُْ ْ َ ْ
Say: bring your proof, if you are truthful.
ii. َ‫ال‬ َْ ِ ‫يَََََتَ َعالَيَاَََََتَ َع‬
َ ‫الَََََتَ َعالَْواَََََتَ َعالَيَاَََََتَ َع‬ َ ْ َ‫تَ َعال‬
e.g. ‫اآلية‬...‫بَتَ َعالَ ْواََإِ َلَ َكلِ َم ٍَة‬ ِ ‫قُلََيٰأَ ْىلَالْ ِكَٰت‬
َ ْ
Say: O people of the book! Come to a word…َ
َِ ‫فَتَ عالَيَأَُمت ع ُكنَوَأَُسرح ُكنَسراح‬
َ‫اَجْي ًَل‬
e.g. ً ََ ْ َ َ ْ َ َ ْ َ
Then, come, I will make provision for you and release you with
kindness.َ

Section 2.4.5
ِ ‫ – أََسَمَاءََالََصو‬Those Nouns Which Denote a Sound
َ‫ات‬ َ َُ

َ‫َأُ ْحََأُ ْح‬ To denote a cough.

َْ ُ‫َأ‬
‫ف‬ To denote pain.
‫بَ َْخ‬ To denote happiness, pleasure.
َ‫نَخ‬ To make a camel sit.
ََ ‫َغ‬
‫اق‬ To denote the cawing of a crow.

42
Section 2.4.6
ِ ‫ََالظُر‬
َ‫وف‬ ُ َ ُ‫َمَاء‬
َ ‫ – أََس‬Adverbs

ٍَ ‫ َاِ ْس ُم َظَْر‬is that noun, which gives us an idea of the place or time when (or
Definition: An ‫ف‬
where) some work is done.

ِ ‫س َاءَال َظُّر‬
َ‫وف‬ َِ ‫الزََم‬ َِ ‫فَاَلْ ََم َك‬
ُ ُ ََْ َ‫ َأ‬are of two kinds: ‫ان‬ َ َ‫ف‬َُ ‫( ظََْر‬adverb of time) and ‫ان‬ َُ ‫( ظََْر‬the adverb of place).

ِ ‫َفََالزَم‬
َ‫َان‬
َ ُ ‫َرَو‬ ُُ‫ – ظ‬Adverbs of Time:
1. ‫َإِ َْذ‬ (when)
 It gives the meaning of past tense even when it appears before ٌ‫ع‬ ََ ‫َفِ َْع ٌَلَ َُم‬.
َ‫ضاَِر‬
 َِْ ِ‫جَُْل َةٌََا‬
The sentence after ‫ َإِ َْذ‬could be a ٌ‫سيَ َة‬ َ or a ‫جَُْلَةٌََفَِْعَلِيَة‬
َ.
e.g. َ‫َوَاذْ ُكُرْواََإِ َْذََأَنْتُ ْمَقَلِْي ٌل‬ Remember when you were less.
َِ ‫اع َد َِم َنَالْبَ ْي‬
‫ت‬ ِ ‫َوََإِ َْذَي رفَعََإِبَٰرِىيمَالْ َقو‬
e.g. َ ُ ْ ْ ُ َْ َ And when Ibrahim (Allah give him peace)
raised the foundation of the House
(Ka‘ba).
 Sometimes, it gives the meaning of suddenness )ٌ‫اجأََة‬
ََ َْ ‫( ُم‬.
ِ َ‫خرجتََإِ َْذَم ِدي رَالْم ْدرس ِةَن‬
َ‫اظٌر‬
e.g. َ َ َ ُْ ُ ُ ْ َ َ I came out and suddenly the principal of
the school was watching.
2. ‫َإِذَا‬ (when)
 َِ ‫اََلْ َِْ َْع َُلَاَلْ ََم‬.
It gives the meaning of future tense even when it appears before ‫اضل‬
 It gives the meaning of ‫ط‬
ٌَ ‫ ََشَْر‬and ٌ‫ ََجََز َاء‬but does not give either a ‫ ََجَْزٌَم‬.
 َِْ ِ‫جُْلََةٌََا‬
The sentence after ‫ َإِذَا‬could be a ٌ‫سيَ َة‬ َ or preferably a ٌ‫جُْلََةٌََفَِْعَلِيََة‬
َ.
ٌ‫سَطَالِ َعَة‬ ِ ‫َاٰتِي‬
e.g.
ُ ‫كَاذَاَالش ْم‬
َْ I will come to you when the sun rises.
ِ‫َاهلل‬
َ ‫صُر‬ ِ
e.g. ْ َ‫اَجاءََن‬
َ ‫ا َذ‬ When the help of Allah will come.

 ََ َْ ‫( ُم‬, in which case ‫ َإِ َذا‬must be

Sometimes, it gives the meaning of suddenness )ٌ‫اجأََة‬
َِْ ِ‫جَُْلَةٌََا‬
followed by a ٌ‫سيَ َة‬ َ.
َ‫ف‬ ِ ‫خرجتَفََِإذَاَالْ َك ْل‬
e.g. ٌ ‫ب ََواق‬
ُ ُ ْ ََ I came out and suddenly the dog was standing.

3. َ‫َم ٰت‬ (when)

ٌَ ‫(َاِ َْسَتِ َْ ََه‬.
 It can be used as an interrogative )‫ام‬
e.g. ‫َم ٰتَتُ َسافَُِر؟‬ When will you travel?

43
  It can also be used as a conditional noun in which case the ‫ط‬
ٌَ ‫ ََشَْر‬and ٌ‫ ََجََز َاء‬get a ‫ ََجَْزٌَم‬.
e.g. َ‫ص ْم‬
ُ َ‫ص ْمََأ‬
ُ َ‫َم ٰتَت‬ When you fast, I will fast.

4. َ‫ف‬
َ ‫( َكْي‬how)
 It is used to enquire condition.
e.g. ‫ك؟‬
ََ ُ‫َحال‬
َ ‫ف‬َ ‫َكْي‬ How are you? (In what condition are you?)

5. ‫َأَيا َن‬ (when)

 It is used as an interrogative.
e.g. ‫َأَيا َنَيَ ْوُمَالديْ َِن؟‬ When will be the day of recompense?

Note: ‫ َأَيا َن‬is used only to enquire of great events of the future as compared to ‫ت‬
َ ٰ ‫ َم‬.

ِ ‫( َأَْم‬yesterday)
6. َ‫س‬
e.g. ‫س‬ َْ َِ‫َجاء‬
َِ ‫نَ َزيْ ٌدََأَْم‬ Zayd came to me yesterday.

7. َ‫( ُمْن َُذَ–َ ُم ْذ‬since, from)

 These two can be used to convey the beginning of a time period.
e.g. ْ ‫ ُم ْذَيَ ْوِم‬/‫َمْن َُذ‬
َ‫َالُ َُم َع ِة‬ ُ ُ‫اَرَأَيْتُو‬
ََ ‫َم‬ I have not seen him since Friday.

 They can also be used to refer to the entire period.

e.g. َِ ‫ ُم ْذَيَ ْوََم‬/‫َمْن َُذ‬
‫ي‬ ُ ُ‫اَرَأَيْتُو‬
ََ ‫َم‬ I have not seen him for two days.

 These can be used as َ‫جر‬ ََ َ ‫ف‬ ٌَ ‫ ) ََْمَُر‬or as ‫َاِ َْس ٌَم‬, which will be regarded
َُ ‫( ََحَْر‬followed by a ‫ور‬
as a ٌ‫ َُمَْبَتَ ََدَأ‬followed by a ٌ‫وع‬
َ ُ‫ ََمَْرَف‬.
e.g. ْ ‫ ُم ْذَيَ ْوِم‬/‫َمْن َُذ‬
َ‫َالُ َُم َع ِة‬ ُ ُ‫اَرَأَيْتُو‬
ََ ‫َم‬ I have not seen him since Friday.
‫الُ َُم َعَِة‬
ْ َ‫ ُم ْذَيَ ْوَُم‬/‫َمْن َُذ‬
ُ ُ‫اَرَأَيْتُو‬
ََ ‫َم‬

َُّ َ‫ق‬
8. ‫ط‬ (not, never)
َُّ َِْ ‫اضلَاَلْ ََمَْن‬
 It is used to emphasize ‫ل‬ َِ ‫اََلْ ََم‬.
ُّ َ‫اَضربْتُوَُق‬
َ‫ط‬
e.g. َ َ ‫َم‬ I never hit him.

9. َ‫ض‬
ُ ‫( َع ْو‬never)
َُّ َِْ ‫عَاَلْ ََمَْن‬
 It is used to emphasize ‫ل‬ َُ‫ضاَِر‬
ََ ‫اََلْ َُم‬.
e.g. َ‫ض‬ َ ُ‫ض ِربُو‬
ُ ‫َع ْو‬ ْ َ‫ََلََأ‬ I will never hit him.

44
 10. ‫ل‬
َُ ‫قَ ْب‬ (before)
َ‫بَ ْع ُد‬ (after)
َ ِ ‫ َمْب‬when they are ‫اف‬
 They are ‫ني‬ ََ ‫ َُم‬and the ‫افَإِلَ َِيو‬
ٌَ ‫ض‬ ٌَ ‫ض‬
ََ ‫ َُم‬is not mentioned, but intended.
e.g. )‫َش َْي ٍَء‬ ِ َِ ‫َالَمر َِمنَقَبلَو َِمنَب عدَ(أَيَ ِمنَقَب ِلَ ُكلَش َي ٍَءَو‬
َ ‫َم ْنَبَ ْعدَ ُكل‬ َ َْ ْ ْ ْ ُ ْ َ ْ َ ُ ْ ْ ُ ْ ْ ‫للّو‬
ِِ
Allah’s is the decisionَ before and after (i.e., before everything and after
everything).

e.g. ََ ِ‫َيَ ِم ْنَقَْبل‬

)‫ك‬ ِ ِ َ‫أَن‬
ْ ‫اَحاضٌرَم ْنَقَ ْب ُلَ(أ‬
َ
I have been present from before (i.e., before you).

)‫َى َذا‬
َٰ ‫َيَبَ ْع َد‬ ِ َٰ ‫م‬
e.g. ْ ‫تَ َجتيئُنَاَبَ ْع ُد؟َ(أ‬ َ
When will you come after (i.e., after this)?

َِ َ‫افَإِل‬
 When the ‫يو‬ ٌَ ‫ض‬
ََ ‫ َُم‬is mentioned, they will be ‫ب‬
ٌَ ‫ ُم ْعَر‬.
e.g. َِ‫ِم ْنَقَْب ِلَالْ َْْتح‬ before the victory

ِ ‫َفََالَم َك‬
َ‫ان‬ َ ُ ‫َرَو‬ ُُ‫ – ظ‬Adverbs of Place:
1. َ‫ث‬
ُ ‫( َحْي‬where)
 It is generallyَ‫اف‬
ٌَ ‫ض‬
ََ ‫ َُم‬to a sentence.
َ‫س‬ ِ ‫اِجلِسَحيثَزي ٌد‬
e.g. ٌ ‫َجال‬
َ َْ ُ ْ َ ْ ْ Sit where Zayd is sitting.

2. َ‫ام‬
ُ ‫قَد‬ (in front of)
َ‫ف‬
ُ ‫( َخ ْل‬behind)
 It has the same rules as those for ‫ل‬
َُ ‫ قَ ْب‬and ‫بَ ْع َُد‬.
e.g. )ُ‫َخلْ ََْو‬
َ ‫َيَقُد َاموُ ََو‬
ْ ‫فَ(أ‬
ُ ‫َخ ْل‬
َ ‫اسََقُد ُام ََو‬
ُ ‫قَ َامَالن‬
The people stood in front and behind.
(i.e., in front of him and behind him).

3. َ‫ت‬
ُ ‫ََْت‬ (under)
َ‫فَ ْو ُق‬ (on top, above)
 It has the same rules as those for ‫ل‬
َُ ‫ قَ ْب‬and ‫بَ ْع َُد‬.
e.g. )ِ‫تَالش َجَرةِ ََوَفَ ْو َقََالش َجَرَة‬
َ ‫َيَ ََْت‬
ْ ‫َع ْمٌروَفَ ْو ُقَ(أ‬
َ ‫ت ََو‬
ُ ‫ََت‬
َْ ‫س ََزيْ ٌد‬
َ َ‫َجل‬
Zayd sat under and ‘Amr above. (i.e., under the tree and above the tree.)

45
 4. َ‫ِعْن َد‬ (by, at, near, with)
e.g. َ‫َعْن َد ََزيْ ٍد‬
ِ ‫ال‬
ُ ‫اَلْ َم‬ The money is with Zayd.

Note: ‫ ِعْن ََد‬will get a kasrah if it is preceded by ‫ن‬ َْ ‫ ِم‬.

َ ‫ِم ْنَعِْن ِد‬
e.g. ِ‫َاهلل‬ from Allah

5. َ‫أََ ّٰن‬/‫ن‬
ََ ْ‫( َأَي‬where, how)
 It is used for ‫ام‬ ٌَ ‫َاِ َْسَتِ َْ ََه‬.
e.g. ‫ب؟‬
َُ ‫بَ–ََأَيْ َنَتَ ْذ َى‬ َّٰ ََ‫أ‬
َُ ‫نَتَ ْذ َى‬ Where are you going?

 It is used for ‫ط‬

ٌَ ‫ط( ََشَْر‬
ٌَ ‫ ََشَْر‬and ٌ‫ ََجََز َاء‬will get a ‫) ََجَْزٌَم‬.
َ‫س‬ ِ َ ِ‫َأَينَ َجتل‬
e.g. ْ ‫سََأَ ْجل‬ْ ْ َْ Where you sit, I will sit.
ِ َْ ِ‫نَ َْجتل‬
َْ ‫سََأَ ْجل‬
‫س‬ َّٰ َ‫َأ‬

6. َ‫لَ ُد ْن‬/‫( لَ ٰدى‬at, by, near, with (same meaning as ‫)) ِعْن ََد‬.
e.g. ‫ىَزيْ ٍَد‬
َ ‫الَلَ ٰد‬
ُ ‫اَلْ َم‬ The money is with Zayd.
َ‫َخبِ ٍْي‬ ِ ‫ِمنَلَ ُد ْن‬
َ ‫َحكْي ٍم‬
َ ْ From the All-Wise, All-knowing

 َ‫ لَ ُد ْن‬is generally used with ‫ ِم َْن‬.

 The difference between ‫لَ ُد َْن‬/‫ لَ ٰدى‬and ‫ ِعْن ََد‬is that in the case of ‫لَ ٰدى‬/‫لَ ُد َْن‬, the possessed
thing must be present with the person; whereas, in the case of ‫ ِعْن ََد‬, the possessed
thing need not be present with the person.

Note: That adverb which is mu‘rab and is mudaaf to a sentence or the word ‫َإِ َْذ‬, could beَmabny
‘ala al-fath or it could get the i‘raab according to the ‘aamil.
e.g. the adverb ‫ يوم‬which is mudaaf in the following ayahs:
ََ ْ ِ‫الص ِدق‬
َ‫يَ ِص ْدقُ ُه ْم‬ ِ ‫َالص ِدقِي‬
َّٰ َ‫َ ٰى َذاَيَ ْوَمَيَْن َْ ُع‬andَ ‫َص ْدقُ ُه َْم‬ َ ْ َّٰ ‫ٰى َذاَيَ ْوَُمَيَْن َْ ُع‬
This is the day when the truth of the truthful will benefit them.

َ‫َ ُو ُج ْوهٌَي ْوَمئِ ٍذ‬andَ ‫ُو ُج ْوهٌَي ْوَُمئِ ٍَذ‬

faces on that day

46
Section 2.4.7
ِ
ِ ‫َكنَاي‬
َ‫ات‬َ ‫َمَاءََُال‬
َ ‫ – أََس‬Those Nouns Which Indicate an Unspecified Quantity

1. ‫َ َك َذا‬،‫َك َْم‬ (so many, so much, how many, how much)

 It is used for numbers
ِ
ِ ‫َدرَُه‬
‫اَعْن َد ََك‬
e.g. ً ْ ‫َك ْم‬ How many silver coins do you have?
ِ ِ ‫أَخ َْذتَك َذ‬
e.g. ً‫اَد ْرُهَا‬ َ ُ َ I took this many silver coins.
 ‫ َك َذا‬is also used in the meaning of “such and such.”
e.g. ‫اَوَ َك َذا‬ َْ ِ ‫ال‬
َ ‫َلََ َك َذ‬ َ َ‫ق‬ He said to me such and such.
2. ‫ت‬
ََ ْ‫َ َذي‬،‫ت‬
ََ ‫َكْي‬ (so and so, such and such)
e.g. َ‫ت‬َ ْ‫تَذَي‬
َ ‫تَ َكْي‬
ُ ‫قُ ْل‬ or َ‫ت‬َ ْ‫تَ ََوَ َذي‬
ََ ‫تَ َكْي‬
ُ ‫قُ ْل‬ I said such and such.
e.g. ََ ْ‫تَذَي‬
‫ت‬ َ ‫تَ َكْي‬
ُ ‫فَ ََع ْل‬ or ََ ْ‫تَ ََوَذَي‬
‫ت‬ ََ ‫تَ َكْي‬
ُ ‫فَ ََع ْل‬ I did such and such.

Section 2.4.8
‫بََالبِنَائِ َي‬
ُ ‫ – اََل ُم َرك‬Numerical Phrase
This has been discussed earlier. Please, refer to section 1.3.3.

47
Section 2.5
َ ‫ – َالَسَ ََم‬Types of Declinable Nouns
ُ‫اءَُالَ َُمعَ َرَبََة‬
These are of two types:

ٌ ‫ص ِر‬
1. َ‫ف‬ َ ‫ُمن‬
Definition: It is that noun which does not have two causes from amongst the nine causes
َِ ‫َمْن ِعَالص ْر‬
that prevent declension (‫ف‬ َ ‫اب‬
ُ َ‫ )أََ ْسب‬or one such cause, which is equivalent to two.
 It accepts all harakaat as well as a tanween.

ٍَ ‫ص ِر‬
2. ‫ف‬ َ ‫َمن‬
ُ ‫غَي ُر‬
Definition: It is that noun which has two causes from amongst the nine causes that
َِ ‫ابَ َمْن ِعَالص ْر‬
prevent declension (‫ف‬ ُ َ‫ )أََ ْسب‬or one such cause, which is equivalent to two.
 Such a noun does not accept a kasrah and never gets a tanween. Thus in َ‫الَر‬
َْ َُ‫ ََحالََة‬, it gets
a fathah in place of a kasrah.

ِ ‫أََسبابَمن ِعَالصر‬
َ‫ف‬ َ ُ َ
The nine reasons/causes which prevent i‘raab changes are as follows:
1. ‫ل‬
ٌَ ‫َع ْد‬ 2. ‫ف‬
ٌَ ‫ص‬
ْ ‫َو‬ 3. ‫َعلَ ٌَم‬ ٌَ ‫َتَأْنِْي‬
4. ‫ث‬ 5. ٌَ‫ج َمة‬
ْ ‫ُع‬
6. َ‫ب‬ ِ َِ َ‫ف ََوَنُ ْو ٌن ََزائِ َدت‬ ِ 8. َ‫َوْز ُنَفِ ْع ٍل‬
ٌ ‫تَ ْركْي‬ 7. ‫ان‬ ٌ ‫أََل‬ 9. َ‫لَالُ ُم ْوِع‬
ْ ‫َمْنتَ َه‬
ُ ‫جَْ ُع‬

1. َ‫ع ْد ٌل‬:
َ It refers to the case when a noun gives up its original form to assume a new form.
َ‫ َع ْد ٌل‬is of two types:
i. ‫َي‬ ِ ‫َق‬
ِ ‫ع ْد ٌَلَ ََت‬: It refers to the case when a noun has an original.
َ‫َيق ي‬ ْ َ
e.g. In the case of ‫ث‬َُ ‫( ثََُل‬three and three together), the original is ٌ‫ثَََلثَةٌَثَََلثََة‬.

ِ ‫ع ْد ٌَل َتَ ْق‬: It refers to the case when it is assumed that a noun had an original because
َ‫َدَيَِر ي‬
ii. ‫ي‬ َ
ٍَ ‫ص ِر‬
it is used as ‫ف‬ َ ‫َمْن‬
ُ ‫ َغْي ُر‬by the Arabs.
e.g. ٍَ ‫ص ِر‬
The Arabs use ‫ عُ َم َُر‬as ‫ف‬ َ ْ‫َمن‬
ُ ‫ َغْي ُر‬. However, there is only one apparent cause, ‫ َعلَ ٌَم‬.
Therefore, in order to keep the grammar rule intact, it is assumed that the
ٌَ ‫ َع ْد‬, and the original for ‫ ُع َمَُر‬is ‫ َع ِامٌَر‬.
second reason is ‫ل‬

48
2. َ‫ف‬
ٌ ‫َص‬
ْ ‫و‬:َ It refers to the case when a word is such an ٌ‫ص ََْة‬ َِ , which was originally devised to give
a descriptive (‫ي‬ َ‫ص َِْ ي‬ َِ is on the wazn of (‫)أَفْ َعل‬, and does not accept
َْ ‫ ) ََو‬meaning.َIf such a ٌ‫ص ََْة‬
taa for its ‫ث‬
ٌَ ‫ ُم َؤن‬, it will be ghayr munsarif.3
e.g. َ‫ َأَ ْْحَُر‬red َ‫ضُر‬
َ ‫َخ‬
ْ ‫ أ‬green

3. َ‫ َعلَ ٌم‬: It refers to the case when a noun is a proper noun (name of a person, place or thing).
e.g. ِ َ‫ف‬
ُ‫اط َمَة‬ female name
َ‫ت‬
ُ ‫ضَرَم ْو‬
َ ‫َح‬ name of a region in Yemen

ٌ ‫َتأَْنِْي‬: It refers to the case when a noun is such a feminine proper noun, which has one of
4. َ‫ث‬
the following characteristics:
4
i. It ends with a round ‫ة‬. For example, ُ‫طَْل َحَة‬ ُ‫َمكَة‬
ii. It does not end with a round ‫ ة‬and has more then three letters. For example, ‫ب‬
َُ َ‫ َزيْن‬.
ٌَ ِ‫اك‬
iii. It is a non-Arabic three letter word and the middle letter is ‫ن‬ َ ‫ ََس‬. For example, ‫صَُر‬ ِ
ْ ‫م‬.

Note:
 All nouns ending in ُ‫صَوََرَة‬ َُ ِ‫ى)ََاَْلََل‬
َُ ‫فَاَلْ ََم َْق‬ َٰ ( or ُ‫ودَة‬ َُ ِ‫ (اء)ََاَْلََل‬are feminine.
ََ ‫فَاَلْ ََم َْم َُد‬
e.g. ‫ُحْبَٰلل‬ pregnant

ُ‫ْحََْر َاء‬ red

 Those feminine nouns which end in ُ‫ورَة‬
ََ ‫ص‬ َُ ِ‫ى) ََاََْلَل‬
َُ ‫ف َاَلْ ََم َْق‬ َٰ ( or ُ‫ودَة‬ َُ ِ‫ (اء) ََاََْلَل‬are
ََ ‫ف َاَلْ ََم َْم َُد‬
equivalent to two reasons.

5. ٌَ‫ج َمة‬
ْ ‫ع‬:
ُ It refers to the case when a word, which is a proper noun in a non-Arabic language,
has either
 more than three letters ِ ‫َإِب ر‬
e.g. ‫اىْي َُم‬َْ
or
 has three letters and the middle letters is ‫ك‬
ٌَ‫حَر‬
ََ َ‫ َُمَت‬. َ‫( َشتَ ُر‬name of a fort)
e.g.
˗ Thus, ‫ح‬ ٌَ ‫ نُ ْو‬is munsarif because its middle letter is not ‫حَرٌَك‬ ََ َ‫ َُمَت‬.
Note: The difference between ‫ح‬ ٌَ ‫ نُ ْو‬and ‫صَُر‬ ِ ِ
ْ ‫ م‬is that ‫صَُر‬
ْ ‫ م‬is a feminine noun because of
it being the name of a country, while ‫ح‬ ٌَ ‫ نُ ْو‬is not a feminine noun. Thus, ‫صَُر‬ ِ
ْ ‫ م‬is ghayr
3
Al-Nahw al-Wadih li al-Madaris al-Ibtida’iyyah, 3:122 and ‘Abdullah ibn ‘Aqeel, Sharh ibn ‘Aqeel ‘ala Alfiyyat
ibn Maalik, (Karachi: Qadeemi Kutubkhana, n.d.), 4: 5.
4
Even though ُ‫ طَلْ َح َة‬is a masculine proper noun, it is considered a feminine noun because of the presence of a
round ‫ة‬. For more discussion on the subject, see Section 3.4.

49
 munsarif because of ‫ث‬ٌَ ‫ َتَأْنِْي‬and ‫ َعلَ ٌَم‬, while ‫ح‬
ٌَ ‫ نُ ْو‬is munsarif because it only has ‫ َعلَ ٌَم‬. ٌ‫ُع ْج َمَة‬
does not apply to either.

6. َ‫ب‬ ِ
ٌ ‫تَ ْركْي‬: It refers to the case when a word is a combination of two words. This word must be
an ‫ َعلَ ٌَم‬.
e.g. َُّ َ‫بَ َْعلََب‬
‫ك‬ name of a city in Lebanon
َُ ‫ضَرَم ْو‬
‫ت‬ َ ‫َح‬ name of a region in Yemen

ِ َ‫ف َو َنُو ٌن ََزائِ َدت‬

َ‫ان‬ ِ ِ َِ ( and one
7. ْ َ ٌ ‫أََل‬: It refers to the case when a noun ends with anَ ‫ف‬
ٌ ‫ أََل‬andَ ‫ﹷان)َنُ ْو ٌن‬
of the following is true:
 Theَ‫ف‬ ٌَ ِ‫ َأَل‬and ‫ نُ ْو ٌَن‬appear at the end of such a noun which is an ‫( َعلَ ٌَم‬proper noun).
e.g. َ‫ُعثْ َما ُن‬ ‫ِع ْمَرا َُن‬
Note: Thus, the word َ‫س ْع َدا ٌن‬ َ (grass) is not ghayr munsarif because it is not a proper
noun.
ٌَ ِ‫ َأَل‬and ‫ نُ ْو ٌَن‬appear at the end of such a ٌ‫ص ََْة‬
 The ‫ف‬ َِ whose feminine is not on the ‫ َوَْز ٌَن‬of
ٌ‫فَ ْع ََلنََة‬.
e.g. َ‫ْرا ُن‬
َ‫( ََسك‬intoxicated) ‫( َعطْ َشا َُن‬thirsty)
Their feminines are not on the ‫ َوْز ٌَن‬of ٌ‫فَ ْع ََلنََة‬.
Note: Thus, the word َ‫ نَ ْد َما ٌن‬is not ghayr munsarif because its feminine )ٌ‫ (نَ ْد َمانََة‬is on
the ‫ َوْز ٌَن‬of ٌ‫فَ ْع ََلنََة‬.
ٌَ ِ‫ َأََل‬and ‫ نُ ْو ٌَن‬are not extra or added (i.e. not ‫ان‬
 If theَ ‫ف‬ َِ ‫ )ََزَائِ ََدَت‬but are part of the original
letters of the words, then it will not be ghayr munsarif. For example, ‫شْيطَا ٌَن‬.
َ

ٍَ ‫ َوْز ُنَفِ ْع‬: It refers to the case when a proper noun )‫ ( َعلَ ٌَم‬is on the ‫ َوْز ٌَن‬of a verb.
8. ‫ل‬
e.g. َ‫َأَ ْْحَ ُد‬ It is on the ‫ َوْز ٌَن‬of the verb ‫ل‬
َُ ‫أََفْ َع‬
َِ , as mentioned above.
Note: Only one wazn (‫ )أَفْ َعل‬applies to ٌ‫ص َْ َة‬

9. َ‫َالُ ُم ْوِع‬
ْ ‫َمْنتَ َهل‬
ُ ‫جَْ ُع‬: It is that plural, which has after the ‫الَ ْم َِع‬ َُ ِ‫( أََل‬alif of plural) one of the
ْ َ‫ف‬
following:
two ‫ك‬ ٌَ‫حَر‬
ََ َ‫ َُمَت‬letters. e.g. ‫اج َُد‬ ِ ‫ مس‬mosques
i. ََ
ii. one ‫شدَ ٌَد‬
ََ ‫ َُم‬letter. e.g. َ‫اب‬ُّ ‫ َد َو‬animals
iii. ٌَ ِ‫اك‬
three letters, the middle letter being ‫ن‬ َ ‫ ََس‬. e.g. ‫ َم َْاتِْي َُح‬keys

50
 Note:
 If any of the above words ends with a round ‫ة‬, it will not be ghayr munsarif.
e.g. ٌ‫صيَ َاقِلََة‬
َ polishers
 َِ‫لَالُ ُم ْو‬
‫ع‬ ْ ‫َمْنتَ َه‬ُ ‫ جَْ ُع‬is equivalent to two reasons/causes.

Note: A ghayr munsarif noun will get a kasrah in َ‫الَر‬

َْ َُ‫ ََحالََة‬in the following cases:
 when it is ‫اف‬
ٌَ ‫ض‬
ََ ‫ َُم‬. e.g.َََََ‫اج ِد ِى َْم‬
ِ ‫َفَمس‬ ِ ُ ‫صلْي‬
َ َ َْ ‫ت‬ َ I prayed in their mosque.
 when it has ‫ ال‬before it. e.g. َ‫تََإِ َلَالْ َم َقابِ ِر‬
ُ ‫َذ َىْب‬ I went to the graves.

EXERCISE
1. Mention with reason why the following words are munsarif or ghayr munsarif.

i. ‫زفر‬ v. ‫صحراء‬
ii. ‫شيطان‬ vi. ‫مصابيح‬
iii. ‫أسود‬ vii. ‫يزيد‬
iv. ‫أساتذة‬ viii. ‫غضبان‬

2. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and point out with reason the words which are ghayr munsarif.
i. ‫مررتَبعمر‬
ii. ‫حضرَأْحدَمعَزينبَإلَمكة‬
iii. ‫لَتسئلواَعنَأشياء‬
iv. ‫سقيتَولداَعطشان‬
v. ‫ياَأىلَيثرب‬
vi. ‫مررتَمبساجد‬
vii. ‫شهرَرمضانَالذىَأنزلَفيوَالقران‬
viii. ‫إنَاهللَاصطْلَادمَوَنوحاَوَالَإ َٰبرىيمَوَالَعمرانَعللَالعلمي‬

51
Section 2.6
ِ ‫ – إِعرابَأَقس ِامَالَسم ِاءَالمعرب‬I‘raab of the Various Types of Mu‘rab Nouns
َ‫ات‬ََ ُ َ َ ُ َ
We begin this section by defining some terms. Then, we will outline the i‘raab of each of the
various types of mu‘rab nouns.

َ‫ح‬ ِ ِ ِ َُ ‫(يَ–َاَ–َو)َ َحَرَو‬.

ُ ‫اَلصحي‬: It is that noun, which does not end with any of the ‫فَاَلْ َعلََة‬ ُْ ُ
e.g. ‫ل‬ ٌَ ‫َر ُج‬
َ‫امَالص ِحي ِح‬
ََ ‫َم َق‬ ِ
َ ‫اَل َقائ ُم‬: It is that noun, which ends with a ‫ و‬or ‫ ي‬preceded by a ‫ َُس َُك َْو ٌَن‬.
e.g. ‫َدلْ ٌَو‬ bucket
ٌَْ َ‫ ظ‬deer
‫ب‬

ُ‫اَلَس َماءَُالسَتةَُاَل ُم َكب َرَة‬: These are six nouns, which are not in their diminutive form )‫صغٌََر‬
ََ ‫( َُم‬. These
are as follows:
َ‫َب‬ٌ‫أ‬ father َ‫فَ ٌم‬ mouth
ٌَ ‫أ‬
‫َخ‬ brother ‫َى ٌَن‬ something insignificant
‫َح ٌَم‬ brother-in-law ‫ذُ َْو‬ someone who possesses something

َ‫صوُر‬ ِ
ُ ‫اَلس َُمَال َمق‬: It is that noun, which ends with an ُ‫ص ََورَة‬ َُ ِ‫ى)ََاَْلََل‬
َُ ‫فَاَلْ ََم َْق‬ َٰ (.
e.g. ‫سل‬ َٰ ‫ُم ْو‬
َُ ‫اَ ِلس ُمَال َمن ُقو‬: It is that noun which ends with a ‫ ي‬preceded by a kasrah.
‫ص‬
e.g. ‫اضل‬ َِ ‫اَلْ َق‬

Before we list the i‘raab of each of the various types of mu‘rab nouns in a table, it
would be useful to remember that a simple method of illustrating different i‘raab is to make
three sentences on the following pattern:

َ‫الرفَ ِع‬َ َُ‫َحالََة‬ ِ َ‫ََحالََةَُالنَص‬

َ‫ب‬ ‫ج َر‬ ََ َ‫ََحالََةَُال‬
‫اءََزَيْ ٌَد‬
َ ‫ََج‬ ‫تَََزَيْ ًدا‬
َُ ْ‫ََرأَََي‬ ‫تََبََِزَيْ ٍَد‬
َُ ‫ََمََرَْر‬
Zayd came. I saw Zayd. I passed by Zayd.

In these three sentences, the word ‫ زي ٌَد‬is displaying the different i‘raab according to the
changing state (ٌ‫حاَل َة‬ ََ ). Thus, it is has a dammah in ‫الرَفْ َِع‬ ِ‫ص‬
َ َ ُ‫ َحاَل َة‬, and a fathah in َ‫ب‬َْ َ‫ ََحاَل َةُ َالن‬, and a
kasrah in َ‫الَر‬
َْ َُ‫ ََحاَلَة‬.

52
 ‫‪Table 2.11‬‬
‫إِعرابَأَقس ِامَالَسم ِاءَالمعرب ِ‬
‫اتَ‬‫َ ُ ََ‬ ‫َ ُ َ‬

‫‪Noun Type‬‬ ‫الرفَ ِعَ‬

‫َحالََةَُ َ‬ ‫ََحالََةَُالنَصَ ِ‬
‫بَ‬ ‫جرَ‬
‫ََحالََةَُالَ ََ‬ ‫‪Examples for Each State‬‬
‫فَالصَ َِ‬
‫حَْي ُحَ‬ ‫صَِر َُ‬ ‫َاََلْ َُم َََْرَُدَاَلْ َُمَْن ََ‬ ‫ضمَ َةٌ‬
‫ََ‬ ‫ح َةٌ‬
‫فََْت ََ‬ ‫سََرَةٌ‬
‫َك َْ‬ ‫اءََزَيْ ٌدَ‬
‫ََج َ‬ ‫ََرَأََيْ َُ‬
‫تَََزَيْ ًدا‬ ‫تََبََِزَيْ ٍدَ‬
‫ََمََرَْر َُ‬
‫امَالصَ َِ‬
‫حَْيحَِ‬ ‫َاََلْ َُم َََْرَُدَاَلْ َق َائِ َُمَ ََم َق ََ‬ ‫ضمَ َةٌ‬
‫ََ‬ ‫ح َةٌ‬
‫فََْت ََ‬ ‫سََرَةٌ‬
‫َك َْ‬ ‫بَ‬
‫َٰى َذاَظَ ْ ٌ‬ ‫ََرَأََيْ َُ‬
‫تَظَْبَيًا‬ ‫تََبِظَ ٍَْ‬
‫ب‬ ‫ََمََرَْر َُ‬
‫ِ ٍ‪5‬‬
‫صَِر َُ‬
‫ف‬ ‫َاَ َْلَ َْم َُعَاَلْ َُم َكسََُرَاَلْ َُمَْن ََ‬ ‫ضمَ َةٌ‬
‫ََ‬ ‫ح َةٌ‬
‫فََْت ََ‬ ‫سََرَةٌ‬
‫َك َْ‬ ‫َُى َْمَرجالٌَ‬ ‫تََِر ََج ًَ‬
‫ال‬ ‫ََرَأََيْ َُ‬ ‫تََلَِر ََج َ‬
‫ال‬ ‫قََُْل َُ‬
‫صَِر َِ‬
‫ف‬ ‫َغ َيَُاَلْ َُمَْن ََ‬ ‫ضمَ َةٌ‬
‫ََ‬ ‫ح َةٌ‬
‫فََْت ََ‬ ‫ح َةٌ‬
‫فََْت ََ‬ ‫َجاءََعَُ ََمُرَ‬ ‫ََرَأََيْ َُ‬
‫تَعَُ ََمَرَ‬ ‫تََبَُِع ََمَرَ‬
‫ََمََرَْر َُ‬

‫اَْلَ ْسَاءَُالستةَُاَلْ ُم َكب َرَةُ‬

‫‪a. When mudaaf to‬‬
‫‪any noun besides the‬‬ ‫و‬ ‫ا‬ ‫ي‬ ‫َجاءَََأَبََُْو َكَ‬ ‫تََأََبَ َ‬
‫اكَ‬ ‫ََرَأََيْ َُ‬ ‫تََبِأََبَِْي َ‬
‫كَ‬ ‫ََمََرَْر َُ‬
‫‪ dameer.‬ي‬ ‫‪6‬‬

‫‪b. When mudaaf to‬‬

‫‪hidden‬‬ ‫‪hidden‬‬ ‫‪hidden‬‬ ‫َجاءَََأَِ ْبَ‬ ‫تََأَِ ْبَ‬
‫ََرَأََيْ َُ‬ ‫تََبِأَِ ْبَ‬
‫ََمََرَْر َُ‬
‫‪ dameer.‬ي ‪the‬‬

‫‪c. when not‬‬ ‫تََبِأَ ٍ‬

‫ضمَ َةٌ‬
‫ََ‬ ‫ح َةٌ‬
‫فََْت ََ‬ ‫سََرَةٌ‬
‫َك َْ‬ ‫َأبَ‬
‫َجاءَ ٌ‬ ‫ََرَأََيْ َُ‬
‫تَأبًا‬ ‫بَ‬ ‫ََمََرَْر َُ‬
‫‪mudaaf‬‬
‫ل ََيَ َِ‬
‫اءَاَلْ َُمَتَكََلِ ِمَ‬ ‫افََإِ ََ‬
‫ض َُ‬
‫َاََلْ َُم ََ‬ ‫‪hidden‬‬ ‫‪hidden‬‬ ‫‪hidden‬‬ ‫اءََ َزِميلِي‬
‫َج َ‬ ‫تَ َزِميلِي‬
‫ََرَأََيْ َُ‬ ‫تَبَِزِميلِي‬
‫ََمََرَْر َُ‬
‫َاََِْل َْس َُمَاَلْ ََم َْق َُ‬
‫صَْوُرَ‬ ‫‪hidden‬‬ ‫‪hidden‬‬ ‫‪hidden‬‬ ‫وسلَ‬
‫اءََ َُم ٰ‬ ‫ََج َ‬ ‫وسلَ‬
‫تَ َُم ٰ‬ ‫تََِمبُ َٰ‬
‫وسل ََرَأََيْ َُ‬ ‫ََمََرَْر َُ‬
‫َاََِْل َْس َُمَاَلْ ََمْنَ َُق َْو َُ‬
‫ص‬ ‫‪hidden‬‬ ‫ح َةٌ‬
‫فََْت ََ‬ ‫‪hidden‬‬ ‫اضل‬‫اءََاَلْ َق َِ‬‫ََج َ‬ ‫تَاَلْ َق َِ‬
‫اض ََي‬ ‫اضل ََرَأََيْ َُ‬‫تََبِاَلْ َق َِ‬ ‫ََمََرَْر َُ‬

‫َاََلْ َُمثََ ِّٰنَ‬ ‫ﹷ ِانَ‬ ‫ﹷيْ ِنَ‬ ‫ﹷيْ ِنَ‬ ‫اءََََر َُج ََل َِن‬
‫ََج َ‬ ‫تَََر َُجلَ ْ َِ‬
‫ي‬ ‫ي ََرَأََيْ َُ‬‫تََبََِر َُجلَ ْ َِ‬
‫ََمََرَْر َُ‬
‫)‪َ (masculine‬اِثَْنَ َِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫اءََاِثَْنَ ِ‬
‫ﹷ ِانَ‬ ‫ﹷيْ ِنَ‬ ‫ﹷيْ ِنَ‬ ‫انَ‬ ‫تََاِثَْنَ ْ ِ‬
‫ََرَأََيْ َُ‬ ‫تََبَِاِثَْنَ ْ ِ‬
‫)‪َ (feminine‬اِثََْنََتَ َِ‬
‫ان‬ ‫ََج ََ‬ ‫يَ‬ ‫يَ‬ ‫ََمََرَْر َُ‬

‫)‪َ (masculine‬كِ ََ‬

‫َل‬
‫)‪َ (feminine‬كَِْلَتَا‬ ‫ﹷا‬ ‫ﹷ ْيَ‬ ‫ﹷ ْيَ‬ ‫‪7‬‬
‫اءََكِ ََل َُُهَا‬
‫ََج َ‬ ‫تَكِلَْي َِه ََما‬
‫تََبِ ِكلَْي َِه ََما ََرَأََيْ َُ‬
‫ََمََرَْر َُ‬
‫لَالضَ َِم َِْي)‬
‫افََإِ ََ‬
‫ض َُ‬
‫(َاََلْ َُم ََ‬

‫‪5‬‬
‫‪I said to some men.‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫م ‪ of‬م ‪The‬‬
‫‪ dameer. For example, it is dropped in‬ي ‪ will be dropped when it is mudaaf to any noun besides the‬فَ ٌَ‬
‫َف َِفَاِ ْمَرأَتِ ََ‬
‫ك‪the followng hadith: ...‬‬ ‫)…‪َ (Whatever you put in the mouth of your wife‬م َْ ِ‬
‫اَجت َعل ْ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ُ‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪Both of them.‬‬

‫‪53‬‬
 Table 2.11 – Continued

Noun Type َ‫الرفَ ِع‬

َ َُ‫َحاَل َة‬ ِ َ‫ََحاَل َةَُالنَص‬
َ‫ب‬ َ‫جر‬
ََ َ‫ََحاَل َةَُال‬ Examples for Each State

ِ َِ َ‫ج َعَاَلْ َم َؤن‬ ٍ ‫ﹷ‬ ٍ ‫ﹷ‬ َِ ‫َىنََ َم‬ َُ ْ‫ََرَأََي‬

َ‫ت‬ َ‫ت‬
َُ ‫ََمََرَْر‬
َُ‫ثَالسَاَل‬ َ ُ ُ ََْ َ‫ات‬
ٌ ‫ﹷ‬ َ‫ات‬ َ‫ات‬ َ‫ات‬
ٌ ‫سَل ََم‬
ُْ ُ ٍَ ‫سَلِ ََم‬
‫ات‬ َْ ‫َُم‬ ٍَ ‫سَلِ ََم‬
‫ات‬ َْ ُ‫َِمب‬

َِ َ‫جَْ َُعَاَلْ َُمََذكَ َِرَالس‬

ُ‫اَل‬ َ َ‫ﹹ ْون‬ َ‫ﹻيْ َن‬ َ‫ﹻيْ َن‬ َ‫سَلِ ُم ْون‬ َْ ‫اءََ َُم‬
َ ‫يَ ََج‬ ِ َِ ‫تَ َم‬
َ ْ ‫سَلم‬ ْ ُ َُ ْ‫يَ ََرَأََي‬
ِ َِ ُ‫تََِمب‬
َ ْ ‫سَلم‬ ْ َُ ‫ََمََرَْر‬
َ–َ‫س َُع َْو َن‬ َْ ِ‫ل ََت‬ َْ ‫َِع‬
ََ ِ‫شَُرَْو َنََإ‬ َ‫شَُرَْو َن‬َْ ‫اءََ َِع‬ َْ ‫تَ َِع‬
َ ‫ش ِريْ َنَ ََج‬ َْ ِ‫تََبَِع‬
َُ ْ‫ش ِريْ َنَ ََرَأََي‬ َُ ‫ََمََرَْر‬
َ‫ﹹ ْون‬ َ‫ﹻيْ َن‬ َ‫ﹻيْ َن‬
‫َِسنَُ َْو َن‬ ً‫َل‬
َ ‫ََر َُج‬ ً‫َل‬
َ ‫ََر َُج‬ ً‫َل‬
َ ‫ََر َُج‬

َْ ِ ُ‫تََأ‬
َ‫ول‬ َُ ْ‫ََرَأََي‬ َْ ِ ُ‫تََبَِأ‬
َ‫ول‬ َُ ‫ََمََرَْر‬
َ‫َأُوَلُْو‬ َ‫ﹹ ْو‬ َ‫ﹻ ْي‬ َ‫ﹻ ْي‬ ٍَ ‫اءَََأُوَلَُْوَ ََم‬
‫ال‬ َ ‫ََج‬
ٍَ ‫ََم‬
‫ال‬ ٍَ ‫ََم‬
‫ال‬

َِ َ‫جَْ َُعَاَلْ َُمََذكَ َِرَالس‬

َُ‫اَل‬ َ َ‫َٰىَُؤٰ َل َِء‬ َ‫ت‬َُ ْ‫ََرَأََي‬
hidden َ‫ي‬ َ‫ي‬ َ‫سَلِ َِمي‬َْ ُ‫تََِمب‬
َُ ‫ََمََرَْر‬
َِ َ‫ل ََي‬
)‫اءَاَلْ َُمَتَكََلِ َِم‬ ََ ِ‫افََإ‬
َُ ‫ض‬
ََ ‫(َاََلْ َُم‬ 8 ِِ
َ‫سَل َمي‬ َْ ‫َُم‬ 9 ِِ
َ‫سَل َمي‬ َْ ‫َُم‬

8
‫ ُم ْسلِ َِم َي‬was originally َ‫ن‬ ََ ‫ ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو‬. First, the ‫ ن‬was dropped because of ٌ‫ضافََة‬ ََ ِ‫َإ‬. It became ‫ي‬ ََ ‫ ُم ْسلِ ُمَْو‬. Then, the ‫ و‬was
changed to a ‫ ي‬and the two were joined according to the following morphological )‫في‬ َ ِ‫صَْر‬
ََ ( rule: “when a ‫ و‬and a ‫ي‬
appear together and the first is ‫ن‬ ٌَ ِ‫اك‬
َ ‫ ََس‬, then the‫ و‬is changed to a ‫ي‬, and the two ‫ ي‬are joined (this is called ‫)َإِ ْد َغ ٌَام‬,
and the dammah before the ‫ و‬is changed into a kasrah.” Thus, it became َ‫سلِ َِمي‬ ْ ‫ ُم‬.
9 ِِ
َ‫ ُم ْسل َمي‬was originally ‫ن‬ َََ ‫ ُم ْسلِ ِمْي‬. First, the ‫ ن‬was dropped because of ٌ‫ضاَفَة‬ ََ ِ‫َإ‬. It became ‫ي‬ ََ َ ‫ ُم ْسلِ َِم َْي‬. Then, the two ‫ي‬
were joined (‫ام‬ ٌَ ‫)َإِ ْد َغ‬. Thus, it became َ‫ ُم ْسلِ َِمي‬.

54
 CHAPTER 3
Further Discussion of Nouns

Section 3.1
َ‫ – اَ ْاَل َْسمََاَلْمَ ْنس ْوب‬Relative Adjective
Definition: It is that noun, which shows something or someone to be related to it.
e.g. ٌّ‫ادى‬ِ ‫بػ ْغد‬
َ َ someone or something from Baghdad
ٌّ‫ص ْرِف‬
َ an expert in morphology
ٌّ‫ََْن ِوي‬ an expert in Arabic grammar
ٌّ‫ِىْن ِدي‬ someone or something from India

Rules of Forming َ‫َسَمََالَْمَ ْنس ْوَب‬‫ا ْ ا‬:

ْ ‫َل‬
To show this relation, a ‫ي‬ ٌَّ ‫سٌّبٌَِّة ٌّاٌّلْ ٌُّم‬
ٌّّ ٌّ)ُ‫شدٌّ ٌَّدٌّة‬ ٌّْ ٌّ‫اءُ ٌّالن‬
ٌّ َ‫ (ٌّي‬preceded by a kasrah is added at the end of the
noun after effecting the following changes, if needed:

1. If a three letter or a four letter noun ends with an ُ‫صٌّْوٌَّرٌّة‬ ٌُّ ِ‫(ىٌّ)ٌّاٌَّْلٌَّل‬, then ُ‫صٌّْوٌَّرٌّة‬
ٌُّ ‫ف ٌّاٌّلْ ٌَّم ٌّْق‬ ٌُّ ِ‫(ىٌّ)ٌّاٌَّْلٌَّل‬
ٌُّ ‫ف ٌّاٌّلْ ٌَّم ٌّْق‬
should be changed to a ‫و‬.
e.g. ‫ِعْيسى‬ becomes ٌّ‫ِعْي َس ِوى‬
Note: In the case of a five letter noun, the ُ‫صٌّْوٌَّرٌّة‬ ٌُّ ِ‫ (ىٌّ)ٌّاٌَّْلٌَّل‬should be dropped.
ٌُّ ‫فٌّاٌّلْ ٌَّم ٌّْق‬
e.g. ‫صطَفى‬
ْ ‫ ُم‬becomes ‫صطٌَِّف ٌّي‬
ْ ‫ُم‬
ٌُّ ِ‫(اء)ٌّاٌَّْلٌَّل‬, then the ‫ ء‬should be changed to a ‫و‬.
2. If a noun ends with an ُ‫فٌّاٌّلْ ٌَّم ٌّْم ٌُّد ٌّْوٌَّدٌّة‬
e.g. ٌ‫َدَ ٌّاء‬ becomes ٌّ ‫َدَاٌِّو‬
‫ي‬
3. That noun which already ends with a ‫ ي‬does not require ‫سٌّبٌَِّة‬
ٌّْ ٌّ‫اءٌُّالن‬
ٌّ َ‫ٌّي‬.
e.g. ‫َشافِ ٌّعِ ٌّي‬ would remain as is.

4. The round ‫ ة‬at the end of a noun should be dropped.

e.g. ُ‫َمكٌّة‬ ِ َ‫ٌٌّّ ف‬becomes
ُ‫اط َمٌّة‬
becomes ٌّ‫َمكٌّي‬ ‫اط ِم ٌّي‬ ِ َ‫ف‬

5. The round ‫ ة‬and ‫ ي‬of a noun, which appears on the ‫ َوْز ٌٌّف‬of ٌ‫ فَعِْيػلٌَّة‬and ٌ‫ فُػ َعْيػلٌَّة‬should be
dropped.
e.g. ٌٌّ‫َم ِديْػنَة‬ becomes ٌّ‫َم َدِن‬ ٌ‫ُج َهْيػنٌَّة‬ becomes ٌّ‫ُج َه ِن‬

55
 ٌٌّ ‫ فَعِْي‬and ends with a ‫ي‬, the first ‫ ي‬should
6. In case of the noun, which appears on the ‫ َوْز ٌٌّف‬of ‫ل‬
be changed to a ‫ و‬preceded by a fathah, and the second ‫ ي‬should be dropped.
e.g. ‫( َعلٌِّْي ٌٌّي)ٌّ َعٌّلِ ٌّي‬ becomes ٌّ ‫َعلٌَِّو‬
‫ي‬

7. If the fourth letter of a noun is a ‫ ي‬preceded by a kasrah, then the ‫ ي‬can be dropped or it
can be changed to a ‫و‬.
e.g. ٌّ‫ِد ْىٌّلِ ْي‬ becomes ‫ِد ْىٌّلِ ٌّي‬ or ٌّ‫ِد ْىلٌَِّوي‬

8. If an original letter from the end of noun was dropped, it should first be brought back,
and then, the relative adjective should be made.
e.g. ‫ب‬ ٌٌّ َ‫( ٌّأ‬originally ‫)ٌّأَبػَ ٌٌّو‬ becomes ٌّ‫أَبٌَِّوي‬
ٌّ‫خ‬
ٌ َ‫( ٌّأ‬originally ‫)ٌّأَ َخ ٌٌّو‬ becomes ٌّ ‫أٌَّ ٌَّخٌِّو‬
‫ي‬
‫( ٌَّد ٌٌّـ‬originally ‫) ٌَّد ٌَّم ٌٌّو‬ becomes ٌّ‫ٌَّد ٌَّمٌِّوي‬

9. Some words do not follow any particular rule. They are based on usage.
e.g. ‫نػُ ْوٌٌّر‬ becomes ٌّ ِ‫نػُ ْوَر‬
‫ان‬ ٌّ‫َحق‬ becomes ٌّ‫َحق ِان‬

EXERCISE
1. Form the relative adjective from the following words.

i. ‫نيب‬ iv. ٌّ‫موسى‬

ii. ‫مصر‬ v. ‫كوفة‬

iii. ‫بيضاء‬

56
Section 3.2
َ‫ص اغير‬
ْ ‫ – اَ ْاَل َْسمََاَلْت‬Diminutive Noun
Definition: It is that noun, which is used to express the diminutive form of a noun.
Sometimes, the purpose is to show affection or contempt.

Rules:
1. A three-lettered noun would come on the wazn of ‫ل‬
ٌٌّ ‫( فُػ َعْي‬or ٌ‫ فُػ َعْيػلٌَّة‬for feminine).
e.g. ٌّ‫َر ُج ٌل‬ becomes ٌّ‫( ُر َجْي ٌل‬a little man)
‫ٌَّعْب ٌٌّد‬ becomes ‫( ٌُّعبَي ٌٌّد‬a little slave)

ٌٌّ ِ‫فُػ َعْيع‬.

2. A four-lettered noun would come on the wazn of ‫ل‬
e.g. ٌّ‫َج ْع َفٌر‬ becomes ٌّ‫ُج َعْي ِفٌر‬

3. A five-lettered noun, without a ‫و‬, ‫ ا‬or ‫ ي‬as the fourth, would also come on the wazn of
ٌّ‫فُػ َعْيعِ ٌل‬. The fifth letter would be dropped.
e.g. ‫ل‬ ٌٌّ ‫( َس َف ْر َج‬name of a plant) becomes ٌ ‫ُس َف ِْْي‬
ٌّ‫ج‬

A five-lettered noun, having a ‫و‬, ‫ ا‬or ‫ ي‬as the fourth letter, would come on the scale of
ٌّ‫فٌُّػ َعْيعِْي ٌل‬.
ٌّ‫اس‬ ِ ِ
e.g. ٌ َ‫( ق ْرط‬paper) becomes ٌّ‫س‬
ٌ ‫قُػَريْطْي‬
Notes:
1. In the diminutive form, the hidden ‫ ة‬of a ٌّ‫اعِي‬ ٌِّ ٌّ‫ث‬
ٌّ َ‫د‬ ٌٌّ ٌّ‫ ٌُّم ٌَّؤن‬becomes apparent.
e.g. ٌّ‫س‬
ٌ ْ‫ََش‬ becomes ٌ‫َُشَْي َسٌّة‬
2. In the diminutive form, the last letter of a noun which has been dropped becomes
apparent.
e.g. ‫اِبْ ٌٌّن‬ (originally ‫)بػَْنػ ٌٌّو‬ becomes ٌَّ ُ‫بػ‬
‫ن‬
(‫ن‬
ٌَّ ُ‫ بػ‬was originally ‫بػُنَػْيػ ٌٌّو‬, and underwent a morphological process to become ‫ن‬
ٌَّ ُ‫)بػ‬

EXERCISE
1. Form the diminutive noun from the following words.

i. ‫عقرب‬ iv. ‫كلب‬

ii. ‫سلطاف‬ v. ‫أرض‬
iii. ‫عصفور‬ vi. ‫قمر‬

57
Section 3.3
‫ – اََلْمع ارفةَوَالن ا‬Definite and Common Nouns
َ‫َّكرة‬ ْ
‫ٌّالن ا‬: It is that noun, which denotes an unspecified thing; i.e. a common noun.
‫َّكرَة‬
e.g. ‫ل‬ ٌٌّ ‫ َر ُج‬a man
َ‫الْم ْع ارفة‬: It is that noun which denotes a specific thing. There are seven types of ٌ‫ ٌَّم ٌّْعٌِّرٌّفٌَّة‬.
1. ٌّ‫ض ِمْيػٌر‬
َ : It is a personal pronoun. It has been discussed earlier in Section 2.4.1.
2. ٌّ‫ َعلَ ٌم‬: It is a proper noun, i.e., the name of a specific person, place or thing.
e.g. ‫َزيْ ٌٌّد‬ ُ‫َمكٌّة‬ ‫ٌَّزْمَزٌُّـ‬

3. ِ‫ارٌّة‬ ٌِّْ ‫اِ ْس ُم‬: It is the demonstrative pronoun. It has been discussed earlier in section 2.4.3.
َ ‫ٌّال َش‬
4. ٌّ‫ص ْو ُؿ‬ ِ
ُ ‫اٌَّْل ْس ُمٌّالْ َم ْو‬: It is the relative pronoun. It has been discussed earlier in Section 2.4.2.
5. ‫ؿ‬ ِ ٌّ‫ؼ‬
ٌّْ َ‫بٌّا‬ ٌُّ ‫اَلْ ُم َعر‬: It is that noun, which has ‫( اؿ‬definite particle) at the beginning.
e.g. ٌّ‫اَلر ُج ُل‬ the man

6. That common noun )ٌ‫كٌَِّرٌّة‬

ٌّ َ‫ (ٌّن‬which is mudaaf to any of the above five definite nouns.
e.g. َ ُ‫كِتَاب‬
ٌّ‫ك‬ ٌّ‫اب ٌَّزيْ ٍد‬ ِ
ُ َ‫كت‬
ٌّْ ‫ابٌّال ٌِّذ‬
‫ي‬ ِ
ُ َ‫كت‬ ‫ابٌّى َذاٌّالر ُج ٌِّل‬ ِ
ُ َ‫كت‬
‫ابٌّالر ُج ٌِّل‬ ِ
ُ َ‫كت‬

7. ‫اَلْ ُمنَادٌّى‬: It is the vocative noun, i.e. that noun, which appears after a ‫ؼٌٌّّنِ ٌَّدا ٌٍّء‬
ٌُّ ‫ ٌَّحٌّْر‬.
e.g. ‫اٌّر ُج ٌُّل‬
َ َ‫ي‬

EXERCISE

1. Which of the following words are ma‘rifah (state what type) and which are nakirah.

i. ‫الفرس‬ v. ‫مكة‬
ii. ‫َنن‬ vi. ‫ذلك‬
iii. ‫سيارةٌّالذي‬ vii. ‫دك‬
iv. ‫ياٌّولد‬ viii. ‫سيفٌّالرجل‬

58
Section 3.4
َ‫ – اَ ْاَل َْسمََالْمذ َّكرَوَالْمؤنَّث‬Masculine and Feminine Nouns

‫ ا ْال ْسمَالْمذ َّك َر‬- Masculine Noun: It is that noun, which does not have any sign from amongst the
signs of femininity )‫ث‬ ٌِّ ‫اتٌّالتٌٌّّأْنِْي‬
ُ ‫( َع ََل َم‬.
َ‫ ا ْال ْسم َالْمؤنَّث‬- Feminine Noun: It is that noun, which has a sign from amongst the signs of
femininity. This sign could be apparent or hidden.

‫عَلماتَالَتَّأَْناْي ا‬: The signs of being feminine are of two types:

َ‫ث‬
1. ٌّ‫( لَ ْف ِظي‬in words): It is that sign, which is visible in words. These signs are of the
following three types:
 ‫ة‬: This renders the word ‫ث‬ ٌُّ ‫ اَِْل ْس ُم ٌّالْ ُم َؤن‬even if the ‫ ة‬appears in a masculine proper
noun. e.g. ٌ‫ارٌّة‬ َ ‫( طَْل َحةٌٌٌٌُّّّّ َسي‬a masucline proper noun)
 ُ‫ص ْوَرٌّة‬ ِ
ُ ‫فٌّالْ َم ْق‬
ُ ‫ٌّ(ىٌّ)ٌّاٌَّْلَل‬ e.g. ‫ص ْغرى‬ ُ ‫ُحْبػلٌّى‬
 ُ‫فٌّالْ َم ْم ُد ْوَدٌّة‬ ِ
ُ ‫ٌّ(اء)ٌّاٌَّْلَل‬ e.g. ُ‫اء‬ ٌّ ‫حََْر‬ ُ‫ض ٌّاء‬ َ ‫بػَْي‬
If a word has any of these three signs it will be ‫ث‬ ٌُّ ‫اَِْل ْس ُمٌّالْ ُم َؤن‬.
2. ٌّ‫( تَػ ْق ِدي ِري‬assumed): It is that sign, which is not visible in words and is assumed to exist.
This is determined by looking at the diminutive form )‫ص ٌّغِْيٌّػٌٌّر‬ ٌّْ َ‫ (ٌّت‬of a particular word. This
reveals the original letters of the word.
e.g. ٌٌّ ‫ أ َْر‬The diminutive form is ٌ‫ضٌّة‬
‫ض‬ ٌُّ ‫اَِْل ْس ُمٌّالْ ُم َؤن‬.
َ ْ‫أ َُري‬. Therefore, it is ‫ث‬
ٌّ‫س‬
ٌ ْ‫ََش‬ The diminutive form is ٌ‫س ٌّة‬ ٌُّ ‫اَِْل ْس ُمٌّالْ ُم َؤن‬.
َ ‫ َُشَْي‬. Therefore, it is ‫ث‬

Based on the signs of femininity being ٌّ‫ لَ ْف ِظي‬or ٌّ‫تَػ ْق ِدي ِري‬, ‫ث‬
ٌُّ ‫ اَِْل ْس ُمٌّالْ ُم َؤن‬is of two types:
1. ٌِّ َ‫ث ٌّالْ ِقي‬
ٌّ‫اسي‬ ُ ‫( اَلْ ُم َؤن‬according to rule): It is that feminine noun, which has a ٌّ‫ لَْف ِظي‬sign of
femininity.

ٌِّ ‫ث ٌّالس َم‬ ِ

2. ‫اع ٌّي‬ ُ ‫( اَلْ ُم َؤن‬according to usage): It is that feminine noun, which has a ٌّ‫ تَػ ْقدي ِري‬sign of
femininity.

In terms of ‫ات‬ ٌُّ ‫ اَِْل ْس ُمٌّالْ ُم َؤن‬is of two types:

ٌٌّ ‫( َذ‬essence), ‫ث‬
ٌّ ‫ٌّح ِقْي ٌِّق‬
1. ‫ي‬ َ ‫ث‬ ٌ ‫ ُم َؤن‬: It is that feminine noun, which has an opposite masculine.
e.g. ٌ‫( اِ ْمٌَّرٌّأٌَّة‬woman). Its masculine is ‫ل‬
ٌٌّ ‫( َر ُج‬man).
ٌّ ‫ثٌّلَْف ٌِّظ‬
2. ‫ي‬ ٌ ‫ ُم َؤن‬: It is that feminine noun, which does not have an opposite masculine.
e.g. ٌ‫( ظُْل َمٌّة‬darkness) ٌّ‫ي‬
ٌ ‫( َع‬spring)

59
Notes:
1. The following are used as feminine )‫ث‬
ٌٌّ ‫( ُم َؤن‬:
a. Name of females.
e.g. ٌُّ‫َم ْرَي‬ ٌُّ َ‫َزيْػن‬
‫ب‬
b. Words denoting the feminine gender.
e.g. ٌّ‫أُـ‬ ٌٌّ ‫ُخ‬
‫ت‬ ْ‫أ‬
c. Names of countries, cities, towns and tribes.
e.g. ٌّ‫ص ُر‬ ِ
ْ‫م‬ ٌٌّ ْ‫قُػَري‬
‫ش‬
d. Parts of the body found in pairs.
e.g. ‫أُذُ ٌٌّف‬ ‫يَ ٌٌّد‬
Note: There are exceptions to the rule. ‫خ ٌّد‬ ِ ‫( ح‬eyebrow) etc. are
َ (cheek), ‫ب‬
ٌٌّ ‫اج‬ َ
masculine.
e. Names of various types of winds.
ٌٌّ ْ‫ِري‬
e.g. ‫ح‬ ‫صٌٌّر‬
َ ‫ص ْر‬
َ
f. Various names of Jahannam (hell).
e.g. ‫ج َهن ٌُّم‬
َ ‫ٌَّس ٌَّقٌُّر‬
Letters of the alphabet )ُ‫جائِي ٌّة‬ ِ ُ ‫ (اَ ْررو‬are generally used as ‫ث‬
g. َ ‫ؼٌّا ْش‬ ْ ُُ ٌٌّ ‫ ُم َؤن‬. They can also be used
as masculine.
e.g. ‫ا‬ ‫ب‬ ‫…… ت‬..

2. There are some words that Arabs use as feminine without regard to the presence or absence
of signs of femininity. Examples include the following:
‫َدلْ ٌٌّو‬ (bucket) ٌٌّ ‫( َحٌّْر‬tillage/field)
‫ث‬ ‫بِْئػٌٌّر‬ (well)
ٌّ‫س‬
ٌ ‫نػَ ْف‬ (self) ٌّ‫نَ ٌار‬ (fire) ٌّ‫َد ٌار‬ (house)

60
Section 3.5
‫ – و ا‬Singular, Dual and Plural
َ‫اح ٌدَوَت ثْنايةٌَوَج ْم ٌع‬
‫ – و ا‬Singular: It is that noun, which denotes one.
َ‫اح ٌد‬
e.g. ‫ل‬ٌٌّ ‫َر ُج‬ one man

ٌ‫ – ت ثْنايَ َة‬Dual: It is that noun, which denotes two. It is formed by placing at the end of a singular
ِ ‫ (و‬one of the following:
)‫اح ٌٌّد‬ َ
 ٌّAn ‫ف‬ ٌٌّ ِ‫ ٌّأٌَّل‬preceded by a fathah and a ‫ نٌّػٌُّْو ٌٌّف‬with a kasrah )ٌ‫س ٌَّورٌّة‬
ٌُّ ‫وح ٌّ ٌَّو ٌّنٌّػٌُّْو ٌٌّفٌّ ٌَّم ٌّْك‬
ٌٌّ ُ‫اٌّم ٌّْفٌّت‬ ٌٌّ ِ‫ (أٌٌَّّل‬i.e.
ٌَّ ‫ف ٌّ ٌَّماٌّقٌَّػْبٌّػٌّلَ ٌَّه‬
ٌِّ ‫ [ﹷ‬for ‫الرٌّفْ ٌِّع‬
]‫اف‬ ٌّ ٌُّ‫ ٌَّحاٌّلٌَّة‬.
e.g. ‫ج ََل ٌِّف‬ ُ ‫َر‬ two men

 ٌّA ٌ‫اء‬ ٌّ َ‫ ٌّي‬preceded by a fathah and a ‫ نٌّػٌُّْو ٌٌّف‬with a kasrah )ٌ‫س ٌَّورٌّة‬
ٌُّ ‫وح ٌّ ٌَّو ٌّنٌّػٌُّْو ٌٌّف ٌّ ٌَّم ٌّْك‬
ٌٌّ ُ‫اٌّم ٌّْفٌّت‬
ٌَّ ‫ (ٌّيَ ٌّاءٌ ٌّ ٌَّما ٌّقٌَّػْبٌّػٌّلَ ٌَّه‬i.e.
ٌِّ ْ‫ [ﹷٌّي‬for ٌّ‫اذَر‬
]‫ن‬ ٌِّ ‫ص‬
ٌّْ ٌّ‫بٌّ ٌَّو‬ ٌّْ ٌّ‫ ٌَّحاٌّلٌَّةٌُّالن‬.
ِ ْ َ‫ر ُجل‬
ٌّ‫ي‬
e.g. َ two men

َ‫ – ج ْم ٌع‬Plural: It is that noun, which denotes more than two.

e.g. ‫اؿ‬ ٌٌّ ‫ِر َج‬ men

Note: The ‫ نٌّػٌُّْو ٌٌّف‬of ٌ‫ تَػثْنِيٌَّة‬and ‫ جَْ ٌٌّع‬is dropped in case of ٌ‫ضاٌّفٌَّة‬
ٌَّ ِ‫ٌّإ‬.
e.g. ٌّ‫اٌّزيْ ٍد‬
َ ‫قَػلَ َم‬ (Originally, ‫ٌّزيْ ٌٍّد‬
َ ‫اف‬ِ ‫ قَػلَم‬but the ‫ نٌّػٌُّو ٌٌّف‬was dropped due to ٌ‫ضاٌّفٌَّة‬
َ ْ ٌَّ ِ‫ٌّإ‬.)
‫اٌّر ُج ٌٍّل‬ ِ ‫ فَػرس‬but the ‫ نٌّػٌُّو ٌٌّف‬was dropped due to ٌ‫ضاٌّفٌَّة‬
ٌٍّ ‫اف ٌَّر ُج‬ ٌَّ ِ‫ٌّإ‬.)
َ ‫فَػَر َس‬ (Originally, ‫ل‬ ََ ْ
‫صٌَّر‬ ِ ِ ِ ِ ٌَّ ِ‫ٌّإ‬.)
ْ ‫ُم ْسل ُم ْوٌّم‬ (Originally, ‫صٌَّر‬
ْ ‫ ُم ْسل ُم ْو َفٌّم‬but the ‫ نٌّػٌُّْو ٌٌّف‬was dropped due to ٌ‫ضاٌّفٌَّة‬
ِ ‫طَالِبػو‬
‫ٌّع ْل ٌٍّم‬ ِ ‫ طَالِبػو َف‬but the ‫ نٌّػٌُّو ٌٌّف‬was dropped due to ٌ‫ضاٌّفٌَّة‬
(Originally, ‫ٌّع ْل ٌٍّم‬ ٌَّ ِ‫ٌّإ‬.)
ُْ ُْ ْ

EXERCISE
1. Translate the following into Arabic.
i. The boy’s two bicycles.
ii. The farmer’s two servants.
iii. Your parents came.
iv. I saw your parents.
v. The servants of deen.
vi. The teachers of the school.

61
Section 3.6
َ‫ – أقْسامَالْج ْم اع‬Types of Plural

‫َالسَالا َم‬
َّ ‫ – الْج ْمع‬Sound Plural: It is that plural whose ٌ‫( ِصيغٌَّة‬the singular letter sequence/form) of
ِ ‫ و‬does not change, when its plural is made. In other words, the singular letter sequence does
‫اح ٌٌّد‬ َ
not break.
e.g. ٌّ‫ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َف‬ (singular – ‫سلِ ٌٌّم‬
ْ ‫) ُم‬

ٌِّ ‫اَ ْذَ ْم ُعٌّالس‬:

There are two types of ُ‫ال‬
ٌِّ ‫ٌّس‬
1. ٌ‫ال‬ َ ‫ٌّم َذك ٍر‬
ُ ‫ – جَْ ُع‬Masculine Sound Plural: It is formed by adding at the end of a singular
ِ ‫ (و‬one of the following:
)‫اح ٌٌّد‬ َ
 A ٌّ‫ ٌَّو ٌاو‬preceded by a dammah and a ‫ نٌّػٌُّْو ٌٌّف‬with a fathah )ٌ‫ح ٌّة‬
ٌَّ ‫ض ٌُّم ٌّْوٌٌّـ ٌّ ٌَّو ٌّنٌّػٌُّْو ٌٌّف ٌّ ٌَّم ٌّْفتٌُّػٌّْو‬
ٌّْ ‫اٌّم‬
ٌَّ ‫(ٌَّو ٌٌّاو ٌّ ٌَّماٌّقٌَّػْبٌّػٌّلَ ٌَّه‬
i.e. ]‫ [ﹹ ْو ٌَّف‬for ‫الرٌّفْ ٌِّع‬
ٌّ ٌُّ‫ ٌَّحاٌّلٌَّة‬.
e.g. ٌّ‫ٌّ ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َف‬
 A ٌ‫اء‬ ٌّ َ‫ ٌّي‬preceded by a kasrah and a ‫ نٌّػٌُّْو ٌٌّف‬with a fathah )ٌ‫سٌّْوٌٌّر ٌّ ٌَّو ٌّنٌّػٌُّْو ٌٌّف ٌّ ٌَّم ٌّْفتٌُّػٌّْو ٌَّح ٌّة‬
ٌُّ ‫اٌّم ٌّْك‬
ٌَّ ‫اءٌٌّ ٌَّماٌّقٌَّػْبٌّػٌّلَ ٌَّه‬
ٌّ َ‫ (ٌّي‬i.e.
[‫ن‬
ٌَّ ْ‫ ]ﹻٌّي‬for ٌّ‫اذَر‬ ٌِّ ‫ص‬
ٌّْ ٌّ‫بٌّ ٌَّو‬ ٌّْ ٌّ‫ ٌَّحاٌّلٌَّةٌُّالن‬.
ٌّ‫ي‬ ِِ
e.g. َ ْ ‫ُم ْسلم‬

ٌِّ ‫ٌّس‬
2. ٌ‫ال‬ ٍ ‫ – جَْع‬Feminine Sound Plural: It is formed by discarding the round ‫ ة‬and
َ ‫ٌّم َؤنث‬
ُ ُ
adding at the end of a singular, one of the following:
 An ‫ف‬ ٌٌّ ِ‫ ٌّأٌَّل‬preceded by a fathah and a madmoom long ‫ض ٌُّم ٌّْوٌَّم ٌّةٌ) ت‬
ٌّْ ‫اءٌٌّ ٌَّم‬
ٌّ َ‫ح ٌّ ٌَّوٌٌّّت‬
ٌٌّ ‫اٌّم ٌّْفتٌُّػٌّْو‬ ٌٌّ ِ‫(ٌّأٌَّل‬
ٌَّ ‫فٌّ ٌَّماٌّقٌَّػْبٌّػٌّلَ ٌَّه‬
i.e. ]‫ات‬
ٌٌّ ‫ [ﹷ‬for ‫الرٌّفْ ٌِّع‬
ٌّ ٌُّ‫ ٌَّحاٌّلٌَّة‬.
ٌّ‫ات‬ ِ
e.g. ٌ ‫ُم ْسل َم‬
 An ‫ف‬ ٌٌّ ِ‫ ٌّأٌَّل‬preceded by a fathah and a maksoor long ‫ْسٌّوٌَّرٌّةٌ) ت‬
ٌُّ ‫اءٌٌّ ٌَّمك‬
ٌّ َ‫حٌّ ٌَّوٌٌّّت‬
ٌٌّ ‫اٌّم ٌّْفتٌُّػٌّْو‬ ٌٌّ ِ‫ (أٌٌَّّل‬i.e.
ٌَّ ‫فٌّ ٌَّماٌّقٌَّػْبٌّػٌّلَ ٌَّه‬
ٌٍّ ‫ [ﹷ‬for ٌّ‫اذَر‬
]‫ات‬ ٌِّ ‫ص‬
ٌّْ ٌّ‫بٌّ ٌَّو‬ ٌّْ ٌّ‫ ٌَّحاٌّلٌَّةٌُّالن‬.
ٍ ‫ٌّمسلِم‬
ٌّ‫ات‬
e.g. َ ُْ

‫س َر‬ َّ ‫ – الْج ْمعَالْمك‬Broken Plural: It is that plural whose ٌ‫( ِصيغٌَّة‬the singular letter sequence/form) of
ِ ‫ و‬changes, when its plural is made. In other words, the singular letter sequence breaks.
‫اح ٌٌّد‬ َ
ٌٌّ ‫ِر َج‬
e.g. ‫اؿ‬ (singular – ‫ل‬ ٌٌّ ‫) َر ُج‬

‫ – ج ْمع َقالََّة‬Restricted Plural: It is that plural, which denotes a number from three to ten. It has
four common ‫أٌَّْوَزا ٌٌّف‬.

62
 Table 3.1
‫أ َْوزانَج ْم اعَقالََّة‬
Wazn Singular Meaning Plural
ٌّ‫أَفْػ ٌُّع ٌل‬ ٌّ‫س‬
ٌ ‫نػَ ْف‬ self ٌّ‫س‬
ٌ ‫أَنْػ ُف‬
ٌٌّ ‫أَفْػ َع‬
‫اؿ‬ ‫قَػ ْوٌٌّؿ‬ statement ٌٌّ ‫أَقْػ َو‬
‫اؿ‬
ٌ‫أَفْعِلٌَّة‬ ‫طَ َع ٌٌّاـ‬ food ٌ‫أَطْعِ ٌَّمٌّة‬
ٌ‫فِ ْعلٌَّة‬ ‫ُغ ََل ٌٌّـ‬ boy ٌ‫ِغ ْل َمٌّة‬

Note: The masculine and feminine sound plural, which is not preceded by an ‫ اؿ‬is also
considered ‫جَْ ٌُّعٌٌّّقِلٌّ ٌٍّة‬
ٌّ .
ٌّ‫ت‬ ِ
e.g. ٌ ‫َعاق ََل‬ intelligent females
‫َعاقِلُ ْو ٌَّف‬ intelligent males

َ‫ – ج ْم عَكثْ رة‬Unrestricted Plural: It is that plural, which denotes a number from ten upwards.
Some of the common ‫ أٌَّْوَزا ٌٌّف‬are given below.

Table 3.2
َ‫أ َْوزانَج ْم اعََكثْ رة‬
Wazn Singular Meaning Plural
ٌ ‫فِ َع‬
ٌّ‫اؿ‬ ٌّ‫َعْب ٌد‬ slave ٌ َ‫ِعب‬
ٌّ‫اد‬
ُ‫فُػ َع ََل ٌّء‬ ‫َعلِْي ٌٌّم‬ knowledgeable ُ‫اء‬
ٌّ ‫ُعلَ َم‬
ِ ٌّ َِ‫ن‬ ِ
ُ‫أَفْ ٌّع ََل ٌّء‬ ‫يب‬ prophet ُ‫أَنْبيَ ٌّاء‬
‫فُػ ُع ٌٌّل‬ ٌّ‫َر ُس ْوٌؿ‬ messenger ٌّ‫ُر ُس ٌل‬
‫فُػ ُع ْوٌٌّؿ‬ ‫ََْن ٌٌّم‬ star ‫َُنُ ْوٌٌّـ‬
ٌٌّ ‫فُػع‬
‫اؿ‬ ‫َخ ِاد ٌٌّـ‬ servant ‫ُخد ٌٌّاـ‬
‫فَػ ْعلى‬ ٌٌّ ْ‫َم ِري‬
‫ض‬ patient ‫َم ْرضى‬
ٌ‫فَػ َعلٌَّة‬ ٌٌّ ِ‫طَال‬
‫ب‬ student ٌ‫طَلَبٌَّة‬
‫فِ َع ٌٌّل‬ ٌ‫فِْرقٌَّة‬ group/sect ٌٌّ ‫فَِر‬
‫ؽ‬
‫فِ ْع ََل ٌٌّف‬ ‫ُغ ََل ٌٌّـ‬ boy ‫ِغ ْل َما ٌٌّف‬

63
 Note: The masculine and feminine sound plural which is preceded by an ‫ اؿ‬is also
considered as ٍ‫جَْ ُعٌّ َكثْػَرٌّة‬.
ٌّ‫ات‬ ِ ٌّ‫اَلْ ُم ْسلِ ُم ْو َف‬
e.g. ُ ‫اَلْ ُم ْسل َم‬

َ‫ – ج ْمعَالْج ْم اع‬Plural of a Plural: It is the plural of a plural. Sometimes, it appears on the wazn of
ٌِّ‫ىٌّاذُ ُم ْو‬
‫ع‬ ٌِّ ‫اَ ْذَ ْم ُعٌّالس‬. Every plural does not have a plural. Some
ْ ‫ ُمْنتَػ َه‬and sometimes on the wazn of ُ‫ال‬
examples of plurals, which have a plural are given below.

Table 3.3
َ‫أ ْمثالَج ْم اعَالْج ْم اع‬
Singular Meaning Plural Plural of Plural
ٌ‫نِ ْع َمٌّة‬ blessing ٌّ‫أَنْػ َع ٌم‬ ِ َ‫أَن‬
ٌّ‫اع ُم‬
‫ظُْفٌٌّر‬ nail ‫أَظَافٌُِّر‬ ‫أَ ٌّظَافِْيػٌُّر‬
ٌٌّ ‫بػَْي‬
‫ت‬ house ٌٌّ ‫بػُيُػ ْو‬
‫ت‬ ٌٌّ َ‫بػُيُػ ْوت‬
‫ات‬
‫اض ٌٌّل‬ ِ َ‫ف‬ well-qualified ‫اض ٌُّل‬ ِ َ‫أَف‬ ‫اضلُ ْو ٌَّف‬ ِ َ‫أَف‬

َ‫م ْنت هىَالْجم ْو اع‬: It is that plural, which has after the ‫ٌّم ٌِّع‬ٌّْ َ‫ٌٌّّاذ‬
ْ ‫ٌّف‬ ِ
ُ ‫( أٌَّل‬alif of plural), one of the following:
 two ‫ؾ‬ ٌٌّ‫حٌّر‬
ٌَّ َ‫ ٌُّمٌّت‬letters. e.g. ‫اج ٌُّد‬ ِ ‫مس‬
ََ
 one ‫شدٌّ ٌٌّد‬ ٌَّ ‫ ٌُّم‬letter. e.g. ٌّ‫( َد َواب‬the original being ‫ب‬ ٌُّ ِ‫) َد َواب‬
 three letters, the middle one being ‫ن‬ ٌٌّ ِ‫اك‬
ٌّ ‫ ٌَّس‬. e.g. ‫َم َفاتِْي ٌُّح‬
Some of the common wazns of ‫ع‬
ٌِّ‫اذُ ُم ْو‬
ْ ٌّ‫ ُمْنتَػ َهى‬are given below:

Table 3.4
َ‫أ َْوزانَم ْنت هىَالْجمو اع‬
Wazn Singular Meaning Plural
ٌّ‫اع ُل‬ ِ ‫م َف‬
َ ٌّ‫َم ْس ِج ٌد‬ mosque ٌّ‫اج ُد‬ ِ ‫مس‬
ََ
‫اعْي ٌُّل‬ ِ ‫م َف‬ ٌٌّ َ‫ِم ْفت‬
‫اح‬ ‫َم َفاتِْي ٌُّح‬
َ key
ِ
‫فَػ َعائ ٌُّل‬ ِ َ‫ق‬
ٌ‫اع َدٌّة‬ rule/maxim ‫اع ٌُّد‬ِ ‫قَػو‬
َ
ٌ‫فِ ْعلٌَّة‬ ٌ‫ِر َسالٌَّة‬ message/letter ِ
‫ٌَّر َسائ ٌُّل‬
‫اع ٌُّل‬ ِ َ‫أَف‬ ‫أَ ْكبَػٌٌّر‬ elder ‫أَ َكابٌُِّر‬

64
َ‫ – اا ْسمَالْج ْم اع‬Collective Noun: It is a singular noun, which gives a plural meaning.
e.g. ‫ قَػ ْوٌٌّـ‬nation
ٌٌّ ‫ َرْى‬group
‫ط‬
Note:
1. These words have plurals. )‫اـ‬ ٌٌّ ‫ٌّأَقْػ َو‬،‫ط‬
ٌٌّ ‫(أ َْرَىا‬
2. In usage, if the word is considered, it will be used as a singular noun.
e.g. ‫اضٌٌّر‬ِ ‫اَلْ َقوـٌّح‬
َ ُْ The people are present.
If its meaning is considered (as is commonly done), it will be used as a plural noun.
ِ ‫قَػوـٌّص‬
e.g. ‫ارُْو ٌَّف‬ َ ٌْ righteous people

Notes:
1. Some plurals do not have the same root letters as their singulars.
e.g. ٌ‫اِ ْمٌَّرٌّأٌَّة‬ (woman) ٌّ ‫نِ َس‬
ٌ‫اء‬
ٌّ‫ذُ ْو‬ (the one who possesses something) ٌّ‫أ ُْولُْو‬

ٌِّ َ‫ؼٌّاٌّلْ ٌِّقٌّي‬

2. Some plurals are not according to rule )‫اس‬ ٌَّ ‫( ٌِّخ‬.
ٌُّ ‫َل‬
e.g. ‫أ ٌُّـ‬ (mother) ٌّ‫ات‬
ٌ ‫أُم َه‬
‫فَ ٌٌّم‬ (mouth) ٌ‫أَفْػٌَّو ٌّاه‬
ِ
ٌ‫َم ٌّاء‬ (water) ٌ‫ميَ ٌّاه‬
‫إِنْ َسا ٌٌّف‬ (human being)
ٌ‫َشاٌّة‬ (goat/sheep)

‫ – ااسمَال ا‬Generic Noun: It is that noun, which refers to an entire genus (category).
‫ْج ْن ا‬
َ‫س‬ ْ
e.g. ‫ َش َجٌٌّر‬refers to anything which falls under the concept of a tree.

EXERCISE
1. What type of plurals are the following?

i. ‫صائمات‬ ii. ‫جيش‬

iii. ‫مصابيح‬ iv. ‫بَلد‬
v. ‫كتب‬ vi. ‫صائموف‬
vii. ‫أكلب‬

65
Section 3.7
َ‫ات‬
ٌ َ‫ مََْرفَوع‬- Words Which Are Always Marfoo‘
There are eight words that are always in the state of raf‘. These are as follows:
ِ َ‫ف‬
1. ‫اع ٌٌّل‬ ِ ‫نَائِبٌّالْ َف‬
2. ‫اع ٌِّل‬ ُ 3. ٌ‫ُمْبتَ ٌَّدٌّأ‬ 4. ‫َخبَػٌٌّر‬ 5. ‫َخ َو ِاِتَا‬
َ ‫َخبٌَّػ ُرٌٌّّإِف ٌَّوٌّأ‬
6. ‫َخ َو ِاِتَا‬ ِ ٌَّ ‫يٌّبِلَْي‬
ِ ْ ‫ٌّماٌّو ٌَّلٌّاَلْم َشبػ َهتَػ‬ ِ ْ ‫تٌّلِنَػ ْف ِى‬
ٌِّ ‫ٌّاذِْن‬ ٌّْ ِ ‫َخبٌَّػ ُر ٌَّلٌّاَل‬
َ ‫ا ْس ُمٌّ َكا َف ٌَّوٌّأ‬ 7. ‫س‬ ُ َ َ ‫ا ْس ُم‬ 8. ‫س‬
Some of these have been discussed before. ٌ‫( ُمْبتَ ٌَّدٌّأ‬subject) and ‫خبَػٌٌّر‬ َ (predicate) were
discussed in Section 1.3.1, ‫َخ َو ِاِتَا‬ ِ ‫ اِسمٌّ َكا َفٌّوٌّأ‬was
َ ‫ َخبٌَّػُرٌٌّّإِف ٌَّوٌّأ‬was discussed in Section 1.7, and ‫َخ َواِتَا‬
َ َ ُْ
discussed in Section 1.8. We discuss the rest below.

Section 3.7.1
‫ – ف ا‬Subject/Doer
َ‫اع ٌل‬
Definition: It is the doer of the action or of the meaning contained in the verb.
 The ‫ل‬ ِ
ِ َ‫ ف‬can either be a personal pronoun or an ‫اى ٌّر‬
ٌٌّ ‫اع‬ ِ
ٌٌّ َ‫( ٌّا ٌّْس ٌٌّم ٌّ ٌّظ‬i.e. visible in words after the
ِ َ‫ ف‬isٌّ ‫ٌّاِ ٌّس ٌّم‬
ٌّ‫)ٌّفِ ٌّْع ٌل‬. We discussed personal pronouns in Section 2.4.1. As for the case, when ‫اع ٌٌّل‬ ٌْ
ِ
‫اىٌٌّر‬ ِ
ٌّ َ‫ ٌّظ‬, the verb )‫ (ٌّف ٌّْع ٌٌّل‬usage will be as given below.

Table 3.5
‫ااستاعمالَال اْفع الَحسبَالْف ا‬
‫اع اَل‬ ْ ْ ْْ
‫فا‬
َ‫اع ٌل‬ َ‫َفا َْع ٌل‬ Example
1. ٌّ‫ث ٌّحٌّ ٌِّقٌّي ٌِّقي‬ ٌِّ َ‫ ٌّظ‬and no ‫ث‬ ٌِّ ‫ٌَّو‬ ُ‫ٌّعائِ َشٌّة‬
ْ َ ٌٌّ ٌّ‫اىٌٌّر ٌّ ٌُّم ٌَّؤن‬ ٌٌّ ٌّ‫اح ٌٌّدٌّ ٌُّمٌَّؤن‬ َ ‫ت‬ ْ ‫قَ َام‬
word appears between the
‫ ٌّفِ ٌّْع ٌٌّل‬and ‫اع ٌٌّل‬
ِ َ‫ف‬.
ٌ ٌّ‫ض ٌِّمْيٌّػٌٌّرٌّ ٌُّمٌَّؤن‬
2. ٌّ‫ث‬ ٌَّ ٌّ‫ث‬
ٌ ٌّ‫ ٌُّم ٌَّؤن‬according to ٌّ‫صَرتَا‬ ِ
َ َ‫ٌٌّّاَلْ ُم َعل َمتَافٌّن‬-ٌٌّّ‫ص ْر ٌَّف‬
َ َ‫اتٌّن‬
ُ ‫اَلْ ُم َعل َم‬
preceding noun ٌّ‫ت‬
ْ ‫صَر‬ َ َ‫ٌٌّّاَلْ ُم َعل َمةٌُّن‬-
ٌّ ‫ث ٌّ ٌَّح ٌِّقٌّْي ٌِّق‬
3. ‫ي‬ ٌِّ َ‫ ٌّظ‬and a word ٌّ‫اح ٌٌّدٌّ ٌُّمٌَّذكٌٌّر‬
ٌٌّ ٌّ‫اىٌٌّر ٌّ ٌُّم ٌَّؤن‬ ٌِّ ‫ ٌَّو‬or ‫ث‬ ٌِّ ‫ٌَّو‬
ٌٌّ ٌّ‫اح ٌٌّدٌّ ٌُّم ٌَّؤن‬ ُ‫ٌّعائِ َشٌّة‬
َ ‫قَػَرأٌَّالْيَػ ْوَـ‬
appears between the ‫ل‬ ٌٌّ ‫ ٌّفِ ٌّْع‬and or
ُ‫ٌّعائِ َشٌّة‬ ِ
ِ َ‫ف‬.
ٌّ‫اع ٌل‬ َ ‫قَػَرأَتٌّالْيَػ ْوَـ‬
4. ٌّ‫ح ٌِّقٌّي ٌِّقي‬ ٌِّ َ‫ٌّظ‬ ٌِّ ‫ ٌَّو‬or ‫ث‬ ٌِّ ‫ٌَّو‬ ِ ‫طَلٌَّع‬
ْ ٌَّ ٌّ‫ثٌّ ٌَّغ ٌُّْي‬
ٌٌّ ٌّ‫اىٌٌّرٌّ ٌُّمٌَّؤن‬ ٌّ‫اح ٌٌّدٌّ ٌُّمٌَّذكٌٌّر‬ ٌٌّ ٌّ‫اح ٌٌّدٌّ ٌُّم ٌَّؤن‬ ٌّ‫س‬
ُ ‫ طَلَ َعٌّالش ْم‬or ‫س‬ ٌُّ ‫تٌّالش ْم‬ َ
5. ‫كسٌّ ٌّر‬
ٌ ٌَّ ‫جَْ ٌٌّعٌّ ٌُّم‬
ٌّ ٌّ‫اىٌٌّر‬ٌِّ َ‫ٌّظ‬ ٌِّ ‫ ٌَّو‬or ‫ث‬
‫اح ٌٌّدٌّ ٌُّمٌَّذكٌٌٌّّر‬ ٌِّ ‫ٌَّو‬
ٌٌّ ٌّ‫اح ٌٌّدٌّ ٌُّم ٌَّؤن‬ ٌُّ ‫اؿٌّالر َج‬
‫اؿ‬ َ َ‫ ق‬or ‫اؿ‬ ِ
ٌُّ ‫قَالَتٌّالر َج‬
6. any ‫اى ٌّر‬ ِ ِ ٌِّ ‫ ٌَّو‬corresponding in ‫بٌّالر ُج ََل ٌِّف‬
ٌٌّ َ‫ٌّا ٌّْس ٌٌّمٌّ ٌّظ‬ ‫اح ٌٌّد‬ َ ‫ضَر‬ َ ٌٌّّ-ٌٌّّ‫اؿ‬ٌُّ ‫بٌّالر َج‬
َ ‫ضَر‬
َ
gender ‫بٌّالر ُج ٌُّل‬ َ ‫ضَر‬ َ ٌٌّّ-

66
 ‫‪Table 3.5 – Continued‬‬
‫فا‬
‫اع ٌلَ‬ ‫َفا َْع ٌلَ‬ ‫‪Example‬‬
‫ض ٌِّميٌّػ ٌّرٌّ ٌّمٌَّذكٌّرٌّ ‪7.‬‬ ‫اَ ْزَ ِادمو َفٌّ َذىبػواٌٌّّ‪ٌٌّّ-‬اَ ْزَ ِادم ِ‬
‫ٌَّ ْ ٌ ُ ٌ‬ ‫‪ٌُّ according to‬مٌَّذكٌٌّرٌّ‬ ‫افٌّ َذ َىبَا‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ُ ْ َُ ْ‬
‫‪preceding noun‬‬ ‫ب‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ٌٌّّ-‬اَ ْزَاد ُـٌّ َذ َى ٌَّ‬
‫كسٌّ ٌّر ‪8.‬‬ ‫ض ٌِّمْيٌّػٌٌّرٌّ ٌّ‬
‫جَْ ٌٌّعٌّ ٌُّم ٌَّ ٌ‬ ‫ٌَّ‬ ‫جَْ ٌٌّعٌّ ٌُّمٌَّذكٌٌّرٌّ‬
‫ثٌّ ‪ٌّ or‬‬ ‫ٌَّو ٌِّ‬
‫اح ٌٌّدٌّ ٌُّم ٌَّؤنٌّ ٌ‬ ‫اؿٌّقَ ٌُّام ْوا‬
‫ت ‪ or‬اَلر َج ُ‬ ‫اؿٌّقَ َام ٌّْ‬
‫اَلر َج ُ‬

‫‪EXERCISE‬‬

‫‪ٌّ in the spaces below.‬فِ ٌّْع ٌٌّ‬

‫ل ‪1. Fill in a suitable‬‬
‫‪i.‬‬ ‫الولداف _______‬ ‫الطَلب ‪ii.‬‬
‫ٌُّ‬ ‫_______‪_______/‬‬

‫_______ النساء ‪iii.‬‬ ‫‪iv.‬‬ ‫_______‪ _______/‬السفينة‬

‫‪v.‬‬ ‫الطفاؿ _______‪_______/‬‬ ‫_______‪ _______/‬اليوـٌّامرأٌّةٌ ‪vi.‬‬

‫‪67‬‬
‫‪Section 3.7.2‬‬
‫اعلوَ ‪ /‬نائابَالَْف ا‬
‫اع الَ‬ ‫اع َل ‪ – Substitute of‬فاعلَماَلمَيس َّمَف ا‬
‫ا‬
‫ْ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫ف ٌ‬

‫ؿ ‪Definition: It is that noun, which appears with a‬‬ ‫اع ٌٌّل ‪ٌّ (passive voice). The original‬فِ ٌّْع ٌٌّل ٌّ ٌَّْص ٌُّه ٌّْوٌٌّ‬ ‫‪ٌّ is‬فَ ٌِّ‬
‫ؿٌٌّّبٌِِّو ‪dropped and the‬‬
‫اعلٌُّوُ ‪ٌَّ subsitutes it, thus it is also called‬م ٌّْف ٌُّع ٌّْوٌٌّ‬ ‫‪ٌّ of such‬م ٌّْف ٌّعٌّوٌٌّؿ ‪ (the‬م ْفعوٌؿٌّماٌّ َلٌّيسمٌّفَ ِ‬
‫َ ُْ َ ْ ُ َ‬ ‫َ ُْ‬
‫اع ٌٌّل ‪ٌّ whose‬فِ ٌّْع ٌٌّ‬
‫ل‪a‬‬ ‫‪ٌّ is not mentioned).‬فَ ٌِّ‬
‫‪e.g.‬‬ ‫ض ِر َ‬
‫ب ٌَّزيْ ٌدٌّ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫)‪Zayd was hit. (The doer is not known/mentioned.‬‬

‫ل ‪The same‬‬ ‫‪ٌٌّّ usage rules apply as mentioned above in Table 3.5.‬فِ ٌّْع ٌلٌّ – ٌّفَ ٌِّ‬
‫اع ٌٌّ‬
‫‪e.g.‬‬ ‫ش ٌّةُ ‪1.‬‬ ‫ٌّعائِ َ‬
‫ت َ‬ ‫نُصَر ْ‬
‫ِ‬
‫تٌّ ‪2.‬‬ ‫ِ ِ‬
‫َعائ َشةٌُّنُصَر ْ‬
‫ِ ِ‬
‫ٌّعائِ َ‬
‫ش ٌّةُ ‪3.‬‬ ‫صرٌّالْيػوـ ِ‬
‫ٌّعائ َشٌّةُ ‪ or‬نُصَرتٌّالْيَػ ْوَـ َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫نُ َ َ ْ َ َ‬
‫س ‪4.‬‬ ‫تٌّالش ْم ٌُّ‬ ‫س ‪ٌّ or‬رٌّإِي ِ‬‫يٌّالش ْم ٌُّ‬ ‫ٌُّرٌّإِ ٌَّ‬
‫َُ‬
‫اؿ ‪ or‬ض ِرب ِ‬
‫اؿ ‪5.‬‬‫تٌّالر َج ٌُّ‬ ‫َُ‬ ‫بٌّالر َج ٌُّ‬‫ض ِر َ‬ ‫ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫اؿ ‪6.‬‬‫بٌّالر َج ٌُّ‬ ‫ض ِر َ‬ ‫بٌّالر ُج ََل ٌّف ‪ُ or‬‬ ‫ض ِر َ‬ ‫بٌّالر ُج ٌُّل ‪ُ or‬‬‫ض ِر َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫افٌّطُلبَا ‪ or‬اَ ْزَاد ُم ْو َفٌّطُلبُػ ْوا ‪7.‬‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ب ‪ or‬اَ ْزَادم ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫اَ ْزَاد ُـٌّطُل ٌَّ‬
‫َ‬
‫ٌّض ِربػُ ْوا ‪8.‬‬
‫اؿ ُ‬‫ت ‪ or‬اَلر َج ُ‬ ‫ٌّض ِربَ ٌّْ‬
‫اؿ ُ‬ ‫اَلر َج ُ‬

‫‪Sentence Analysis:‬‬

‫الْبابَ‬ ‫فتا َ‬
‫ح‬ ‫‪The door was opened.‬‬
‫نَائِبٌّالْ ٌَّف ِ‬
‫اع ِلٌّ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫ٌّفِ ٌّْع ٌٌّلٌّ ٌَّْص ٌُّه ٌّْوٌؿٌّ‬

‫‪EXERCISE‬‬

‫اع ٌِّل ‪ٌّ with its‬فِ ٌّْع ٌٌّلٌّ ٌَّْص ٌُّه ٌّْوٌٌّ‬
‫ؿ ‪1. Convert the following to‬‬ ‫‪.‬نَائِبٌّالْ َف ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫سرؽٌّاللصٌّاساؿ ‪i.‬‬ ‫نعبدٌّاهلل ‪iii.‬‬
‫فتحٌّزيدٌّالبواب ‪ii.‬‬ ‫ذبحٌّالرجلٌّالشاة ‪iv.‬‬

‫اع ٌٌّلٌّ–ٌٌّّفِ ٌّْع ٌٌّ‬

‫ل ‪2. Convert the following to‬‬ ‫‪ٌَّ .‬م ٌّْف ٌُّعٌّْوٌٌّؿٌّ–ٌٌّّفَ ٌِّ‬
‫بٌّالبقرة ‪i.‬‬
‫ُُْتلَ ُ‬ ‫سٌِّإ َؿٌّاسعلم ‪iii.‬‬
‫ٌُّ‬
‫قُ ِطع ِ‬
‫تٌّالزىرة ‪ii.‬‬ ‫َ‬ ‫بٌّاللنب ‪iv.‬‬‫ُش ِر َ‬

‫‪68‬‬
Section 3.7.3
َ‫ – اا ْسمَماَوَلَالْمشبَّ هت ْي انَبال ْيس‬The Noun of ‫ ما‬and َ‫ل‬, Which Is Similar to َ‫ل ْيس‬
 It means that ‫ َما‬and ‫ل‬
ٌَّ have the same meaning and effect (‫ ) َع َم ٌٌّل‬as ‫س‬
ٌّ ‫لَْي‬. َ
ِ
e.g. ‫اٌّزيْ ٌدٌّقَائ ًما‬ َ ‫َم‬ Zayd is not standing.
ٌَّ ‫ض َل ٌِّمْن‬
‫ك‬ َ ْ‫َل ٌَّر ُج ٌلٌّأَف‬ No man is more virtuous than you.
ٌِّ َ‫ٌّن‬.
 ‫ َما‬can appear before a ٌ‫ ٌَّم ٌّْعٌِّرٌّفٌَّة‬or a ٌ‫كٌَّرٌّة‬
ٌَّ appears before a ٌ‫ٌّنَ ٌّكٌَِّرٌّة‬.
 ‫ل‬
ِ
 When the ‫خبَػٌٌّر‬ َ of ‫ َما‬appears before the ‫ٌّا ٌّْس ٌٌّم‬, or the word ٌّ‫ ٌّإِل‬appears before the ‫خبَػٌٌّر‬,
َ the
effect of ‫ َما‬is cancelled.
e.g. ‫ٌّزيْ ٌٌّد‬ ِ
َ ‫َماٌّقَائ ٌم‬ Zayd is not standing.
‫اٌّضَم ٌدٌٌّّإِل ٌَّر ُس ْوٌٌّؿ‬
ُ ‫ٌّم‬َ ‫َو‬ And Muhammad is not but a messenger. /
And Muhammad is only a messenger.
[Allah bless him and give him peace]

Section 3.7.4
‫ – خبَرَلَالََّتاىَلان َْف ايََال ا‬The ‫ خب َر‬of That َ‫ ل‬Which Negates an Entire ‫َس‬
‫ْج ْن ا‬
َ‫س‬ ٌَ ‫( اَج ْن‬Class)
ْ ٌ
 ‫ل‬ ٌَّ gives its ‫ ٌّاِ ٌّْس ٌٌّم‬a fathah and its ‫ َخبَػٌٌّر‬a dammah when the ‫ ٌّاِ ٌّْس ٌٌّم‬and the ‫ َخبَػٌٌّر‬are ٌ‫ٌّنَ ٌِّكٌَّرٌّة‬.
e.g. ‫لٌّقَائِ ٌٌّم‬ َ ‫َل ٌَّر ُج‬ No man is standing.

Table 3.6
Different Forms of the Noun of َ‫ ل‬and Its I‘raab

َ‫َاا َْسمََل‬ Explanation I‘raab Example

1. ‫اؼ‬ ٌَّ ‫ ٌُّم‬or 1‫اؼ‬
ٌٌّ ‫ض‬ ٌِّ ‫ض‬ٌَّ ‫ٌِّشٌّْب ٌّوٌُّاٌّلْ ٌُّم‬ ٌّ‫ب‬
ٌ ‫ص ٌّْو‬
ٌُّ ‫ٌَّمٌّْن‬ ٌّ‫فٌّالدٌّا ِر‬ ٌِّ ‫ٌَّلٌّ َخ‬
ٌّ ٌِّ‫اد َـ ٌٌَّّر ٌُّج ٌٍّل‬
There is no servant of
a man in the house.
ٌّ‫وـ‬
ٌ ‫اٌّم ٌّْذ ٌُّم‬
ٌَّ ‫اٌّخ ًٌّْي‬ ٌِّ ‫ٌّس‬
ٌَّ ً‫اعي‬ ٌَّ ‫ٌَّل‬
The one who attempts
to do good is not
blameworthy.
ِ
2. ٌ‫كٌّرٌّةٌٌّ ٌّم ٌّْفٌّرٌّدٌّة‬ ٌّ ِ ‫ٌَّمٌّْب‬ ٌّ‫ٌّفٌّالدٌّا ِر‬
ٌّ ِ ‫ٌَّل ٌٌَّّر ٌُّج َل‬
َ َ ُ ٌَّ َ‫ٌّن‬ ٌّ‫نٌّ ٌَّعٌّلَىٌّاٌّلْ ٌَّفٌّْت ِح‬
There is no man in the
house.

1
It refers to the case when a word is connected to another word, which completes its meaning, in the same way
that mudaaf and mudaaf ilayhi are connected to one another.

69
 Table 3.6 – Continued

َ‫َاا َْسمََل‬ Explanation I‘raab Example

3. ٌ‫ٌّم ٌّعٌِّرٌّفٌَّة‬
َْ - The ‫ل‬
ٌَّ has to be ٌ‫ع‬
ٌّ ‫ٌَّمٌّْرفٌُّػٌّْو‬ ٌَّ ‫ٌّفٌّالدٌّا ٌِّرٌّ ٌَّوٌٌَّّل‬
‫ٌّع ٌّْمٌرو‬ ٌّ ِ ‫ٌَّل ٌَّزيْ ٌد‬
repeated with Neither is Zayd in the
another ٌ‫ ٌَّم ٌّْعٌِّرٌّفٌَّة‬. house nor ‘Amr.

- The effect of ‫ل‬

ٌَّ is
cancelled.
ِ
4. ٌ‫كٌّرٌّة‬
ٌَّ َ‫ ٌّن‬with a word - The ‫ل‬
ٌَّ has to be ٌ‫ع‬
ٌّ ‫ٌَّمٌّْرفٌُّػٌّْو‬ ٌ‫ٌّوٌٌَّّل ٌٌّّاٌِّْمٌَّرأٌٌَّّة‬
ٌَّ ‫اٌّر ٌُّج ٌل‬ٌَّ ِ‫ٌَّل ٌٌّّف‬
ٌَّ ‫يه‬
between it and ‫ل‬ ٌَّ repeated. Neither is there a man
- The effect of ‫ل‬
ٌَّ is in it nor a woman.

cancelled.
5. ٌّ‫ َل‬and ٌ‫ ٌّنَ ٌِّكٌَّرٌّة‬repeated - It can be read in ‫ح ٌُّه ٌَّما‬ٌُّ ‫فٌَّػٌّْت‬ 2
ٌّ‫ٌّوٌٌَّّلٌّقٌُّػٌّوَة‬ٌَّ ‫وؿ‬
َ ‫ٌّح‬
ٌَّ ‫ٌَّل‬
five ways.
with no word ‫ٌَّرفٌّْػ ٌُّع ٌُّه ٌَّما‬ ‫ٌّوٌٌَّّلٌّقٌُّػٌّوٌٌّة‬ٌَّ ‫وؿ‬
ٌ ‫ٌّح‬
ٌَّ ‫ٌَّل‬
between them ٌّ ِ ٌّ‫بٌّالث‬
‫ان‬ ٌُّ ‫ص‬ ٌّْ َ‫الٌَّوٌِّؿٌّ ٌَّوٌٌّّن‬
ٌّ ْ ٌّ‫فٌَّػٌّْت ٌُّح‬ ‫ٌّوٌٌَّّلٌّقٌُّػٌّوًٌّة‬
ٌَّ ‫وؿ‬
َ ‫ٌّح‬
ٌَّ ‫ٌَّل‬
ٌّ ِ ٌّ‫وٌّرٌّفْ ٌُّعٌّالث‬
‫ان‬ ِ ٌّ ْ ٌّ‫فٌَّػٌّْت ٌّح‬
ٌَّ ٌّ‫الٌَّو ٌّؿ‬ ُ ٌٌّ‫ٌّوٌٌَّّلٌّقٌُّػٌّوة‬
ٌَّ ‫وؿ‬
َ ‫ٌّح‬
ٌَّ ‫ٌَّل‬
‫ان‬ ِ
ٌّ ِ ٌّ‫الٌَّو ٌّؿٌّوٌّفٌَّػٌّْت ٌُّحٌّالث‬
ٌّ ْ ٌّ‫ٌَّرٌّفْ ٌُّع‬ ‫ٌّوٌٌَّّلٌّقٌُّػٌّوٌَّة‬
ٌَّ ‫وؿ‬
ٌ ‫ٌّح‬
ٌَّ ‫ٌَّل‬

Note: The ‫خبَػٌٌّر‬

َ of ‫ ٌَّل‬may be omitted when the meaning is understood.
e.g. َ ْ‫َلٌّبَأ‬
ٌّ‫س‬ i.e. ٌّ‫ك‬
َ ‫ٌّعلَْي‬
َ ‫س‬ َ ْ‫ٌَّلٌّبَأ‬ There is no harm upon you. / No problem.

EXERCISE
1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and point out the rule which applies.
i. ‫لٌّخْيٌّىفٌّماؿٌّالبخيلٌّلنفسو‬ iii. ‫لٌّبكرٌّىفٌّالفصلٌّوٌّلٌّحسن‬
ii. ‫لٌّطالبٌّعلمٌّىفٌّالفصل‬ iv. ‫لٌّىفٌّالفصلٌّمعلمٌّوٌّلٌّطالب‬

2
There is no power (to do good) and there is no power (to stay away from evil)…

70
Section 3.8
َ‫ات‬
ٌ َ‫ – مََْنصَ َْوب‬Words Which Are Always Mansoob3

1. ٌّ‫ؿٌّبِِو‬
ٌٌّ‫َم ْفعُ ْو‬ 7. ٌّ‫ اَلت ِمْيػُز‬/ ‫اَلت ٌّْمٌّيِْيػٌُّز‬
‫َخ َو ِاِتَا‬ ِ
2. ٌّ‫ؿٌّ ُمطْلَ ٌق‬ ٌٌّ‫َم ْفعُ ْو‬ 8. َ ‫ا ْس ُمٌٌّّإِف ٌَّوٌّأ‬
3. ُ‫ؿٌّلٌَّو‬
ٌٌّ‫َم ْفعُ ْو‬ known as ُ‫س ٌّة‬ ْ ‫اَلْ َم َفاعِْي ُل‬
َ ‫ٌّازَ ْم‬ 9. ٌَّ ‫يٌّبِلَْي‬
‫س‬ ِ ْ ‫َخبٌَّػ ٌّرٌّ َماٌّو ٌَّلٌّاَلْم َشبػ َهتَػ‬
ُ َ ُ
4. ٌُّ‫ؿٌّ َم َعو‬ٌٌّ‫َم ْفعُ ْو‬ 10. ٌِّ ‫اذْن‬
‫س‬ ِ ِ
ْ ٌّ‫تٌّلنَػ ٌّْف ٌِّي‬ ٌّْ ِ ‫اِ ْس ُم ٌَّلٌّاَل‬
5. ‫ؿٌّفِْي ٌِّو‬
ٌٌّ‫َم ْفعُ ْو‬ 11. ‫َخ َو ِاِتَا‬
َ ‫َخبٌَّػُرٌّ َكا َف ٌَّوٌّأ‬
6. ‫اؿ‬
ٌُّ َ‫اَ ْر‬ 12. ٌّ‫اَلْ ُم ْستَثْػن‬

Of these, 8,9,10 and 11 have been discussed before. Here, we will discuss the remaining.

Section 3.8.1
َ‫ – م ْفع ْولٌََبا او‬Object
Definition: It is that word on which the action of the ‫ل‬ ٌِّ َ‫ ٌّف‬takes place.
ٌٌّ ‫اع‬
e.g. َ‫ماء‬ َ‫خالا ٌد‬ َ‫ش ارب‬ Khalid drank water.
ٌّ‫َم ْفعُ ْوٌٌّؿٌّبِِو‬ ٌِّ َ‫ٌّف‬
‫اع ٌٌّل‬ ‫فِ ْع ٌٌّل‬

 Sometimes, the verb governing the ‫ؿٌّبٌِِّو‬

ٌٌّ‫ َم ْفعُ ْو‬is dropped as in the following:
a. ‫( ُمنَادى‬the one being called):
e.g. َ‫اابْنََزيْد‬ ‫يا‬ O son of Zayd!
)‫ُمنَادىٌّ( َم ْف ُع ْوٌٌّؿٌّبٌِِّو‬ ‫ؼٌّالنٌّ ٌَّد ٌِّاء‬
ٌُّ ‫ٌَّحٌّْر‬
ٌَّ ْ‫(أ َْد ُع ْوٌّاِب‬. The verb ‫ أ ٌَّْد ُع ٌّْو‬was dropped.
It was originally )‫نٌّ َزيْ ٌٍّد‬

Note:
 ٌِّ ‫ؼٌّالنٌّ ٌَّد‬
The ‫اء‬ ٌُّ ‫( ٌَّحٌّْر‬vocative particle) substitutes the omitted verb.
Some of the vocative particles are as follows:
َ‫ ٌّأ‬and ‫ي‬ٌّْ َ‫ٌّأ‬ These are used when the ‫ ُمنَادى‬is near.
‫ أَيَا‬and ‫َىيَا‬ These are used when the ‫ ُمنَادى‬is far.
‫يَا‬ This is used for both (near and far).

3
There are exceptions to the rule. Mustathnaa, for example, is not always mansoob. It is still mentioned under
this category because most of the time, it is mansoob.

71
 Table 3.7
Rules Governing the I‘raab of the ‫منادٰى‬

‫منادٰى‬ ٌ‫حَالَ َة‬ Example

1. ٌّ‫اؼ‬
ٌ ‫ض‬ ٌَّ ‫ٌُّم‬ ٌُّ ‫يَاٌّابْ ٌَّنٌّ َزيْ ٌٍّد ٌَّمٌّْن‬
ٌٌّ ‫ص ٌّْو‬
‫ب‬ O son of Zayd!
4ِ
2. ٌّ ‫ض‬
‫اؼ‬ ٌَّ ‫ٌَّشٌّبِ ٌّيوٌٌٌّّبِاٌّلْ ٌُّم‬ ٌُّ ‫اٌّكٌِّتَاٌّبًا ٌَّمٌّْن‬
ٌٌّ ‫ص ٌّْو‬
‫ب‬ ٌّ ً‫يَاٌّقاٌِّرٌّء‬ O reader of a book!
3. ‫ٌّنَ ٌِّكٌَّرٌّةٌٌّ ٌَّغ ٌُّْيٌّ ٌُّم ٌَّعيػٌٌّّنٌٍَّة‬ ٌٌّ ‫ص ٌّْو‬
‫ب‬ ٌُّ ‫ي ٌَّمٌّْن‬ٌّْ ‫ٌّخ ٌّْذٌٌّّبٌِّيَ ٌِّد‬
ٌُّ ‫يَاٌٌَّّر ٌُّج ًَل‬ O man! Take my hand. (call of
(Unspecified nakirah) a blind man to any person for
assisstance)
4. ٌ‫ٌّنَ ٌِّكٌَّرٌّةٌٌّ ٌُّم ٌَّعيػٌٌّّنٌَّة‬ ٌ‫ع‬
ٌّ ‫ٌَّمٌّْرفٌُّػٌّْو‬ ٌّ‫ٌّيَاٌٌَّّر ٌُّج ُل‬ O man!
(Specified nakirah)
5. ٌ‫ٌَّم ٌّْعٌِّرٌّفٌَّةٌٌّ ٌُّم ٌّْفٌَّرٌَّدٌّة‬ ٌ‫ع‬
ٌّ ‫ٌَّمٌّْرفٌُّػٌّْو‬ ٌّ‫اٌّزٌّيْ ُد‬
ٌَّ َ‫ٌّي‬ O Zayd!
(Singular ma‘rifah)
6. ‫ؼٌّبٌِّاؿ‬
ٌٌّ ‫ٌُّم ٌَّعٌّر‬ ٌ‫ع‬
ٌّ ‫ٌَّمٌّْرفٌُّػٌّْو‬ ‫( أَيػ َها‬masculine) or ‫( أَيػتُػ َها‬feminine) has to be
added between the ‫اء‬ ٌِّ ‫ؼٌّالنٌّ ٌَّد‬
ٌُّ ‫ ٌَّحٌّْر‬and ‫ ُمنَادى‬.
‫ يَاٌّأَيػ َهاٌّالر ُج ٌُّل‬O man! ُ‫ يَاٌّأَيػتُػ َهاٌّالْ َم ْرأٌَّة‬O woman!

 ٌّ‫( تٌَّػٌّْرٌِّخٌّْي ٌم‬abbreviation) is allowed in munaadaa.

e.g. ٌُّ ِ‫اٌّمال‬
‫ك‬ َ َ‫ ي‬can become ‫اؿ‬ٌُّ ‫اٌّم‬ ٌِّ ‫اٌّم‬
َ َ‫ ي‬or ‫اؿ‬ َ َ‫ي‬
‫ص ْوٌُّر‬
ُ ‫اٌّمْن‬
َ َ‫ ي‬can become ‫ص‬ٌُّ ْ‫اٌّمن‬
َ َ‫ي‬
Note: The last letter can be given a dammah or it can retain its original harakah.

b. ٌّ‫ٌّس ْه ًَل‬
َ ‫أ َْى ًَل ٌَّو‬: This is said to one’s guest for welcoming him/her.
Its original is ‫َل‬
ًٌّ ‫ٌّس ْه‬
َ ‫ت‬ َ ‫تٌّأ َْى ًَل ٌَّو ٌَّوطَْي‬
َ ‫أَتَػْي‬, which means “You have come to your own people
and have trampled comfortable ground.” In other words, “you are welcome.” Here
two verbs, ‫ت‬
ٌَّ ‫ أَتَػْي‬and ‫ت‬
ٌَّ ‫ َوطَْي‬have been dropped.

c. Sometimes, the verb governing the ‫ؿٌّبٌِِّو‬

ٌٌّ‫ َم ْف ُع ْو‬is dropped at the time of warning someone,
due to context. Examples include the following:
 ‫ق‬ ٌَّ ْ‫ اَلط ِريْ َق ٌّاَلط ِري‬is used instead of ‫ اِت ِق ٌّالط ِريْ ٌَّق‬to give the same meaning, which is
ٌِّ ‫ اِت‬has been dropped.
“Beware of the road!” Here, the verb ‫ق‬
َ ‫ إِي‬is used instead of ‫َس ٌِّد‬ ْ ‫ك ٌِّم َن‬ ِ
 ٌّ‫َس َد‬
َ ‫ٌّال‬
ْ ‫اؾ ٌَّو‬ َ ‫ٌّال‬ َ ‫ ات ِقٌّنػَ ْف َس‬to give the same meaning, which
is “Save yourself from the lion.”ٌّ

4
ٌِّ ‫ض‬
This is another term for ‫اؼ‬ ٌَّ ‫ ٌِّشٌّْبٌّوٌُّاٌّلْ ٌّم‬. As mentioned earlier, it is similar to mudaaf in meaning.
ُ

72
Section 3.8.2
َ‫م ْفع ْولٌََمطْل ٌق‬

Definition: It is the masdar of the verb that governs it and is used for the following:
 ‫كِي ٌٌّد‬
ٌّ ْ‫( ٌّتٌَّأ‬emphasis) e.g. ‫ٌّض ْربًا‬
َ ُ‫ضَربْػتُو‬
َ I beat him severely.
 ٌّ‫( بٌّػٌَّيَا ٌُّفٌّالنٌّػٌّْوِع‬description of type) e.g. ِ ‫جلَست‬
ٌّ‫ٌّج ْل َسةٌَّالْ َقاٌِّر ِئ‬ ُ ْ َ I sat like a Qari would sit.
 ‫( بٌّػٌَّيَا ٌُّفٌّاٌّلْ ٌَّع ٌَّد ٌِّد‬number of times) e.g. ٌِّ ْ ‫ٌّضَربػَتَػ‬
‫ي‬ َ ُ‫ضَربْػتُو‬َ I hit him twice.

Note: Sometimes, the verb governing ‫ق‬

ٌٌّ َ‫ َم ْف ُع ْوٌٌّؿٌّ ُمطْل‬is dropped because of context.
For example, ‫ٌّم ْق َدٌٍّـ‬ ٍ ‫اٌّخيٌّػر‬ ِ
َ ‫ َخْيٌّػَر‬. Originally, it was ‫ٌّم ْق َد ٌّـ‬
َ َ ْ َ ‫تٌّقُ ُدٌّْوًم‬
َ ‫قَد ْم‬, which means “You came a
good coming.” Here, the verb ‫ت‬ ٌَّ ‫قَ ِد ْم‬, andٌّ ‫قُ ُد ٌّْوًما‬, which is the ‫ َم ْف ُع ْوٌٌّؿ ٌّ ُمطْلَ ٌٌّق‬, have been dropped
ِ of the ‫م ْفعوٌٌّؿٌّمطْلَ ٌّق‬, which is ‫خيٌّػرٌّم ْق َدٌٍّـ‬, remains.
because of context. Only the ٌ‫ص َف ٌّة‬ ٌ ُ ُْ َ َ ََْ

Section 3.8.3
َ‫َمَ ْفَعَولٌََلَو‬/ََ‫ٌََِل ْجلا او‬
‫مَ ْفَعَول ا‬

Definition: It is that noun, which explains the reason for the action taking place. Generally, it
is a masdar.
e.g. ‫ضَربْػتُوٌٌُّّتٌَّأْ ِديْػبًا‬
َ I beat/hit him to teach (him) manners.

Section 3.8.4
َ‫م ْفع ْولٌََمعو‬

Definition: It is that noun, which appears after such a ‫او‬

ٌٌّ ‫ٌَّو‬, which has the meaning of ‫( ٌَّم ٌَّع‬with).
ٌٌّ ‫ ٌَّو‬is known as ‫ٌَّو ٌُّاوٌّاٌّلْ ٌَّم ٌّعِيٌٌِّّة‬.
This ‫او‬
ٌّ‫اب‬ ِ
e.g. َ َ‫َجاءَ ٌَّزيْ ٌد ٌَّوٌّالْكت‬ Zayd came with the book.
‫ت ٌَّو ٌَّزيْ ًدا‬ ِ
ُ ‫جْئ‬ I came with Zayd.

73
Section 3.8.4
َ‫َم ْفع ْولٌََفا ْي او‬/َ‫الظَّْرف‬

Definition: It is that noun, which denotes the time )‫ (ٌَّزٌَّما ٌٌّف‬or place )‫كا ٌٌّف‬
ٌَّ ‫ ( ٌَّم‬in which the action
took place.
e.g. ‫ٌّش ْهًرا‬
َ ‫ت‬ ُ ‫َسافَػ ْر‬ I travelled for a month.

 Both types of ‫ؼ‬ ٌٌّ ‫ ٌّظٌُُّرٌّْو‬, viz., ‫ ٌَّزٌَّما ٌٌّف‬and ‫ ٌَّم ٌَّكا ٌٌّف‬are of two types: ‫( َْض ُد ْوٌٌّد‬limited, restricted)
and ‫( ُمْبػ َه ٌٌّم‬umlimited, unrestricted).

 ٌِّ ‫ٌّؼٌٌّّالزَم‬
Types of ‫اف‬ ُ ‫ظٌُُّرٌّْو‬
i. ٌّ‫( َْض ُد ْوٌد‬limited, restricted): for example,
‫يػٌَّْوٌٌّـ‬ day e.g. ‫تٌّيػٌَّْوًما‬ ُ ‫ص ْم‬ ُ I fasted for one day.
‫لٌَّْي ٌٌّل‬ e.g. ‫َل‬ًٌّ ‫تٌّلٌَّْي‬ ِ
night ُ ‫َعم ْل‬ I worked for one night.
ٌٌّ ‫َش‬
‫هر‬ month e.g. ‫ٌّش ْهًرا‬ َ ‫ت‬ ُ ‫ص ْم‬ ُ I fasted for a month.
ٌ‫َسنٌَّة‬ year e.g. ً‫ٌّسنٌَّة‬
َ ‫ت‬ ُ ‫َسافَػ ْر‬ I travelled for a year.

ii. ٌّ‫( ُمْبػ َه ٌم‬umlimited, unrestricted): for example,

‫َد ْىٌٌّر‬ long period of time
e.g. ‫ٌّد ْىًرا‬
َ‫ت‬ ُ ‫ص ْم‬ُ I fasted for a long time.
ٌٌّْ ‫ ِح‬some time (could be short or long time period of time)
‫ي‬
ِ ً‫ٌّحيػن‬
e.g. ‫اٌّم َنٌّالد ْى ٌِّر‬ ِ َ‫ٌّدعاٌّنػُوحٌّق‬
ْ ُ‫ومو‬
َ ٌْ ََ
Nuh called his people for some time.

 ٌِّ ‫ٌّم َك‬

Types of ‫ٌّاف‬ ٌَّ ْ‫ٌّؼٌٌّّال‬
ُ ‫ظٌُُّرٌّْو‬
i. ٌّ‫( َْض ٌُّد ْوٌد‬limited, restricted):
e.g. ‫س ِج ٌِّد‬ ٌّ ِ ‫ت‬
ْ ‫ٌّفٌّالْ َم‬ ُ ‫صلْي‬ َ I prayed in the mosque.
ِ
e.g. ‫ٌّفٌّالدا ٌّر‬ِ
ٌّ ‫ت‬ ُ‫س‬ ٌّْ َ‫ٌَّجٌّل‬ I sat in the house.

ii. ٌّ‫( ُمْبػ َه ٌم‬umlimited, unrestricted):

ٌَّ ‫ َخ ْل‬behind
‫ف‬ e.g. ُ‫تٌّ َخ ْل َفٌّو‬
ُ‫س‬ٌّْ َ‫َجل‬ I sat behind him.
ٌّ‫أ ََم َاـ‬ in front of e.g. ُ‫تٌّأ ََم َامٌّو‬
ُ ‫قُ ْم‬ I stood in front of him.

Note: In the case of ٌّ‫كا ٌف‬ ٌَّ ‫( َْض ُد ْوٌٌّد)ٌّ ٌَّم‬, the preposition ‫ف‬ ٌّ ِ is mentioned in words; while
in the case of ‫كا ٌٌّف‬
ٌَّ ‫( ٌُّمْبػ َه ٌٌّم)ٌّ ٌَّم‬, it is assumed (‫) ُم َقدٌٌّر‬.ٌّ

74
 ‫‪The above-mentioned fives maf‘ools have been combined in one verse, which is as‬‬
‫‪follows:‬‬

‫ح ْدتٌّحَْ ًداٌّح ِام ًداٌّو َِ‬

‫ٌّحٌّْي ًدا‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َ َ‬ ‫َ ُ‬
‫اٌّم ِدٌّيْ ًدا‬ ‫ٌّش ْك ِرهِ َ‬
‫ٌّد ْىًر َ‬ ‫ِر َعايَةَ ُ‬
‫‪I praised Haamid and Hameed a lot out of regard for thanking them,‬‬
‫‪for an extended period of time.‬‬

‫‪Sentence Analysis:‬‬

‫اؼٌّإِلٌَّْيٌِّو = ُ‬
‫ش ْك ِرٌّهِ ‪1.‬‬ ‫ض ٌ‬‫اؼٌّ‪ُ ٌّ+‬م َ‬
‫ض ٌ‬‫ُم َ‬
‫اؼٌّإِلٌَّْيٌِّو = ِر َعايَةَ ُ‬
‫ٌّش ْك ِرٌِّه‬ ‫ض ٌ‬ ‫اؼٌّ‪ُ ٌّ+‬م َ‬
‫ض ٌ‬‫ُم َ‬
‫ص َف ٌّةٌ = َم ِدٌّيْ ًدا ‪2.‬‬‫ِ‬
‫ؼ = َد ْىًرا‬ ‫ص ْو ٌٌّ‬‫َم ْو ُ‬
‫حٌّْي ًدا ‪3.‬‬‫ؼ = َِ‬ ‫َم ْعطُْو ٌٌّ‬
‫ف = ٌَّو‬ ‫ؼٌّالْ َعطَ ٌِّ‬
‫َح ْر ُ‬
‫ٌّعلَْيٌِّو = َح ِام ًدا‬‫ؼ َ‬ ‫َم ْعطُْو ٌ‬

‫د ْىراَم اديَْدا‬ ‫ارعايةَش ْك ارَها‬ ‫ح اامداَوَح ام ْيَدا‬ ‫ح ْمَدا‬ ‫ح ام ْدتَ‬

‫|‬ ‫|‬
‫ٌّخ ََِبيٌّةٌ‬ ‫ِِ‬ ‫ِِ‬ ‫َم ْفعٌُّْوٌؿٌّبِِوٌّ‬ ‫فِعلٌّ‪ٌّ+‬فَ ِ‬
‫َم ْفعٌُّْوٌؿٌّفْيٌّو = جُْلَةٌٌّف ْعليةٌ َ‬ ‫َم ْفعٌُّْوٌؿٌّلٌَّوُ‬ ‫ٌّمطْلَ ٌٌّق‬
‫َم ْفعٌُّْوٌؿ ُ‬ ‫اع ٌٌّل‬ ‫ٌْ‬

‫‪EXERCISE‬‬

‫ؿ ‪1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and identify the type of‬‬
‫‪َ in the following sentences.‬م ْف ُعٌّْوٌٌّ‬
‫‪i.‬‬ ‫كلٌّعلىٌّأكلتي‬
‫ّ‬ ‫أ‬ ‫‪iv.‬‬ ‫سافرٌّزيدٌّطالباٌّللعلم‬
‫ركبٌّإبراىيمٌّارصاف ‪ii.‬‬ ‫وقفٌّالشرطيٌّوقوؼٌّالنشاط ‪v.‬‬
‫سافرتٌّوٌّأخاؾ ‪iii.‬‬ ‫قرأتٌّالدرسٌّصباحاٌّأماـٌّاسعلم ‪vi.‬‬

‫‪75‬‬
Section 3.8.5
َ‫ – اَلَْحَال‬State / Condition

Definition: It is a noun, which describes the condition of either the ‫ل‬ ِ َ‫ ف‬or the ‫ م ْفع ٌّوٌٌّؿ‬or both at
ٌٌّ ‫اع‬ ُْ َ
the time the action contained in the verb took place.
e.g. ‫ٌّراكِبًا‬
َ ‫َجاءَ ٌَّزيْ ٌد‬ Zayd came in the condition that he was mounted.
‫ت ٌَّزيْ ًداٌّنَائِ ًما‬ ِ
ُ ‫جْئ‬ I came to Zayd in the condition that he was sleeping.
ٌِّ ْ ‫اٌّجالِ َس‬
‫ي‬ َ ‫ت ٌَّزيْ ًد‬ ُ ‫َكل ْم‬ I spoke to Zayd in the condition that both of us were
sitting.

Notes:

1. The condition itself is known as ٌّ‫اؿ‬ ٌ ‫ ٌَّح‬, whereas the one whose condition is being
ٌِّ َ‫وٌّار‬
described is known as ‫اؿ‬ ٌّْ ُ‫ ٌّذ‬.
2. The ‫اؿ‬
ٌٌّ ‫ ٌَّح‬gets a nasb, which is generally in the form of two fathahs.
ٌِّ ٌَّ‫ار‬
3. The ‫اؿ‬ ٌٌّ ‫ ٌَّح‬is generally ٌ‫( ٌّنَ ٌِّكٌَّرٌّة‬when the ‫اؿ‬
ْ ٌّ ‫ ٌّذُو‬is generally ٌ‫ ٌَّم ْعٌٌِّّرٌّفٌَّة‬and the ‫اؿ‬ ٌٌّ ‫ ٌَّح‬is not a
sentence).
e.g. ‫ٌّراكِبًا‬ َ ‫َجاءَ ٌَّزيْ ٌد‬ Zayd came riding/while he was mounted.

4. If the ‫اؿ‬ ٌّْ ٌّ‫ ٌّذُو‬is ٌ‫ٌّنَ ٌِّكٌَّرٌّة‬, the ‫اؿ‬

ٌِّ َ‫ار‬ ٌِّ َ‫ار‬
ٌٌّ ‫ ٌَّح‬is brought before the ‫اؿ‬ ٌّْ ٌّ‫ ٌّذُو‬.
ٌّ‫اٌّر ُج ٌل‬ ِ ٌّ ِ‫جاء‬
e.g. َ ً‫نٌّ َراكب‬ََْ A man came to me riding/while he was mounted.

5. The ‫اؿ‬ ٌّْ ٌّ‫ ٌّذُو‬can be a ‫ض ٌِّمْيٌّػٌٌّر‬

ٌِّ َ‫ار‬ ٌَّ .
e.g. ‫سا‬ ِ ‫زي ٌدٌّأَ َكل‬
ً ‫ٌّجال‬
َ َ َْ Zayd ate sitting.
Here, the ‫اؿ‬ ٌِّ َ‫ار‬
ٌّْ ٌّ‫ ٌّذُو‬is ‫ ٌُّى ٌَّو‬, which is the hidden dameer in ‫أٌَّ ٌَّك ٌَّل‬.
6. The ‫اؿ‬
ٌٌّ ‫ ٌَّح‬can be a sentence.
 If the ‫اؿ‬ ٌِّْ ِ‫جٌُّْلٌَّةٌٌٌّّا‬
ٌٌّ ‫ ٌَّح‬is a ٌ‫ديٌٌّّة‬ ٌّ , then a ‫( ٌَّو ٌٌّاو‬with or without a dameer) is added to give the
meaning of condition.
e.g. ‫ٌّسكٌّرى‬
ُ ‫َلٌّتَػ ْقَربُواٌّالصلٌّوةَ ٌَّوٌٌّّأَنْػتُ ْم‬ Don’t come near salaah while you are
intoxicated.

 ٌٌّ ‫ ٌَّح‬is a ٌ‫جٌُّْلٌَّةٌٌٌّّفِ ٌّْعٌّلِيٌٌّّة‬

If the ‫اؿ‬ ٌّ and the ‫ ٌّفِ ٌّْع ٌٌّل‬is ‫اضى‬
ٌِّ ‫اَلْ ٌِّف ٌّْع ٌُّلٌّاٌّلْ ٌَّم‬, ‫ قَ ٌّْد‬has to appear before theٌّ‫ٌّاَلْ ٌِّف ٌّْع ٌُّل‬
ٌِّ ‫اٌّلْ ٌَّم‬.
‫اضى‬
ِ
e.g. ُ‫ٌّخَر َجٌّ َخاد ٌُّمٌّو‬
َ ‫َجاءَ ٌَّزيْ ٌد ٌَّوٌّقَ ْد‬ Zayd came while his servant had left.

76
‫‪Sentence Analysis:‬‬

‫ٌّراكِبًا ‪1.‬‬
‫َجاءَ ٌَّزيْ ٌد َ‬ ‫‪Zayd came riding/while he was mounted.‬‬

‫راكابا‬ ‫زيْ ٌدَ‬ ‫جاءَ‬

‫اؿٌّ‬
‫ٌَّح ٌ‬ ‫ارَ ٌِّ‬
‫اؿ ‪+‬‬ ‫ٌّذُوٌّ ٌّْ‬

‫ٌّخ ََِبيٌّةٌ‬ ‫ِِ‬ ‫فَ ِ‬ ‫ٌّفِ ٌّْع ٌلٌّ‬

‫= جُْلَةٌٌّف ْعليةٌ َ‬ ‫اع ٌلٌّ‬ ‫‪+‬‬

‫ِجْئ ٌُّ‬
‫تٌّ َع ْمًراٌّنَائِ ًٌّما ‪2.‬‬ ‫‪I came to ‘Amr while he was asleep.‬‬

‫نائامَا‬ ‫ع ْمرا‬ ‫اج ْئتَ‬

‫اؿٌّ‬
‫ٌَّح ٌ‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫ارَ ِاؿٌّ‬
‫ٌّذُوٌّ ٌّْ‬

‫ٌّخ ََِبيٌّةٌ‬ ‫ِِ‬ ‫َم ْفعٌُّْوٌؿٌّبِِوٌّ‬ ‫ٌّفِ ٌّع ٌّلٌّ‪ٌّ+‬فَ ِ‬

‫= جُْلَةٌٌّف ْعليةٌ َ‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫اع ٌلٌّ‬ ‫ٌْ‬

‫سٌّ ‪3.‬‬ ‫تٌّبكْراٌّوٌّىو ِ‬ ‫ِ‬

‫ٌّجال ٌ‬
‫لَقْي ٌُّ َ ً َ ُ َ َ‬ ‫‪I met Bakr while he was sitting.‬‬

‫سَ‬ ‫ا‬ ‫ل اق ْيَتَ‬

‫جال ٌ‬ ‫ى َو‬ ‫وَ‬ ‫ب ْكرا‬
‫َخبَػٌٌّر‬ ‫ُمْبتَ َدٌّاٌ‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫ٌّحالِيٌَّةٌ‬
‫َو ٌاو َ‬

‫جٌُّْلَةٌٌّاِ ِْديٌّةٌٌّ َخ ََِبيٌّةٌ‬

‫اؿٌّ‬
‫ٌَّح ٌ‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫ارَ ِاؿٌّ‬
‫ٌّذُوٌّ ٌّْ‬

‫ٌّخ ََِبيٌّةٌ‬ ‫ِِ‬ ‫َم ْفعٌُّْوٌؿٌّبِِوٌّ‬ ‫(ٌّفِ ٌّع ٌّلٌّ‪ٌّ+‬فَ ِ‬

‫= جُْلَةٌٌّف ْعليةٌ َ‬ ‫ل) ‪+‬‬
‫اع ٌٌّ‬ ‫ٌْ‬

‫ٌّجالِ ًٌّ‬
‫سا ‪4.‬‬ ‫َزي ٌدٌّأَ َك َل َ‬ ‫‪Zayd ate while sitting.‬‬

‫جالاسَا‬ ‫أك َل‬ ‫زي ٌدَ‬

‫ٌّم ْستَتَػٌٌّرٌّ( ُى ٌَّو)‬ ‫فِي ِو ِ‬
‫ٌّضمْيػٌر ُ‬
‫ْ َ‬
‫|‬
‫اؿٌّ‬
‫ٌَّح ٌ‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫ارَ ِاؿٌّ‬
‫ٌّذُوٌّ ٌّْ‬

‫فَ ِ‬
‫اع ٌلٌّ‬ ‫ٌّفِ ٌّْع ٌٌّلٌّ(أَ َك ٌَّل)ٌّ‪+‬‬

‫= جُْلَةٌٌّاِ ِْديٌّةٌٌّ َخ ََِبيٌّةٌ‬ ‫َخبَػٌرٌٌٌٌٌٌٌٌٌّّّّّّّّّ‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫ُمْبتَ َدٌّاٌ‬

‫‪77‬‬
 ‫‪EXERCISE‬‬

‫اؿ ‪1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and point out the‬‬ ‫ارَ ٌِّ‬
‫اؿ ‪ٌَّ and‬ح ٌٌّ‬ ‫‪ٌّ in the following sentences.‬ذُوٌّ ٌّْ‬
‫‪i.‬‬ ‫أحبٌّالتلميذٌّصتهدا‬ ‫‪iv.‬‬ ‫لٌّتأكلواٌّالطعاـٌّحارا‬
‫لقيتٌّزيداٌّراكبي ‪ii.‬‬ ‫نصرتٌّزيداٌّمشدودا ‪v.‬‬
‫لٌّتأكلواٌّالفاكهةٌّوٌّىيٌّفجة ‪iii.‬‬ ‫غابٌّأخوؾٌّوٌّقدٌّحضرٌّجيعٌّالصدقاء ‪vi.‬‬

‫‪78‬‬
Section 3.8.6
‫ الت ا‬/ َ‫َّمياَْي ز‬
َ‫َّم ْي ز‬ َْ ‫الت‬

ٌِّ َ‫ٌّاِ ٌّْس ٌٌّمٌٌّّن‬, which removes the ambiguity or vagueness created by the previous
Definition: It is an ٌ‫كٌَّرٌّة‬
noun. This ambiguity may be in distance, weight, measure, number, etc.
e.g. ‫شٌَّرٌّ َك ْوَكبًا‬
َ ‫ٌّع‬
َ ‫تٌٌّّأَ َح َد‬
ٌُّ ْ‫َرأَي‬ I saw eleven stars.
Here, the word (‫ ) َك ْوَكبًا‬has clarified what (‫شٌَّر‬
َ ‫ )أٌَّ َح ٌَّدٌّ َع‬refers to.
Sentence Analysis:

‫ك ْوكبا‬ َ‫أَحدَعشر‬ َ‫رأيْت‬

‫ٌَّتِْيٌّػٌٌّز‬ + ٌّ‫ٌّمَُيػٌٌّز‬

ٌ‫ٌّخ ََِبيٌّة‬ ِِ ٌّ‫َم ْفعٌُّْوٌؿٌّبِِو‬ ِ َ‫ٌّف‬+ٌّ‫ٌّفِ ٌّع ٌّل‬

َ ٌ‫= جُْلَةٌٌّف ْعلية‬ + ٌّ‫اع ٌل‬ ٌْ
Notes:
 The ambiguous noun is called ‫ ٌّمَُيػٌٌٌّّز‬and the noun which clarifies it is called ‫ ٌَّتِْيٌّػٌٌّز‬or
ٌّ‫ ٌّتٌَّْيِْيٌّػٌز‬.
 The ‫ ٌَّتِْيٌّػٌٌّز‬is mansoob and gets two fathahs.
 Sometimes, the ‫ ٌَّتِْيٌّػٌٌّز‬is not mentioned in words but is understood from the
meaning of the sentence )‫ظ‬ ٌٌّ ‫( َم ْل ُح ْو‬.
e.g. ‫َح ُس َنٌّاٌّلْ َولَ ٌُّدٌٌّّ َك ََل ًما‬ The boy is good in terms of (his) speech.
 If the ‫ ٌّمَُيػٌٌٌّّز‬is a number, the rules with regards to the usage of numerals (on the
next page) must be kept in mind.

EXERCISE

1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and point out the ‫ ٌّمَُيػٌٌٌّّز‬and ‫ ٌَّتِْيٌّػٌٌّز‬in the following sentences.

i. ‫ىفٌّارقلٌّعشروفٌّبقرة‬
ii. ‫بعتوٌّذراعاٌّحريرا‬
iii. ‫الفيلٌّأكَبٌّمنٌّاذملٌّجسما‬
iv. ‫طابٌّاسكافٌّىواء‬
v. ‫لٌّأملكٌّش ٌَّباٌّأرضا‬
vi. ‫شربتٌّرطَلٌّلبنا‬

79
 َ‫َسَمَاءََالَْعَد ا‬
Rules for ‫َد‬ ْ ‫( أ‬Numerals)
Before we proceed, it should be pointed out that
‫( َع َد ٌٌّد‬number) is the mumayyaz, and
ٌّ‫( َم ْع ُد ٌّْوٌد‬the counted noun) is the tameez.

One and two (1-2)

 The ‫ َع َد ٌٌّد‬and the ‫ َم ْع ُد ٌّْوٌٌّد‬must correspond in all aspects.
e.g. ٌِّ ‫ٌّو‬
ٌّ‫اح ٌد‬ ٌَّ ‫ٌَّوٌّلَ ٌد‬ one boy
ٌِّ ‫ٌّو‬
ٌ‫اح ٌَّدٌّة‬ ٌَّ ‫ت‬ٌ ‫ٌّبٌِّْن‬ one girl
 The ‫ َم ْع ُد ٌّْوٌٌّد‬will appear first and the ‫ َع َد ٌٌّد‬will appear second.
ٌٌّ ‫ ٌَّر ٌُّج‬or ‫ٌَّر ٌُّج ََلٌّ ٌِّف‬.
Note: Normally, for one or two men etc., one would simply say ‫ل‬
However, at times, the number is used for emphasis.

Three Through Ten (3-10)

 The ‫ َع َد ٌٌّد‬and the ‫ َم ْع ُد ٌّْوٌٌّد‬must be of opposite gender.
e.g. ٌّ‫َلٍـ‬
ٌَّ ْ‫َلٌّثٌَّةٌٌُّّأٌَّق‬
ٌََّ‫ٌّث‬ eight pens
ٌٍّ ‫سٌّ ٌَّسيٌّ ٌَّار‬
‫ات‬ ٌُّ َْ‫خ‬
ٌّ five cars
Note: In choosing the correct ‫ َع َد ٌٌّد‬gender, the singular form of the ‫ َم ْع ُد ٌّْوٌٌّد‬will be taken
into account.
ٌٍّ ٌّ‫ٌّوٌٌَّّثَ ٌّانٌِّيَةٌٌَّّأَي‬
e.g. ‫اـ‬ ٌَّ ‫ٌَّسٌّْب َعٌٌّّلٌَّيَ ٍاؿ‬ seven nights and eight days
ٌٍّ َ‫ ٌّلٌَّي‬is feminine, and ٌّ‫( يػٌَّْوٌـ‬day) of ‫ ٌّأَيٌّ ٌٍّاـ‬is
Here, the singular ٌ‫( ٌّلَْيٌّػٌّلٌَّة‬night) of ‫اؿ‬
masculine.
 From three onwards, the ‫ َع َد ٌٌّد‬will appear first and the ‫ َم ْع ُد ٌّْوٌٌّد‬second.
 The ‫ َم ْع ُد ٌّْوٌٌّد‬will be ‫صٌُّرٌّْوٌٌّر‬
ٌَّْ ٌّ‫جَْ ٌٌّع‬
ٌّ .

Eleven and Twelve (11-12)

 The ‫ َع َد ٌٌّد‬and the ‫ َم ْع ُد ٌّْوٌٌّد‬must agree in all aspects.
e.g. ‫شٌَّرٌٌّّ َكٌّْوٌَّكٌّبًا‬ ٌَّ ‫ ٌّأَ ٌَّح ٌَّدٌّ ٌَّع‬eleven stars
‫شٌَّرٌَّةٌٌّّبٌِّْنٌّتًا‬ ٌَّ َ‫ ٌّاِثٌّْػٌّنٌَّت‬twelve girls
ٌّْ ‫اٌّع‬
 From eleven onwards till 99, the ‫ َم ْع ُد ٌّْوٌٌّد‬will be ‫ب‬
ٌٌّ ‫ص ٌّْو‬ ٌِّ ‫ٌَّو‬.
ٌُّ ‫اح ٌٌّدٌّ ٌَّمٌّْن‬

80
Thirteen Through Nineteen (13-19)
 The gender of the first part of the ‫ َع َد ٌٌّد‬should be opposite of the gender of the ‫ َم ْع ُد ٌّْوٌٌّد‬.
e.g. ٌّ‫شٌَّرٌٌَّّر ٌُّج ًَل‬ ٌَّ ‫ ٌّأٌَّْربٌّػَ ٌَّع ٌّةٌَّ ٌَّع‬fourteen men
‫شٌَّرٌَّةٌٌّّبٌِّْنٌّتًا‬
ٌّْ ‫س ٌَّعٌّ ٌَّع‬ٌّْ ِ‫ ٌّت‬nineteen girls
 The ‫ َم ْع ُد ٌّْوٌٌّد‬will be ‫ب‬ ٌٌّ ‫صٌّْو‬ ٌِّ ‫ٌَّو‬.
ٌُّ ‫اح ٌٌّدٌّ ٌَّمٌّْن‬
 The “ten” ‫( عشر‬masc.)/‫( عشرة‬fem.) will agree with the ‫ َم ْع ُد ٌّْوٌٌّد‬in terms of gender.
Note: The ‫ ش‬of ‫عشر‬/‫ عشرة‬will get a fathah when used with a masculine and a sukoon
when used with a feminine.

Twenty Till Ninety (20, 30, 40,…,90)

ٌّْ ‫ ٌِّع‬to ‫س ٌُّع ٌّْو ٌَّف‬
 The gender of ‫شٌُّرٌّْو ٌَّف‬ ٌّْ ِ‫( ٌّت‬20,30,40,…90) will remain the same, irrespective of
whether the ‫ َم ْع ُد ٌّْوٌٌّد‬is masculine or feminine.
e.g. ٌّ‫شٌُّرٌّْو ٌَّفٌٌَّّر ٌُّج ًَل‬ ٌّْ ‫ٌِّع‬ twenty men
‫َلثٌّػٌُّْو ٌَّفٌٌّّبِنٌٌّّْتًا‬
ٌََّ‫ٌّث‬ thirty girls
 The ‫ َم ْع ُد ٌّْوٌٌّد‬will be ‫ب‬ ٌٌّ ‫صٌّْو‬ ٌِّ ‫ٌَّو‬.
ٌُّ ‫اح ٌٌّدٌّ ٌَّمٌّْن‬

Twenty-one and Twenty-two (21-22)

 The first part of the ‫ َع َد ٌٌّد‬and the ‫ َم ْع ُد ٌّْوٌٌّد‬must agree in all aspects.
e.g. ٌّ‫شٌُّرٌّْو ٌَّفٌٌَّّر ٌُّج ًَل‬ ٌّْ ‫اح ٌٌّدٌّ ٌَّوٌّ ٌِّع‬ ٌِّ ‫ٌَّو‬ twenty-one men
ٌّْ ‫اح ٌَّدٌّةٌٌّ ٌَّوٌّ ٌِّع‬
‫شٌُّرٌّْو ٌَّفٌٌّّبٌِّْنٌّتًا‬ ٌِّ ‫ٌَّو‬ twenty-one girls
 The ‫ َم ْع ُد ٌّْوٌٌّد‬will be ‫ب‬ ٌٌّ ‫صٌّْو‬ ٌِّ ‫ٌَّو‬.
ٌُّ ‫اح ٌٌّدٌّ ٌَّمٌّْن‬

Twenty-three Through Twenty-nine (23-29)

 The gender of the first part of the ‫ َع َد ٌٌّد‬should be opposite of the gender of the ‫ َم ْع ُد ٌّْوٌٌّد‬.
e.g. ٌّ‫شٌُّرٌّْو ٌَّفٌٌَّّر ٌُّج ًَل‬ ٌّْ ‫ٌّأٌَّْربٌّػَ ٌَّع ٌّةٌٌّ ٌَّوٌّ ٌِّع‬ twenty-four men
ٌّْ ‫ٌِّستٌٌّّ ٌَّوٌّ ٌِّع‬
‫شٌُّرٌّْو ٌَّفٌٌّّبِنٌٌّّْتًا‬ twenty-six girls
 The ‫ َم ْع ُد ٌّْوٌٌّد‬will be ‫ب‬ ٌٌّ ‫صٌّْو‬ ٌِّ ‫ٌَّو‬.
ٌُّ ‫اح ٌٌّدٌّ ٌَّمٌّْن‬
 The same will apply to 33-39, 43-49…93-99.
 The “tens” will remain the same, irrespective of whether the ‫ود‬
ٌٌّ ‫ َم ْع ُد‬is masculine or
feminine.

81
Hundred (100)
 ٌ‫ ٌِّم ٌّائٌَّة‬will remain the same, irrespective of whether the ‫ َم ْع ُد ٌّْوٌٌّد‬is masculine or feminine.
e.g. ‫ل‬ ٌٍّ ‫ٌِّم ٌّائٌَّةٌٌَُّّر ٌُّج‬ hundred men
ٌٍّ ‫ٌِّم ٌّائٌَّةٌٌُّّبٌِّْن‬
‫ت‬ hundred girls
 For 200, ‫ ٌِّمائٌَّػٌّتَا‬will be used. (‫ت‬ ٌَّ ‫ ٌِّمائٌَّػ‬in ٌّ‫اذَر‬ ٌِّ ‫ص‬
ٌّْ ٌّ‫بٌّ ٌَّو‬ ٌّْ ٌّ‫) ٌَّحاٌّلٌَّةٌُّالن‬
e.g. ‫ت‬ ٌٍّ ‫ٌِّمائٌَّػٌّتَاٌٌّّبٌِّْن‬ two hundred girls
ٌٍّ ‫تٌٌّّبٌِّْن‬
‫ت‬ ٌَّ ‫ٌِّمائٌَّػ‬ two hundred girls
 The ‫ َم ْع ُد ٌّْوٌٌّد‬will be ‫صٌُّرٌّْوٌٌّر‬ ٌِّ ‫ٌَّو‬.
ٌَّْ ٌّ‫اح ٌٌّد‬
 Since ٌ‫ ٌِّم ٌّائٌَّة‬is feminine, the number before ٌ‫ ٌِّم ٌّائٌَّة‬will be masculine.
e.g. ‫ل‬ ٌٍّ ‫ ٌّأٌَّْربٌّػَ ٌُّع ٌِّم ٌّائٌَِّةٌٌَّّر ٌُّج‬four hundred men
ٍ‫ ٌّأٌَّربٌّػ ٌّع ٌِّم ٌّائٌَِّةٌٌّّاٌِّمٌّرٌّأٌَّة‬four hundred women
َْ ُ َْ
 If there are units with the 100’s as well, the same gender rule will apply as above till 99.
e.g. ‫ب‬ ٌّْ ‫ٌِّم ٌّائٌَّةٌٌّ ٌَّوٌّ ٌَّع‬
ٌٍّ ُ‫شٌَّرةٌٌُّّ ٌُّكٌّت‬ hundred and ten books
ً‫اسٌّة‬
ٌَّ ‫سٌّ ٌَّوٌٌّّأٌَّْربٌّػَ ٌُّع ٌّْو ٌَّفٌٌّّ ٌُّكٌّر‬ ٌّ ٌّ‫ٌِّم ٌّائٌَّةٌٌّ ٌَّو‬
ٌٌّ َْ‫خ‬ hundred and forty-five note-books

Thousand (1,000)
 ‫ف‬ ٌٌّ ْ‫ ٌّأٌَّل‬will remain the same, irrespective of whether the ‫ َم ْع ُد ٌّْوٌٌّد‬is masculine or feminine.
e.g. ٌّ‫فٌٌَّّر ٌُّج ٍل‬ ٌُّ ْ‫ٌّأٌَّل‬ thousand men
ٌٍّ ‫فٌٌّّبٌِّْن‬
‫ت‬ ٌُّ ْ‫ٌّأٌَّل‬ thousand girls
 The ‫ َم ْع ُد ٌّْوٌٌّد‬will be ‫صٌُّرٌّْوٌٌّر‬ ٌِّ ‫ٌَّو‬.
ٌَّْ ٌّ‫اح ٌٌّد‬
 Since ‫ف‬ ٌٌّ ْ‫ ٌّأٌَّل‬is masculine, the number before ‫ف‬ ٌٌّ ْ‫ أٌٌَّّل‬will be feminine.
e.g. ‫ل‬ ٌٍّ ‫ؼٌٌَّّر ٌُّج‬ ٌِّ ‫ٌّأٌَّْربٌّػَ ٌَّع ٌّةٌُّاٌٌَّّل‬ four thousand men
ٍ‫ؼٌٌّّاٌِّمٌّرٌّأٌَّة‬ ِ
َ ْ ٌّ ‫ٌّأٌَّْربٌّػَ ٌَّع ٌّةٌُّاٌٌَّّل‬ four thousand women

Million (1,000,000)
 ٌّ‫ ِم ْليُػ ْو ٌف‬will remain the same, irrespective of whether the ‫ ٌَّم ْع ُدٌّْوٌٌّد‬is masculine or feminine.
e.g. ‫ل‬ ٌٍّ ‫ٌِّمٌّْليٌُّػٌّْو ٌُّفٌٌَّّر ٌُّج‬ million men
ٌٍّ ‫ٌِّمٌّْليٌُّػٌّْو ٌُّفٌٌّّبٌِّْن‬
‫ت‬ million girls
 The ‫ َم ْع ُد ٌّْوٌٌّد‬will be ‫ور‬ ٌِّ ‫ٌَّو‬.
ٌٌّ ‫اح ٌٌّدٌّ ٌَّْصٌُّر‬
 Since ‫ ِم ْليُػ ْو ٌٌّف‬is masculine, the number before ‫ ِم ْليُػ ْو ٌٌّف‬will be feminine.
e.g. ‫ل‬ ٌٍّ ‫يٌٌَّّر ٌُّج‬ ٌَّ ْ ِ‫َلٌّي‬
ٌَّ ‫ٌّأٌَّْربٌّػَ ٌَّع ٌّةٌُّ ٌَّم‬ four million men
ٍ‫يٌٌّّاٌِّمٌّرٌّأٌَّة‬ ِ ٌَّ ‫ٌّأٌَّربٌّػ ٌّع ٌّةٌُّ ٌّم‬
َ ْ ٌَّ ْ ‫َلٌّي‬ َ َ َْ four million women

82
 EXERCISE
1. Write the following in Arabic.
i. 2 schools vii. 11 books
ii. 12 women viii. 14 chairs
iii. 17 doors ix. 26 boys
iv. 21 cars x. 111 elephants
v. 150 houses xi. 195 keys
vi. 444 miles xii. 3333 roses

83
Section 3.8.7
‫الْم ْستثْ نٰى‬

ِ ِ
ٌ‫ ا ْستثْػنَ ٌّاء‬means to exclude.
ٌّ‫ ُم ْستَثْػن‬is that noun, which has been excluded and appears after the ‫ال ٌّْسٌّتِثٌّْػٌّنَ ٌِّاء‬
ٌِّْ ٌّ‫ؼ‬
ٌُّ ‫ ٌَّحٌّْر‬.
ِ ِ ِ ٌِّْ ٌّ‫ؼ‬
ُ‫ ُم ْستَثْػنٌّمْنٌّو‬is that noun from which the ٌّ‫ ُم ْستَثْػن‬has been excluded. It appears before ‫ال ٌّْسٌّتثٌّْػٌّنَ ٌّاء‬ ٌُّ ‫ ٌَّحٌّْر‬.
‫ال ٌّْسٌّتِثٌّْػٌّنَ ٌِّاء‬
ٌِّْ ٌّ‫ؼ‬ُ ‫ ُحُرْو‬are as follows:
‫اٌّع َدا‬
َ ‫َم‬ ٌَّ ‫اٌّخ‬
‫َل‬ َ ‫َم‬ ‫َع َدا‬ ٌَّ ‫َخ‬
‫َل‬ ‫اشا‬ َ ‫َح‬ ‫ِسوى‬ ‫َغْيػٌَّر‬ ٌّ‫ٌّإِل‬
e.g. ‫اءٌَّالْ َق ْوٌُّـٌٌّّإِلٌٌّّ َزيْ ًدا‬
ٌّ ‫َج‬ The people came except Zayd.
‫زيْدا‬ ََّ‫إا‬
‫َل‬ َ‫الْق ْوم‬ َ‫جاء‬
ٌّ‫ ُم ْستَثْػن‬+ ‫ال ٌّْسٌّتِثٌّْػٌّنَ ٌِّاء‬ ٌُّ ‫ ٌَّحٌّْر‬+ ُ‫ُم ْستَثْػن ٌِّمْنٌّو‬
ٌِّْ ٌّ‫ؼ‬

ٌ‫ٌّخ ٌََِّبيٌّة‬ ِِ ِ َ‫ف‬ ٌّ‫فِ ْع ٌل‬

َ ٌ‫= جُْلَةٌٌّف ْعلية‬ ٌّ‫اع ٌل‬ +

Related Terminology
ِ ‫ اَلْمستَثْػنٌّاَلْمت‬refers to the case when the ٌّ‫ مستَثْػن‬was included in the ‫ مستَثٌّْػن ٌِّمْنٌّو‬before the ‫اِستِثْػنَ ٌّاء‬.
ٌّ‫ص ُل‬ ُ ُْ ُْ ُ ُْ ٌ ْ
ِ
e.g. ‫جاءٌَّالْ َق ْوُـٌّإلٌٌّّ َزيْ ًدا‬
َ The people came except Zayd.
(Zayd was one of the people before the exclusion.)

ٌّ‫ اَلْ ُم ْستَثْػنٌّاَلْ ُمْنػ َق ِط ُع‬refers to the case when the ٌّ‫ ُم ْستَثْػن‬was not included in the ُ‫ ُم ْستَثٌّْػن ٌِّمنٌّْو‬before the
ِ ِ
ٌ‫ا ْستثْػنَ ٌّاء‬.
e.g. ‫يس‬ ٌَّ ِ‫ َس َج َدٌّالْ َملٌّئِ َكةٌُّإِلٌّإِبْل‬The angels prostrated except Iblees.
(Iblees was never one of the angels.)

‫َجاءٌَّالْ َق ْوُـٌّإِلٌٌّّ ِحَ ًارا‬ The people came except the donkey.
(Donkey was never included among the people.)

ٌّ‫ اَلْ ُم ْستَثْػنٌّاَلْ ُم َفر‬refers to that sentence in which the ُ‫ ُم ْستَثْػن ٌِّمْنٌّو‬is not mentioned.
ُ‫غ‬
e.g. ‫اٌّجاءٌَّإِلٌٌّّ َزيْ ٌٌّد‬
َ ‫ َم‬No one came except Zayd.
ٌّ‫ اَلْ ُم ْستَثْػنٌّاَلْغَْيػُرٌّالْ ُم َفرِغ‬refers to that sentence in which the ُ‫ ُم ْسٌّتَثْػن ٌِّمْنٌّو‬is mentioned.
e.g. ‫جاءٌَّالْ َق ْوُـٌّإِلٌٌّّ َزيْ ًدا‬
َ The people came except Zayd.

84
ٌّ‫ب‬
ُ ‫( اَلْ َك ََل ُـ ٌّالْ ُم ْو ٌَّج‬positive statement) refers to that sentence, which does not have a ‫نػَ ْف ٌٌّي‬, ‫ نٌّػَ ٌّْه ٌٌّي‬or
‫ٌّاِ ٌّْسٌّتِ ٌّْف ٌَّه ٌٌّاـ‬.
e.g. ‫جاءٌَّالْ َق ْوُـٌّإِلٌٌّّ َزيْ ًدا‬
َ The people came except Zayd.

ٌّ‫ب‬ ِ ‫( اَلْ َك ََل ُـ ٌّالْغَْيػر ٌّالْمو ٌَّج‬negative sentence) refers to that sentence, which does have a ٌّ‫نػَ ْفي‬, ‫ نٌّػَ ٌّْه ٌّي‬or
ُْ ُ ٌ ٌ
ِ ِ
‫ٌّا ٌّْسٌّت ٌّْف ٌَّه ٌٌّاـ‬.
e.g. ‫جاءٌَّالْ َق ْوُـٌّإِلٌٌّّ َزيْ ًدا‬
َ ٌّ‫َما‬ The people did not come except Zayd.

The i‘raab of the ٌّ‫ستَثْػن‬

ْ ‫ ٌُّم‬will be as given below:

Table 3.8
‫إا ْعرابَالْم ْستثَْٰني‬

َ‫ال َْسَتاثَْنَ ااء‬

َ‫حرْوفَ ْا‬ Sentence Type ‫إا ْعرابَالْم ْستثَْٰني‬ Example
1. ٌّ‫إِل‬ ٌّ‫ب‬ ٌِّ ٌّ‫ٌُّمت‬
ٌ ‫ص ٌٌّلٌّ–ٌّ ٌُّمٌّْو ٌَّج‬ ٌّ‫ب‬
ٌ ‫ص ٌّْو‬
ٌُّ ‫ٌَّمٌّْن‬ ‫نٌّاٌّلْ ٌَّق ٌّْوٌُّـٌٌّّإِلٌّ ٌٌَّّزٌّيْ ًدا‬
ٌّ َِ‫اء‬
ٌّ ‫ٌَّج‬
The people came to
me except zayd.
2. ٌّ‫إِل‬ ٌّ‫ٌُّمْنٌّػ ٌَّق ٌِّط ٌع‬ ٌّ‫ب‬ ِِ ِ ِ
ٌ ‫ص ٌّْو‬
ٌُّ ‫ٌَّمٌّْن‬ ٌّ‫يس‬
َ ‫َس َج َدٌّالْ َملٌّئ َكةٌُّإلٌّإبْل‬
The angels prostrated
except Iblees.
3. ٌّ‫إِل‬ ٍ ‫غٌّ–ٌّ ٌَّغْيٌّػ ٌّرٌّ ٌُّمٌّو ٌَّج‬
ٌّ‫ب‬ ٌٍّ‫ٌَّغْيٌّػٌُّرٌّ ٌُّم َفٌّر‬ ٌّ‫ب‬ ‫نٌّأٌَّ ٌَّح ٌدٌٌّّإِلٌّ ٌٌَّّزٌّيْ ًدا‬ ٌّ َِ‫اٌّج ٌّاء‬
ْ ُ ٌ ‫ص ٌّْو‬
ٌُّ ‫ – ٌَّمٌّْن‬or – ٌَّ ‫ٌَّم‬
same as ُ‫ٌّمْن ٌّو‬ ِ ‫مستثْػن‬ ‫نٌّأٌَّ ٌَّح ٌدٌٌّّإِلٌّ ٌٌَّّزٌّيْ ٌٌّد‬
ٌّ َِ‫اٌّج ٌّاء‬
ٌَّ ‫ٌَّم‬
َْ ُ
No one came to me
except Zayd.
ٌّ ِ‫إ‬
4. ‫ل‬ ٍ ‫ٌُّم َفٌّرغٌٌٌّّ–ٌّ ٌَّغْيٌّػ ٌّرٌّ ٌُّمٌّو ٌَّج‬
ٌّ‫ب‬ ْ ُ according to ‫ل‬ ٌِّ ‫( ٌَّع‬as if
ٌٌّ ‫ام‬ ٌّ‫اٌّج ٌّاءٌٌَّّإِلٌّ ٌٌَّّزٌّيْ ٌد‬
ٌَّ ‫ٌَّم‬
‫ إِ ٌّل‬does not exist) No one came except
Zayd.
‫تٌٌّّإِلٌّ ٌٌَّّزٌّيْ ًدا‬
ٌُّ ْ‫اٌّرأٌٌَّّي‬
ٌَّ ‫ٌَّم‬
I did not see anyone
except Zayd.
ٌّ‫تٌٌّّإِلٌٌٌّّّبٌَِّزٌّيْ ٍد‬
ٌُّ ‫اٌّمٌَّرٌّْر‬
ٌَّ ‫ٌَّم‬
I did not pass by
anyone except Zayd.
5. ‫اٌّع ٌَّدا‬
ٌَّ ‫َلٌّ–ٌّ ٌَّم‬
ٌَّ ‫اٌّخ‬
ٌَّ ‫ٌَّم‬ ٌّ‫ب‬
All types
ٌ ‫ص ٌّْو‬
ٌُّ ‫ٌَّمٌّْن‬ ‫َل ٌٌَّّزٌّيْ ًدا‬
ٌَّ ‫اٌّخ‬
ٌَّ ‫اءٌَّاٌّلْ ٌَّق ٌّْوٌُّـٌّ ٌَّم‬
ٌّ ‫ٌَّج‬
‫اٌّزٌّيْ ًدا‬
ٌَّ ‫اٌّع ٌَّد‬
ٌَّ ‫اءٌَّاٌّلْ ٌَّق ٌّْوٌُّـٌّ ٌَّم‬
ٌّ ‫ٌَّج‬
The people came
except Zayd.

85
 Table 3.8 – Continued

َ‫ال َْسَتاثَْنَ ااء‬

َ‫حرْوفَ ْا‬ Sentence Type ‫إا ْعرابَالْم ْستثَْٰني‬ Example
6. ‫اشا‬
ٌَّ ‫َلٌّ–ٌّ ٌَّع ٌَّداٌّ–ٌّ ٌَّح‬
ٌَّ ‫ٌَّخ‬ ٌّ‫ب‬
All types
ٌ ‫ص ٌّْو‬ ٌُّ ‫ – ٌَّمٌّْن‬or – ٌّ‫اشا‬ ٌَّ ‫ ٌَّح‬/‫ ٌَّعدا‬/‫َل‬ٌَّ ‫اءٌَّاٌّلْ ٌَّق ٌّْوٌُّـٌّ ٌَّخ‬
ٌّ ‫ٌَّج‬
‫( ٌَّْصٌُّرٌّْوٌٌّر‬as a preposition) ‫ٌَّزٌّيْ ًدا‬
‫اٌّزٌّيْ ٌٍّد‬
ٌَّ ‫اش‬
ٌَّ ‫ ٌَّح‬/‫ ٌَّعدا‬/‫َل‬ٌَّ ‫اءٌَّاٌّلْ ٌَّق ٌّْوٌُّـٌّ ٌَّخ‬
ٌّ ‫ٌَّج‬
The people came
except Zayd.
ٌِّ ٌّ–ٌّ‫ٌَّغ ٌّْْي‬
7. ‫سٌّوى‬ All types ٌّ‫ٌَّْصٌُّرٌّْوٌر‬ ٌّ‫اءٌَّاٌّلْ ٌَّق ٌّْوٌُّـٌّ ٌَّغْيٌّػٌَّرٌٌَّّزٌّيْ ٍد‬
ٌّ ‫ٌَّج‬
‫ىٌّزٌّيْ ٌٍّد‬ ِ
ٌَّ ‫اءٌَّاٌّلْ ٌَّق ٌّْوٌُّـٌّ ٌّسٌَّو‬ ٌّ ‫ٌَّج‬
The people came
except Zayd.

Note: The i‘raab of the word ‫ْي‬ ٌّْ ‫ ٌَّغ‬is the same as that of ٌّ‫ ُم ْستَثْػنٌّ ٌّب ٌّإِل‬. Thus, the simple way to
determine the i‘raab of ghayr is to replace ghayr with illaa. Now, whatever i‘raab mustathnaa
gets, should be given to ghayr.
For example, we have two sentences, 1) ‫ٌّزٌّيْ ٌٍّد‬ ٌّ ‫ ٌَّج‬and 2) ‫اٌّج ٌّاءٌَّ ٌَّغ ٌّْْي ٌٌَّّزٌّيْ ٌٍّد‬
ٌَّ ‫اءٌَّاٌّلْ ٌَّق ٌّْوٌُّـٌّ ٌَّغ ٌّْْي‬ ٌَّ ‫ ٌَّم‬.
To determine the i‘raab of ghayr, follow the following two steps for each of these
sentences.
a. Replace ‫ غْي‬with ٌّ‫ إِل‬and see what the i‘raab of the mustathnaa would be.

ٌَّ ٌّ‫اءٌَّاٌّلْ ٌَّق ٌّْوٌُّـٌٌّّإِل‬

1) ‫ٌّزٌّيْ ًدا‬ ٌّ ‫ٌَّج‬ ٌَّ ٌّ‫اٌّج ٌّاءٌٌَّّإِل‬
2) ‫ٌّزٌّيْ ٌٌّد‬ ٌَّ ‫ٌَّم‬
The first sentence is moojab and ghayr mufarragh, so the mustathnaa will be
mansoob. The second sentence is ghayr moojab and mufarragh, so the
mustathnaa is according to the ‘aamil. Thus, it is marfoo‘.

b. The i‘raab of the mustathnaa (with ٌّ‫ )إِل‬will be given to ghayr.

1) ‫اءٌَّاٌّلْ ٌَّق ٌّْوٌُّـٌّ ٌَّغْيٌّػٌَّرٌٌَّّزيٌّْ ٌٍّد‬
ٌّ ‫ٌَّج‬ 2) ‫اءٌَّ ٌَّغْيٌّػ ٌُّرٌٌَّّزيٌّْ ٌٍّد‬
ٌّ ‫اٌّج‬
ٌَّ ‫ٌَّم‬

EXERCISE
1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and explain the i‘raab of theٌّmustathnaa.

i. ‫رأيتٌّاذنودٌّإلٌّالقائد‬ v. ‫دخلتٌّغرؼٌّالبيتٌّخَلٌّغرفةٌّالنوـ‬
ii. ‫صاـٌّالغَلـٌّرمضافٌّغْيٌّيوـ‬ vi. ‫ماٌّعادٌّاسريضٌّعائدٌّغْيٌّالطبيب‬
iii. ‫زرتٌّمساجدٌّاسدينةٌّماٌّخَلٌّواحدا‬ vii. ‫قرأتٌّالكتابٌّإلٌّصفحتي‬
iv. ‫جاءٌّالقوـٌّإلٌّحارا‬ viii. ‫ماٌّجاءٌّإلٌّمعلم‬

86
Section 3.9
َ‫ج َرَْوَرات‬
َْ َ‫ – اَلْم‬Words Which Are Always Majroor
There are two types of words that are always majroor. These are as follows:
1. Noun preceded by a ٌّ‫جر‬
ٌَّ ٌّ‫ؼ‬
ٌُّ ‫ ٌَّحٌّْر‬.
e.g. ِ َ‫فٌّاٌّلْ ٌّكٌِّت‬
ٌّ‫اب‬ ٌّ ِ in the book
2. ‫اؼٌٌّّإٌِّلَْيٌّ ٌِّو‬
ٌٌّ ‫ض‬
ٌَّ ‫ٌُّم‬
e.g. ٌّ‫ابٌٌَّّزٌّيْ ٍد‬
ٌُّ َ‫ٌّكٌِّت‬ book of Zayd.

87
Section 3.10
‫اَلتََّ َواَبا َع‬

Definition: A ‫ تَابِ ٌٌّع‬is that noun, which follows the noun before it. The preceding noun is called
the ٌ‫ع‬
ٌّ ‫ َمْتبُػ ْو‬.
ٌّ ‫ َمْتبُػ ْو‬also governs the ‫تَابِ ٌٌّع‬.
 The ‘aamil which governs the ٌ‫ع‬
 There are five ‫تَػ َوابِ ٌُّع‬:
1) ُ‫اَلص َف ٌّة‬/‫ت‬
ٌُّ ‫اَلنػ ْع‬ 2) ‫اَلتػ ْوكِْي ٌُّد‬/‫اَلتٌٌّّأْكِْي ٌُّد‬ 3) ‫ؿ‬
ٌُّ ‫اَلْبَ َد‬
ٌِّ ‫فٌّالن َس‬
4) ‫ق‬ ٌٍّ ‫ف ٌِِّبَْر‬
ُ ْ‫ َعط‬/‫ؼ‬ ُ ْ‫اَلْ َعط‬ ٌِّ َ‫فٌّالْبَػي‬
5) ‫اف‬ ُ ْ‫َعط‬
Section 3.10.1
َ‫لصفة‬
ِّ ‫َّعتََأ َْوََا‬
ْ ‫ – الن‬Adjective
ٌُّ ‫ اَلنػ ْع‬is of two types: 1) ٌّ‫تٌّ َح ِقْي ٌِّقي‬
ُ‫اَلص َفٌّة‬/‫ت‬ ٌٌّ ‫ٌٌٌّّّ نٌّػَ ٌّْع‬2) ‫يب‬ٌّ َِ‫تٌّ َسب‬
ٌٌّ ‫نٌّػَ ٌّْع‬
1. ٌّ‫ح ِقْي ٌِّقي‬
َ ٌّ‫ت‬ ٌٌّ ‫نٌّػَ ٌّْع‬: It is that word, which describes the actual ٌ‫ع‬ ٌّ ‫ ٌَّمتْبُػ ْو‬.
 As mentioned in section 1.3.3, the ٌ‫ص ٌَّف ٌّة‬ ٌِّ follows the ‫ؼ‬ ٌٌّ ‫ص ٌّْو‬
ٌُّ ‫ ٌَّمٌّْو‬, which is the ٌ‫ع‬
ٌّ ‫ ٌَّمْتبُػ ْو‬in this
case, in the following:
a. I‘raab
b. Gender
c. Being ma‘rifah or nakirah
d. Being singular, dual or plural
 ٌِّ can be a complete sentence, in which case the ‫ؼ‬
The ٌ‫ص ٌَّف ٌّة‬ ٌٌّ ‫ص ٌّْو‬
ٌُّ ‫ ٌَّم ٌّْو‬must be ‫نكرة‬.
 ٌِّ , which is a sentence must have a ‫ض ٌِّمْيٌّػٌٌّر‬
The ٌ‫ص ٌَّف ٌّة‬ ٌَّ which refers to the nakirah mawsoof.
e.g. َ‫اج ٌّة‬
َ ‫بٌّالدر‬ ِ
ُ ‫نٌّ َولَ ٌدٌّيػَْرَك‬
ْ َ‫َجاء‬ A boy who was riding bicycle came to me.

َ‫َّراجة‬
َّ ‫الد‬ َ‫ي ْركب‬ َ‫ول ٌد‬ َ‫نا ْي‬ َ‫جاء‬
ٌّ‫َم ْفعُ ْوٌؿ‬ + )‫لٌّ( ٌُّى ٌَّو‬ ٌِّ َ‫ٌٌّّف‬+ٌّ‫ٌّفِ ٌّْع ٌٌّل‬
ٌٌّ ‫اع‬

ٌِّ
ٌ‫ص ٌَّفٌّة‬ ٌّ‫ؼ‬
ٌ ‫ص ْو‬ ِ
+ ُ ‫ٌّم ْو‬
َ ٌ‫نَكَرة‬

ٌ‫ٌّخ ٌََِّبيٌّة‬ ِِ ٌِّ َ‫ٌّف‬ ٌٌّ ‫ٌّفِ ٌّْع‬

َ ٌ‫= جُْلَةٌٌّف ْعلية‬ ٌٌٌٌٌٌٌٌٌٌٌٌٌّّّّّّّّّّّّّ‫اع ٌٌّل‬ + ٌّ‫ م ْفعوٌؿ‬+ ‫ل‬
ُْ َ
Note:
 If a ٌ‫ ٌَّم ٌّْعٌِّرٌّفٌَّة‬is followed by a sentence, it will be a ‫خبَػٌٌّر‬ َ or ‫اؿ‬
ٌٌّ ‫ ٌَّح‬.
e.g. َ‫اجٌّة‬
ٌَّ ‫بٌّالدٌٌّّر‬
ُ ‫ٌّاٌَّلٌَّْوٌّلَ ُدٌّيػٌَّْرٌَّك‬ The boy is riding the bicycle.
Here, (‫ )ٌّاٌَّلْ ٌَّوٌّلَ ٌُّد‬is ٌ‫ ُمْبتَ َدٌّأ‬, and (َ‫ج ٌّة‬
ٌَّ ‫بٌّالدٌٌّّرا‬
ُ ‫ )يػٌَّْرٌَّك‬is the ‫ َخبَػٌٌّر‬.

88
 َ‫اجٌّة‬
ٌَّ ‫بٌّالدٌٌّّر‬ ٌّ َِ‫اء‬
ُ ‫نٌّاٌّلٌَّْوٌّلَ ُدٌّيػٌَّْرٌَّك‬ ٌّ ‫ ٌَّج‬The boy who was riding the bicycle came
to me.
ٌِّ َ‫وٌّار‬
Here, (‫ )ٌّاٌَّلْ ٌَّوٌّلَ ٌُّد‬is ‫اؿ‬ ْ ُ‫ذ‬, and (َ‫اجٌّة‬
ٌَّ ‫بٌّالدٌٌّّر‬
ُ ‫ )يػٌَّْرٌَّك‬is the ‫اؿ‬
ٌٌّ ‫ ٌَّح‬.
2. ٌّ‫سبَِيب‬
َ ٌّ ‫ت‬
ٌٌّ ‫نٌّػَ ٌّْع‬: It is that word, which does not describe the ٌ‫ع‬
ٌّ ‫ ٌَّمْتبُػ ْو‬, but describes that which is
connected to the ٌ‫ع‬ ٌّ ‫ َمْتبُػ ْو‬.
ِ ‫نٌّولَد‬
e.g. َ ٌ َ ٌّْ َِ‫َجاء‬
ُ‫ٌّعالٌٌّأَبػُ ْوٌّه‬ The boy whose father is learned, came to me.
Here, (ٌ‫ال‬ ٌِّ ‫ ) َع‬is a ٌ‫ص ٌَّفٌّة‬
ٌِّ of (ُ‫)أَبػُ ْوٌّه‬, which is connected to the matboo‘ (‫) َولَ ٌٌّد‬.
However, it is not a ٌ‫ص ٌَّف ٌّة‬ ٌِّ of the matboo‘ itself.
Notes:
ٌّ َِ‫تٌّ َسب‬
1. In ‫يب‬ ٌٌّ ‫نٌّػَ ٌّْع‬, the ‫ؼ‬
ٌٌّ ‫ص ٌّْو‬ ٌِّ must correspond in only two aspects:
ٌُّ ‫ ٌَّم ٌّْو‬and ٌ‫ص ٌَّفٌّة‬
a. I‘raab
b. Being ma‘rifah or nakirah
ٌِّ will always be singular, irrespective of whether the ‫ؼ‬
2. The ٌ‫ص ٌَّف ٌّة‬ ٌٌّ ‫ص ٌّْو‬
ٌُّ ‫ ٌَّم ٌّْو‬is singular, dual
or plural.
َِ ‫اف‬
ُ ‫ٌّجْي ٌلٌٌّّإِطَ َار‬
‫ٌّاهٌَّا‬ ِ َ‫افٌّصورت‬
ِ
e.g. َ ْ ُ َ‫َىات‬ These are two pictures whose frames are beautiful.
3. ٌِّ will correspond in gender to the word after it.
The ٌ‫ص ٌَّف ٌّة‬
‫ٌّىٌّا‬ ِ ْ‫ٌّدةٌٌُّّال‬ ِ
e.g. َ ‫ٌّد‬
ُ َ‫ٌّول‬
ٌَّ ‫ٌّل‬
ُ ‫ٌّعٌّاق‬
َ ٌَّ ‫َجاءٌَّتٌٌّّالسٌّي‬ The lady, whose son is intelligent, came.

Sentence Analysis
ٌِّ ‫ٌّع‬
1. ٌ‫ال‬ َ ‫َجاءَ ٌَّر ُج ٌل‬ A learned man came.
َ‫عالا ٌم‬ ‫رج ٌَل‬ َ‫جاء‬
ٌِّ + )ٌ‫ع‬
)‫ص ٌَّف ٌّةٌٌّ(تَابِ ٌٌّع‬ ٌّ ‫ؼٌّ( َمْتبُػ ْو‬
ٌٌّ ‫ص ٌّْو‬
ٌُّ ‫ٌَّم ٌّْو‬

ٌ‫ٌّخ ٌََِّبيٌّة‬ ِِ ٌِّ َ‫ٌّف‬ ِ

َ ٌ‫= جُْلَةٌٌّف ْعلية‬ ‫اع ٌٌّل‬ + ٌّ‫ل‬
ٌ ‫ف ْع‬
2. ‫الٌٌّاِبْػنُػ َها‬
ِ ‫ جاءتٌّاِمرأَةٌٌّع‬A woman whose son is learned, came.
َ َْ ْ َ َ
‫اابْ ن ها‬ ‫عالا ٌَم‬ ٌ‫اا ْمرأَة‬ َ‫ت‬
ْ ‫جاء‬
)‫اؼٌّإِلَْي ٌِّو‬
ٌ ‫ض‬َ ‫ٌّم‬ ُ ‫اؼ ٌَّو‬ٌ ‫ض‬
َ ‫( ُم‬ |
ٌِّ َ‫ٌّف‬
‫اع ٌٌّل‬ ِ ‫اِسمٌّالْ َف‬
ٌِّ ‫اع‬
+ ‫ل‬ ُْ

ٌِّ
ٌٌٌٌٌٌٌٌّّّّّّّّ)‫ص ٌَّف ٌّةٌٌّ(تَابِ ٌٌّع‬ + )ٌ‫ع‬
ٌّ ‫ؼٌّ( َمْتبُػ ْو‬
ٌٌّ ‫ص ٌّْو‬
ٌُّ ‫ٌَّم ٌّْو‬

ٌ‫ٌّخ ٌََِّبيٌّة‬ ِِ ٌِّ َ‫ٌّف‬ ٌّ‫فِ ْع ٌل‬

َ ٌ‫= جُْلَةٌٌّف ْعلية‬ ٌٌٌٌٌٌٌٌٌٌٌٌٌٌٌٌٌٌٌّّّّّّّّّّّّّّّّّّّ‫اع ٌٌّل‬ +

89
 ‫ٌّع ٌِّ‬
‫الٌ ‪3.‬‬ ‫َجاءَ ٌَّر ُج ٌلٌّأَبػُ ْوهُ َ‬ ‫‪A man whose father is learned, came.‬‬

‫عالا ٌمَ‬ ‫أب ْوهَ‬ ‫رج ٌلَ‬ ‫جاءَ‬

‫|‬ ‫اؼٌّإِلَْي ٌِّو)‬
‫ض ٌ‬‫ٌّم َ‬ ‫اؼ ٌَّو ُ‬
‫ض ٌ‬
‫( ُم َ‬
‫َخبَػٌرٌّ‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫ُمْبتَ َدٌّاٌ‬

‫ٌٌٌٌٌٌّّّّّّ ٌِّ‬
‫ص ٌَّف ٌّةٌٌّ(تَابِ ٌٌّع)‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫عٌ)‬
‫ؼٌّ( َمْتبُػ ْو ٌّ‬
‫ص ٌّْو ٌٌّ‬
‫ٌَّم ٌّْو ٌُّ‬

‫ٌّخ ٌََِّبيٌّةٌ‬ ‫ِِ‬ ‫ٌّفَ ٌِّ‬ ‫فِ ْع ٌلٌّ‬

‫= جُْلَةٌٌّف ْعليةٌ َ‬ ‫اع ٌٌّلٌٌٌٌٌٌٌٌٌٌٌّّّّّّّّّّّ‬ ‫‪+‬‬

‫‪EXERCISE‬‬

‫ح ِقْي ٌِّقيٌّ ‪1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and analyse the following sentences pointing out the‬‬
‫ت ٌّ َ‬
‫نٌّػَ ٌّْع ٌٌّ‬
‫تٌّ َسبَِ ٌّ‬
‫يب ‪and the‬‬ ‫‪.‬نٌّػَ ٌّْع ٌٌّ‬
‫‪i.‬‬ ‫ركبتٌّارصافٌّاذميلٌّسرجو‬ ‫‪v.‬‬ ‫أوقدتٌّمصباحاٌّنورهٌّقوي‬
‫‪ii.‬‬ ‫ىوٌّرجلٌّعاسةٌّابنتو‬ ‫‪vi.‬‬ ‫ىذاٌّعملٌّينفع‬
‫‪iii.‬‬ ‫ىؤلءٌّبناتٌّعاقَلت‬ ‫‪vii.‬‬ ‫ىذاٌّمنزؿٌّضيق‬
‫‪iv.‬‬ ‫شاىدناٌّقطاراٌّسْيةٌّسريع‬ ‫‪viii.‬‬ ‫جاءٌّالرجلٌّاسهذبٌّأخوه‬

‫‪2. Analyse the following sentences and and point out the difference between them.‬‬

‫‪i.‬‬ ‫ىذاٌّالولدٌّضاحك‬
‫‪ii.‬‬ ‫ىذاٌّولدٌّضاحك‬
‫‪iii.‬‬ ‫جاءٌّالولدٌّضاحكا‬

‫‪90‬‬
Section 3.10.2
َ‫َاَلَتَّأَْكاَْيَد‬/ َ‫ – الت َّْوكاْيد‬Emphasis

Definition: It is that ‫تَابِ ٌٌّع‬, which gives emphasis to the ٌ‫ع‬ ٌّ ‫ َمْتبُػ ْو‬in the matter related to it or
emphasizes the inclusion of all members of the ٌ‫ع‬ ٌّ ‫ َمْتبُػ ْو‬in the matter related to it.
 The ‫ تَابِ ٌٌّع‬is called ‫ ٌّتٌَّأْكِْي ٌٌّد‬and the ٌ‫ع‬
ٌّ ‫ َمْتبُػ ْو‬is called ‫ ُم َؤك ٌٌّد‬.
e.g. ٌّْ َِ‫َجاء‬
ٌّ‫نٌّ َزيْ ٌد ٌَّزيْ ٌد‬ (The second ‘Zayd’ emphasized Zayd’s coming.)
e.g. ‫َجاءٌَّالْ َق ْوُـٌّ ُكل ُه ٌّْم‬ (‫ ُكل ُه ٌّْم‬emphasized that all came, no one remained.)

There are two types of ‫ٌّتٌَّأْكِْي ٌٌّد‬: ٌّ‫ظي‬

ٌِّ ‫ لٌَّْف‬and ٌّ‫َم ْعنٌَِّوي‬
ٌّ ‫ – اَلتػ ْوكِْي ُدٌّالل ْف ٌِّظ‬Verbal Emphasis: The emphasis is attained by repeating the ‫ ُم َؤك ٌٌّد‬, which may
1. ‫ي‬
be ‫اِ ْس ٌٌّم‬, ‫ل‬
ٌٌّ ‫فِ ْع‬, ‫ؼ‬
ٌٌّ ‫ َح ْر‬, ‫ض ِمْيػٌٌّر‬
َ , or sentence.
e.g. ٌّ‫َجاءَ ٌَّزيْ ٌد ٌَّزيْ ٌد‬ Zayd, Zayd came.
ٌُّ ِ‫ضَرٌّالْغَائ‬
‫ب‬ َ ‫ٌّح‬
َ ‫ضَر‬ َ ‫َح‬ The absent one became present, became present.
‫َخ ْو ُفٌّالْ َع ْه ٌَّد‬ ُ ‫َل ٌَّلٌّأ‬ I will not, will not break the pledge.
َ‫تٌّالنافِ َذٌّة‬ ِ
َ ْ‫افْػتَ ْحٌّأَن‬ You open the window.
‫تٌّالْ َملُ ْوٌُّـ‬ َ ْ‫تٌّالْ َملُ ْوُـٌّأَن‬
َ ْ‫أَن‬ You are the censured one, you are the censured one.

2. ‫ – اَلتػٌّْوكِْي ُد ٌّالْ َم ْعنَ ِوى‬Emphasis Through Meaning: The emphasis is attained with any of the
following words:
ٌّ‫س‬
ٌ ‫يٌّ نػَ ْف‬
ٌْ ‫َع‬ ٌّ‫كِ ََل‬ ‫كِْلتَا‬ ٌّ‫ُكل‬ ٌّ‫َجَ ُع‬
ْ‫أ‬ ٌّ‫أَ ْكتَ ُع‬ ٌّ‫ص ُع‬
َ ْ‫أَب‬ ٌّ‫أَبْػتَ ُع‬
Below, we discuss each of these.

a. ٌّ‫س‬
ٌ ‫ٌّنػَ ْف‬،‫ي‬
ٌْ ‫( َع‬himself, herself)
 These are used for singular, dual and plural.
 They have to be ‫اؼ‬ ٌَّ ‫ ٌُّم‬to a ‫ض ٌِّمْيٌّػٌٌّر‬
ٌٌّ ‫ض‬ ٌَّ .
 Their ‫ض ٌِّمْيٌّػٌٌّر‬ ٌِّ ( must correspond with those of the ‫ ُم َؤك ٌٌّد‬.
ٌَّ and form )ٌ‫صْيٌّػ ٌّغٌَّة‬
 ٌِّ ( of ‫س‬
The plural form )ٌ‫صْيٌّػ ٌّغٌَّة‬ ٌٌّ ‫ نػَ ْف‬and ‫ي‬
ٌٌّْ ‫ َع‬is used for dual.
e.g. ُ‫ َعْيػنٌُّو‬/ُ‫قَ َاـ ٌَّزيْ ٌدٌّنػَ ْف ُسٌّو‬ Zayd himself stood.
‫أ َْعيُػنُػ ُه َما‬/‫قَ َاـٌّالزيْ َد ِافٌّأَنْػ ُف ُس ُه َما‬ The two Zayds themselves stood.
‫أ َْعيُػنُػ ُه ٌّْم‬/‫قَ َاـٌّالزيْ ُد ْو َفٌّأَنْػ ُف ُس ُه ٌّْم‬ The (many) Zayds themselves stood.
‫س َها‬ ٌُّ ‫نػَ ْف‬/‫ٌّعْيػنٌُّػ َها‬ ِ
َ ُ‫َجاءَتٌّالْ ُم َعل َمة‬ The female teacher herself came.
‫أَنْػ ُف ُس ُه َما‬/‫افٌّأ َْعيُػنُػ ُه َما‬ ِ َ‫تٌّالْمعلمت‬ ِ
َ َ ُ َ‫َجاء‬ The two female teachers themselves came.
ٌّ‫أَنْػ ُف ُس ُهن‬/ٌّ‫اتٌّأ َْعيُػنُػ ُهن‬ ِ
ُ ‫َجاءَتٌّالْ ُم َعل َم‬ The (many) female teachers themselves
came.

91
 b. ٌّ‫ٌّكِ ََل‬،‫( كِْلتَا‬both)
 These are used for dual only.
 ٌَّ ِ‫ ٌّك‬is masculine and ‫ كِْلتَا‬is feminine.
‫َل‬
 It must be ‫اؼ‬ ٌَّ ‫ ٌُّم‬to a dual ‫ض ٌِّمْيٌّػٌٌّر‬
ٌٌّ ‫ض‬ ٌَّ .
e.g. ‫ج ََل ِفٌّكِ ََل ُهَا‬
ُ ‫قَ َاـٌّالر‬ Both of the men stood up.
ُ َ‫افٌّكِْلت‬
‫اهَا‬ ِ
ِ َ‫تٌّالْمعلمت‬
َ َ ُ ‫قَ َام‬ Both of the female teachers stood up.

c. ٌّ‫ٌّ ُكل‬،‫َجَ ُع‬

ْ ‫( أ‬all)
 They are used for singular and plural.
 ‫ ُك ٌّل‬is used with a ‫ض ٌِّمْيٌّػٌٌّر‬ ٌَّ , which must correspond to the ‫ ُم َؤك ٌٌّد‬.
 ‫َجَ ٌُّع‬
ْ ‫ أ‬is used with its form )ٌ‫صْيٌّػ ٌّغٌَّة‬ ٌِّ ( changing to correspond to the ‫ ُم َؤك ٌٌّد‬.
e.g. ُ‫ابٌّ ُكل ٌّو‬ ِ
َ َ‫ْتٌّالْكت‬ ُ ‫قَػَرأ‬ I read the whole book.
‫َجاءٌَّالْ َق ْوُـٌّ ُكلٌّ ُه ٌّْم‬ All the people came.
ِ
ُ‫َجٌََّعٌّو‬
ْ ‫سٌّأ‬ َ ‫تٌّالْ َفَر‬ ُ ْ‫ا ْشتَػَري‬ I bought the whole horse.
‫َجَ ُع ْو ٌَّف‬ْ ‫اسٌّأ‬ ُ ‫َجاءٌَّالن‬ All the people came.

Note: ٌّ‫ ُكل‬and ‫َجَ ٌُّع‬

ْ ‫ أ‬can only be used for emphasis in those things, which have parts
or can be divided. Thus, ُ‫ت ٌّ َزٌّيْ ًٌّداٌٌّّ ُكل ٌّو‬
ُ ‫( أَ ٌّْكَرْم‬I treated all of Zayd hospitably)
would be incorrect.

d. ٌّ‫ٌّأَ ْكتَ ُع‬،‫ص ُع‬

َ ْ‫ٌّأَب‬،‫أَبْػتَ ُع‬
 These are used for greater emphasis.
 They appear after ‫َجَ ٌُّع‬
ْ ‫أ‬. They are not used without ‫َجَ ٌُّع‬
ْ ‫ أ‬nor can they appear
before ‫َجَ ٌُّع‬
ْ ‫أ‬.
e.g. ٌّ‫ص ُع ْو َف‬
َ ْ‫أَب‬/‫أَبْػتَػ ُع ْو ٌَّف‬/‫َجَ ُع ْو َفٌّأَ ْكتَػ ُع ْو ٌَّف‬
ْ ‫َجاءٌَّالْ َق ْوُـٌّأ‬ All of the people came.
ٌّ‫ص ُع‬
َ ُ‫ب‬/‫بػُتَ ٌُّع‬/‫ٌّجَ ُعٌّ ُكتَ ٌُّع‬
ُ ُ‫تٌّالن َساء‬
ْ ‫قَ َام‬ All of the women stood up.

Sentence Analysis

ٌّ‫َجَ ُع ْو َف‬
ْ ‫َجاءٌَّالْ َق ْوٌُّـٌّ ُكل ُه ٌّْمٌّأ‬ All the people came.

َ‫أ ْجمع ْون‬ َ‫كلُّه ْم‬ َ‫الْق ْوم‬ َ‫جاء‬

| )‫اؼٌّإِلَْي ٌِّو‬
ٌ ‫ض‬َ ‫ٌّم‬
ُ ‫اؼ ٌَّو‬ٌ ‫ض‬
َ ‫( ُم‬ |
2ٌّ‫ اَلتأْكِْي ُد‬+ 1ٌّ‫اَلتأْكِْي ُد‬ ‫ُم َؤك ٌٌّد‬

ٌ‫ٌّخ ٌََِّبيٌّة‬ ِِ ٌِّ َ‫ٌٌٌٌّّّّف‬ ٌّ‫فِ ْع ٌل‬

َ ٌ‫= جُْلَةٌٌّف ْعلية‬ ٌّ‫اع ٌل‬ +

92
 ‫‪EXERCISE‬‬
‫‪1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and analyse the following sentences.‬‬

‫‪i.‬‬ ‫قابلتٌّالوزيرٌّنفسو‬
‫‪ii.‬‬ ‫ذِبناٌّالكبشيٌّكليهما‬
‫‪iii.‬‬ ‫سجدٌّاسلئكةٌّكلهمٌّأجعوفٌّإلٌّابليس‬
‫‪iv.‬‬ ‫رأيتٌّالتمساحٌّالتمساح‬
‫‪v.‬‬ ‫حتؽٌّأثاثٌّالبيتٌّجيعو‬ ‫ا ٌّ‬
‫‪vi.‬‬ ‫قطعناٌَّننٌّأنفسناٌّالطريقٌّكلو‬

‫‪93‬‬
Section 3.10.3
َ‫ – اَلَْبَدَل‬Substitute
Definition: A ‫ؿ‬ ٌٌّ ‫ ٌّبَ ٌَّد‬is that ‫ٌّتَاٌّبِ ٌٌّع‬, which is actually intended in the sentence and not its ٌ‫ع‬ ٌّ ‫ ٌَّمٌّْتبٌُّػٌّْو‬. The
matboo‘ merely serves as an introduction to the taabi‘.
 The ‫ ٌّتَاٌّبِ ٌٌّع‬is called ‫ؿ‬ ٌّ ‫ ٌَّمٌّْتبٌُّػٌّْو‬is called ُ‫ ُمْب ٌَّد ٌٌّؿ ٌّ ٌِّمٌّْنٌّو‬or ُ‫( ُمٌّبَدٌّ ٌٌّؿ ٌّ ٌِّمٌّْنٌّو‬the
ٌٌّ ‫( ٌّبَ ٌَّد‬substitute) and the ٌ‫ع‬
substituted).
Example: ٌّ‫َخ ْو َؾ‬
ُ ‫َجاءَ ٌَّزيْ ٌدٌّأ‬ Zayd, your brother, came.

َ‫أخ ْوك‬ َ‫زيْ ٌد‬ َ‫جاء‬

)‫اؼٌّإِلَْي ٌِّو‬
ٌ ‫ض‬َ ‫ٌّم‬ُ ‫اؼ ٌَّو‬ ٌ ‫ض‬
َ ‫( ُم‬ |
‫ٌّبَ ٌَّد ٌٌّؿ‬ + ‫ؿٌّ ٌِّمٌّْن ٌّو‬
ُ ٌٌّ ‫ُمْب ٌَّد‬

ٌ‫ٌّخ ٌََِّبيٌّة‬ ِِ ٌِّ َ‫ٌّف‬ ٌّ‫فِ ْع ٌل‬

َ ٌ‫= جُْلَةٌٌّف ْعلية‬ ٌٌٌٌٌٌٌٌٌّّّّّّّّّ‫اع ٌٌّل‬ +

 There are four types of ‫ؿ‬

ٌٌّ ‫ٌّبَ ٌَّد‬:
ِ ‫ب ٌَّد ُؿٌّ ُكل‬
1) ٌّ‫ٌّم ْنٌّ ُكل‬ ِ‫ض‬
2) ٌّ‫ٌّم ْنٌّ ُكل‬ ٍ ‫بَ ٌَّد ُؿٌّبػَ ْع‬ ٌِّ ‫ٌّال ْشتِ َم‬
3) ‫اؿ‬ ٌِّْ ‫بَ ٌَّد ُؿ‬ ٌِّ َ‫بَ ٌَّد ُؿٌّالْغَل‬
4) ‫ط‬
َ
ٌّ ‫بَ ٌَّد ٌُّؿٌّ ُكلٌٌّّ ِم ٌّْنٌّ ُك‬: It is that ‫ٌّبَ ٌَّد ٌٌّؿ‬, which refers to the exact same thing as the ُ‫ ُمْب ٌَّد ٌٌّؿٌّ ٌِّمٌّْنٌّو‬.
1. ‫ل‬
e.g. ‫َخ ْو ٌَّؾ‬
ُ ‫َجاءَ ٌَّزيْ ٌدٌّأ‬ Zayd, your brother, came.

ٌّ ‫ض ٌِّم ْنٌّ ُك‬

2. ‫ل‬ ٍ ‫بَ ٌَّد ُؿٌّبػَ ْع‬: It is that ‫ٌّبَ ٌَّد ٌٌّؿ‬, which is a part of the ُ‫ ُمْب ٌَّد ٌٌّؿٌّ ٌِّمٌّْنٌّو‬.
 The ‫ؿ‬ ٌٌّ ‫ ٌّبَ ٌَّد‬must have a ‫ض ٌِّمْيٌّػٌٌّر‬ ٌَّ , which refers to the ُ‫ ُمْب ٌَّد ٌٌّؿٌّ ٌِّمنٌٌّّْو‬.
e.g. ُ‫ْسٌّو‬
ٌَّ ‫اٌّرأ‬
َ ‫ت ٌَّزيْ ًد‬
ُ ْ‫ضَرب‬
َ I hit Zayd’s head.

ٌِّ ‫ٌّال ْشتِ َم‬

3. ‫اؿ‬ ٌِّْ ‫ بَ ٌَّد ُؿ‬: It is that ‫ٌّبَ ٌَّد ٌٌّؿ‬, which is related to the ُ‫ ُمْب ٌَّد ٌٌّؿٌّ ٌِّمٌّْنٌّو‬, but is not part of it.
 The ‫ؿ‬ ٌَّ , which refers to the ُ‫ ُمْب ٌَّد ٌٌّؿٌّ ٌِّمٌّْنٌّو‬.
ٌٌّ ‫ ٌّبَ ٌَّد‬must have a ‫ض ٌِّمْيٌّػٌٌّر‬
e.g. ُ‫ُس ِر َؽ ٌَّزيْ ٌدٌّثػَ ْوبٌُّو‬ Zayd’s shirt was stolen.

ٌِّ َ‫بَ ٌَّد ُؿٌّالْغَل‬: It is that ‫ٌّبَ ٌَّد ٌٌّؿ‬, which is mentioned after an error, as a correction.
4. ‫ط‬
e.g. ‫ارا‬ ِ ِ
ً َ‫تٌّفَػَر ًساٌّح‬
ُ ْ‫ا ْشتَػَري‬ I bought a horse; no, a donkey.

EXERCISE
1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and analyse the following sentences.

i. ‫قضيتٌّالدينٌّثلثو‬ iii. ‫قدـٌّالمْيٌّالوزير‬

ii. ‫سرىنٌّازادـٌّأمانتو‬ iv. ‫عاملتٌّالتاجرٌّزيدا‬

94
Section 3.10.4
‫عَطَْفََالنََّس ا‬/َ‫َفََباَح َْرَف‬
َ‫َق‬ ٌ ْ‫ – عَط‬Conjunction

Definition: It is that ‫ٌّتَاٌّبِ ٌٌّع‬, which appears after a ٌّ‫ف‬ ٍ ْ‫ؼ ٌّ ٌَّع ٌّط‬
ٌُّ ‫ ٌَّحٌّْر‬. The ‫ف‬ ٌٍّ ْ‫ؼ ٌّ ٌَّع ٌّط‬
ٌُّ ‫ ٌَّحٌّْر‬appears between the
‫ ٌّتَاٌّبِ ٌٌّع‬and the ٌ‫ع‬
ٌّ ‫ ٌَّمٌّْتبٌُّػٌّْو‬. The meaning of the verb directed to the ٌ‫ع‬ ٌّ ‫ ٌَّمٌّْتبٌُّػٌّْو‬is also directed to the ‫ٌّتَاٌّبِ ٌٌّع‬.
 The ‫ ٌّتَاٌّبِ ٌٌّع‬is called ‫ؼ‬ ٌّ ‫ ٌَّمٌّْتبٌُّػٌّْو‬is called ‫ؼٌّ َعلَْيٌِّو‬
ٌٌّ ‫ َم ْعطُْو‬and the ٌ‫ع‬ ٌٌّ ‫ َم ْعطُْو‬.
e.g. ‫ٌّع ْمٌرو‬
َ ‫َجاءَ ٌَّزيْ ٌد ٌَّو‬ Zayd and Amr came.

‫ع ْم ٌرو‬ َ‫و‬ َ‫زيْ ٌد‬ َ‫جاء‬

ٌٌّ ‫ َم ْعطُْو‬+ ‫ف‬
‫ؼ‬ ٌُّ ‫ َحٌٌّّْر‬+ ‫ؼٌّ َعلَْيٌِّو‬
ٌٍّ ْ‫ؼٌّ ٌَّع ٌّط‬ ٌٌّ ‫َم ْعطُْو‬

ٌَّ ٌ‫= جُْلَةٌٌّفِ ْعلِية‬

ٌ‫ٌّخ َِْبيٌّة‬ ٌِّ َ‫ٌّف‬
ٌّ‫اع ٌل‬ + ٌّ‫فِ ْع ٌل‬

ٌٍّ ْ‫ؼٌّ ٌَّع ٌّط‬

The various ‫ف‬ ٌُّ ‫ ٌُّحٌُّرٌّْو‬are as follows:
ٌّ‫َو‬ ٌّ‫ؼ‬
َ ٌّ‫ُث‬ ٌّ‫َح ّت‬ ‫ٌّإِما‬ ٌّ‫أٌَّْو‬ ٌّ‫أٌَّ ْـ‬ ٌّ‫َل‬ ٌّ‫بَ ْل‬ ٌّ‫ل ِك ْن‬

Notes:
1. If the ‫ؼٌّ َعلَْي ٌِّو‬ ٌِّ ٌّ‫عٌّ ٌُّمت‬
ٌٌّ ‫ َم ْعطُْو‬is a ‫ص ٌٌّل‬ ٌٌّ ‫ض ٌِّمْيٌّػٌٌّرٌّ ٌَّمٌّْرفٌُّػٌّْو‬ ٌِّ ‫ض ٌِّمْيٌّػٌٌّرٌّ ٌُّمْنٌّػ ٌَّف‬
ٌَّ , then its ‫ص ٌٌّل‬ ٌَّ has to be mentioned after it.
e.g. ٌّ‫اٌّو ٌَّزيْ ٌد‬
َ َ‫تٌّأَن‬
ُ ْ‫ضَرب‬
َ Zayd and I hit.

2. However, if after the ‫ل‬ ٌِّ ٌّ‫ع ٌّ ٌُّمت‬

ٌٌّ ‫ص‬ ٌٌّ ‫ض ٌِّمْيٌّػٌٌّر ٌّ ٌَّمٌّْرفٌُّػٌّْو‬
ٌَّ , another word appears before the ٌّ‫ؼ‬
ٌ ‫ َم ْعطُْو‬, then the
ٌِّ ‫ض ٌِّمْيٌّػٌٌّرٌّ ٌُّمْنٌّػ ٌَّف‬
‫ص ٌٌّل‬ ٌَّ need not be brought.
e.g. ٌّ‫تٌّالْيَػ ْوَـ ٌَّو ٌَّزيْ ٌد‬ُ ْ‫ضَرب‬َ Zayd and I hit, today.
‫اٌّو ٌَّلٌّأٌّبَاءُنَا‬ َ َ‫ٌَّماٌّأَ ْشَرْكن‬ Neither us nor our forefathers associated partners.
3. ٌّIf the ‫ؼ ٌّ َعلَْي ٌِّو‬
ٌٌّ ‫ َم ْعطُْو‬is a ‫ض ٌِّمْيٌّػٌٌّر‬ ٌَّ preceded by a ٌّ‫ؼ ٌّ ٌَّجر‬
ٌُّ ‫ ٌَّحٌّْر‬, then the ‫ؼ‬
ٌٌّ ‫ َم ْعطُْو‬should also be preceded
by the same ٌّ‫جر‬ ٌَّ ٌّ‫ؼ‬
ٌُّ ‫ ٌَّحٌّْر‬.
e.g. ‫ٌّوٌّبَِزيْ ٌٍّد‬ َ‫ك‬ َ ِ‫تٌّب‬ ُ ‫َمَرْر‬ I passed by you and Zayd.

EXERCISE

ٌٍّ ْ‫ؼٌّ ٌَّع ٌّط‬

1. Fill in a suitable ‫ف‬ ٌُّ ‫ ٌَّحٌّْر‬, translate, fill in the i‘raab and analyse the following sentences.
i. ‫أتفاحاٌّأكلت_______ غنيا‬ iv. ‫أتٌّالكتابٌّكلو _______ بعضو‬
ٌّ ‫ماٌّقر‬
ii. ‫قدمتٌّاليوٌّالطعاـ _______ ماٌّأكلو‬ v. ‫باعٌّعقاره _______ منزلو‬
ٌّ
iii. ‫ماٌّقابلتو _______ قابلتٌّوٌّكيلو‬ vi. ٌّ‫صلىٌّالماـ _______ اسأموـ‬
Section 3.10.5

95
 ‫عَطَْفََالَْبَي ا‬
‫َانَ‬

‫عٌ ‪ٌّ, which clarifies or specifies its‬تَاٌّبِ ٌٌّع ‪Definition: It is that‬‬

‫‪ٌَّ .‬متٌّْبٌُّػٌّْو ٌّ‬
‫‪ Often, it is a more famous name of two names.‬‬
‫‪Example:‬‬ ‫ٌّع َمٌُّر‬
‫ص ُ‬ ‫وٌّح ْف ٍ‬
‫قَ َاـٌّأَبُ َ‬ ‫‪Abu Hafs ‘Umar stood up.‬‬

‫عمرَ‬ ‫أبوَح ْف َ‬
‫ص‬ ‫قامَ‬
‫|‬ ‫اؼٌّإِلَْي ٌِّو)‬
‫ض ٌ‬‫ٌّوٌّ ُم َ‬ ‫اؼ ٌَّ‬
‫ض ٌ‬
‫( ُم َ‬
‫‪ٌّ +‬تَاٌّبِ ٌعٌّ‬ ‫عٌ‬
‫ٌَّمٌّْتبٌُّػٌّْو ٌّ‬

‫ٌّخ ٌََِّبيٌّةٌ‬ ‫ِِ‬ ‫اعِ ٌلٌّ‬ ‫ِ‬

‫جُْلَةٌٌّف ْعليةٌ َ‬ ‫=‬ ‫ٌٌٌٌٌٌٌٌٌٌٌٌٌّّّّّّّّّّّّّفَ ٌّ‬ ‫لٌّ ‪+‬‬
‫ف ْع ٌ‬

‫‪Example:‬‬ ‫وٌّع ْم ٍرو‬

‫َجاءَ ٌَّزيْ ٌدٌّأَبُ َ‬ ‫‪Abu ‘Amr Zayd came.‬‬

‫أبوَع ْمَرو‬ ‫زيْ ٌدَ‬ ‫جاءَ‬

‫اؼٌّإِلَْي ٌِّو)‬
‫ض ٌ‬‫ٌّوٌّ ُم َ‬ ‫اؼ ٌَّ‬
‫ض ٌ‬‫( ُم َ‬ ‫|‬
‫ٌّتَاٌّبِ ٌٌّع‬ ‫عٌ ‪+‬‬
‫ٌَّمٌّْتبٌُّػٌّْو ٌّ‬

‫ٌّخ ٌََِّبيٌّةٌ‬ ‫ِِ‬ ‫ٌّفَ ٌِّ‬ ‫ِ‬

‫= جُْلَةٌٌّف ْعليةٌ َ‬ ‫اع ٌٌّلٌٌٌٌٌٌٌٌٌّّّّّّّّّ‬ ‫لٌّ ‪+‬‬
‫ف ْع ٌ‬

‫‪EXERCISE‬‬
‫‪1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and analyse the following sentences.‬‬

‫قاـٌّعلىٌّزينٌّالعابدين ‪i.‬‬ ‫جعلٌّاهللٌّالكعبةٌّالبيتٌّارراـٌّقياماٌّللناس ‪ii.‬‬

‫‪96‬‬
 CHAPTER 4
ْ‫ – اَلْ َْع َْو ِْام ُل‬Governing Words

ٌٌ ‫ َع ِام‬is a word that governs/causes i‘raab changes in another word.

Definition: An ‫ل‬

ٌُ ‫ َع َو ِام‬: 1) ٌ‫ َم ْعنٌَِوي‬2) ٌ‫لَ ْف ٌِظي‬

There are two types of ‫ل‬

ٌ ‫ َع ِام ٌٌلٌ َم ْعنٌَِو‬: It is that ‫ َع ِام ٌٌل‬, which is not in word form i.e. it is abstract.
1. ‫ي‬
There are two types of ٌ‫لٌ َم ْعنٌَِوي‬ ٌٌ ‫ َع ِام‬.
ِِ ِ ِ
i. ُ‫اَْْلبْت َد ٌاء‬: which means that being free of a ٌ‫ َعام ٌٌلٌلَْف ٌظي‬gives ٌ‫ ٌُمٌْبٌتَ ٌَدأ‬a ‫ٌَرٌفْ ٌٌع‬.
e.g. ‫َزيْ ٌدٌقَائِ ٌٌم‬ Zayd is standing.
Here, (‫ ) َزيْ ٌد‬is the ٌ‫ ٌُمٌْبٌتَ ٌَدأ‬, which is marfoo‘ because of ibtidaa’. (ٌ‫ )قَائِ ٌم‬is the khabar and
it is also marfoo‘ because of ibtidaa’.
ii. In the case of ٌ‫ع‬ ٌ‫ضاٌِر‬ ٌَ ‫ٌفِ ٌْع ٌٌلٌ ٌُم‬, being free of a ‫ب‬
ٌٍ ‫ص‬ ٌُ ‫ ٌَحٌْر‬or ‫فٌ ٌَجٌْزٌٍم‬
ٌْ َ‫فٌٌن‬ ٌُ ‫ ٌَحٌْر‬gives ٌ‫ع‬ ٌَ ‫ ٌفِ ٌْع ٌٌلٌ ٌُم‬a ‫ٌَرٌفْ ٌٌع‬.
ٌ‫ضاٌِر‬
e.g. ‫يَ ْع َم ُل ٌَزيْ ٌد‬ Zayd is working.
Here (‫ل‬ ٌُ ‫ )يَ ْع َم‬is marfoo‘ because it is free of any ‫ب‬ ٌٍ ‫ص‬ ٌُ ‫ ٌَحٌْر‬or ‫فٌ ٌَجٌْزٌٍم‬
ٌْ َ‫فٌٌن‬ ٌُ ‫ ٌَحٌْر‬.

ٌ ‫ َع ِام ٌٌلٌلَ ْف ٌِظ‬: It is that ‫ َع ِام ٌٌل‬, which is in word form.

2. ‫ي‬
ٌِ ‫ َع ِام ٌٌلٌلَ ْف‬.
There are three types of ٌ‫ظي‬
i. ٌ‫ف‬ُ ‫اَ ْْلُُرْو‬
ii. ٌُ ‫اَْْلَفْ َع‬
‫ال‬
iii. ُ‫َْسَ ٌاء‬
ْ ‫اَْْل‬

97
Section 4.1
ِْ ‫فْالْ َْع‬
ُ‫امْلَ ْة‬ ُْ ‫ح ُْرْْو‬
ُْ ْ‫ – ْاَل‬Governing Particles

A. Particles, Which Govern Nouns

1. ُ‫الَ ٌارٌة‬
ٌْ ٌ‫ف‬
ٌُ ‫ٌاَ ٌْْلٌُُرٌْو‬ refer to section 1.6
ٌِ ٌ‫شبٌ ٌَهٌةٌٌُبِاٌلْ ٌِف ْع‬
2. ‫ل‬ ٌَ ‫فٌاٌلْ ٌُم‬
ٌُ ‫ٌاَ ٌْْلٌُُرٌْو‬ refer to section 1.7
3. ‫س‬
َ ٌِ ْ ٌَ‫شبٌ ٌَهت‬
ٌ ‫يٌبٌٌِلٌَْي‬ ٌَ ‫اٌوٌٌَلٌٌاٌَلْ ٌُم‬
ٌَ ‫ ٌَم‬refer to section 3.7.3
4. ِ‫ٌو ٌاوٌاٌلْ ٌم ٌعِيٌٌة‬ refer to section 3.8.4
َ َُ
ِ‫ال ٌسٌتِثٌٌن ٌاء‬
5. َ ْ ْ ٌِْ ٌ‫ف‬ ٌُ ‫ٌحٌْر‬ٌَ ٌ‫ٌإِل‬ refer to section 3.8.7
6. ‫فٌالنٌ ٌَدا ٌِء‬ ٌُ ‫ٌُحٌُرٌْو‬ refer to section 3.8.1
7. ٌِ ‫الٌِْن‬
‫س‬ ٌْ ٌ‫تٌٌلِنٌَ ٌْف ٌِي‬
ٌ ِ ٌ‫ٌَلٌٌاَل‬ refer to section 3.7.4

B. Particles, Which Govern ٌ‫ع‬

ْ ‫ضْاِْر‬
َ ‫ْْم‬
ُْ ‫ْل‬ ِ
ٌ ‫ْع‬
ْ‫ف‬
1. ٌِ ٌ‫فٌالن‬
ُ‫اصٌبٌَة‬ ٌُ ‫ٌاَ ٌْْلٌُُرٌْو‬
2. ُ‫الَاٌِزٌَمٌة‬
ٌْ ٌ‫ف‬
ٌُ ‫ٌاَ ٌْْلٌُُرٌْو‬

98
Section 4.1.1
ِ ‫ْفْْالن‬
ُ‫ْاصْْبَْة‬ ُ ‫ْرْْو‬
ُ ‫ْح‬
ُ ْ‫ – ْاَل‬Particles That Give Nasb
These are as follows: ‫أَ ٌْن‬ ٌ‫لَ ْن‬ ‫ٌَك ٌْي‬ ‫ٌإِذَ ٌْن‬
 These appear before ٌ‫ع‬ٌ‫ضاٌِر‬ ٌَ ‫ ٌفِ ٌْع ٌٌلٌ ٌُم‬and cause the following changes at the end:
˗ They give the last letter a fathah if it is not a ‫نٌٌُْو ٌن‬.
˗ If the last letter is a ‫نٌٌُْو ٌن‬, it is dropped. The exception is the ‫ نٌٌُْو ٌن‬of the two ٌ ‫جَْ ٌٌع‬
ٌ
ٌٌ ٌ‫ ٌُم ٌَؤن‬.
‫ث‬

Table 4.1
ِْ ْ‫فْالن‬
ُ‫اصْبَْة‬ ُْ ‫حُْرْْو‬
ُْ ْ‫ْاَل‬
ٍ‫ص‬
ْ‫ب‬ْْ َ‫فْْن‬
ُْ ‫َْحْْر‬ Meaning Example
ٌ‫أَ ْن‬ that, to َ‫أٌُ ِريْ ُدٌأَ ْنٌأٌٌَْد ٌُخ ٌَلٌا ٌْلَنٌٌة‬ I want to enter Paradise.

‫لَ ٌْن‬ will not, never ٌْ ٌ‫لَ ْن ٌٌيَ ٌْد ٌُخ َلٌاٌلْ ٌَك ٌافٌُِر‬
َ‫الَنٌٌة‬ The disbeliever will never enter Paradise.

ٌ‫ٌَك ْي‬ so that ٌُ ‫ٌِجٌْئ‬

‫تٌٌ ٌَك ٌْيٌأٌَ ٌْس ٌَِتٌيْ ٌَح‬ I came so I could rest.

‫ٌإِذَ ٌْن‬ then, in that ‫ك‬ ٌَ ِ‫ٌفٌ ٌَع ٌَمٌل‬ ٌ ِ ‫ٌإِذَ ْنٌتٌَ ٌُفٌْوَز‬ In that case, you will be successful in your
case work. [This is said in response to the one
who may have said: ٌ‫َجتَ ِه ُد‬
ْ ‫( أ‬I will work
hard).]

Notes:
ٌٌ ‫ٌفِ ٌْع‬, gives the meaning of a masdar. In this case, ‫ أَ ٌْن‬is called
1. Sometimes ‫أَ ٌْن‬, together with its ‫ل‬
ُ‫ص َد ِريٌٌة‬
ْ ‫أَ ْنٌاَلْ َم‬.
e.g. ٌ‫اٌخْيٌٌرٌل ُك ْم‬
ٌَ ‫ص ْوُم ْو‬
ٌُ َ‫أَ ْنٌت‬ i.e. ٌ‫ٌخْي ٌرٌل ُك ْم‬
َ ‫ص ْوٌُم ُك ْم‬
ٌَ
Your fasting is better for you.

ٌَ ‫ ٌفِ ٌْع ٌٌلٌ ٌُم‬a nasb.

ٌ‫ضاٌِر‬
2. ‫ أَ ٌْن‬is hidden after the following six huroof and gives the last letter of ٌ‫ع‬
a. ٌّٰ ‫ح‬:
After ‫ت‬ َ
e.g. ٌُ ‫ٌِسٌْر‬
ٌ‫تٌ َح ّٰتٌٌأٌَْد ٌُخ َلٌاٌلْبٌٌَلَ َد‬ ٌَ ‫( َح ّٰتٌأَ ْنٌٌأٌَْد ٌُخ‬
)‫ل‬
I travelled until I entered the city.

b. After ‫ح ٌْوٌِد‬ ٌْ ٌ ‫ ٌَل ٌُم‬or ‫ٌَل ٌُم ٌالنٌ ٌْف ٌِي‬: i.e. that ‫ٌَل ٌٌم‬, which appears after ُ‫ َكا َن ٌاَلْ َمْن ِفيٌة‬or any of the
ٌُ ُ‫ال‬
forms of ‫كا ٌَن‬ ٌَ .
e.g. ٌ‫اللٌُلِيٌُ ٌَعذٌبٌَ ٌُه ْم‬
ٌ ٌ‫ٌَماٌ ٌَكا ٌَن‬ )‫(ِْلَ ْنٌيٌُ ٌَعذٌبٌَ ٌُه ٌْم‬
Allah was not going to punish them.

99
c. ٰ ِ‫( ٌإ‬until) or ‫( ٌإِلٌٌأَ ٌْن‬but that).
After ‫ٌأٌَْو‬, which has the meaning of ‫ىلٌأَ ٌْن‬
ِ ٌ َِ‫)ٌإِ ٰىلٌأَ ٌْنٌتُ ْع ِطي‬
e.g. َ ‫كٌأ َْوٌتُ ْعطيَِ ِْن‬
ٌ‫ٌحق ْي‬ َ ‫َْلَلَْزَمن‬ (‫ِن‬
ْ
I will stick to you until you give me my right.

ٌ‫س ْي ٌءٌُأ َْوٌيٌَ ٌْعٌتَ ٌِذ َر‬ ٌُ َ‫(ٌإِلٌأَ ْنٌيٌَ ٌْعٌتَ ٌِذ ٌَر) يٌُ ٌَعاٌق‬
ٌِ ‫بٌاٌلْ ٌُم‬
The sinner will be punished unless he provides an excuse.

d. ٌِ ‫ َو ُاو ٌالص ْر‬: i.e., that ‫ ٌَو ٌٌاو‬which “turns away” from the word after it the effect,
After ‫ف‬
which the ‫ل‬ ٌٌ ‫ َع ِام‬had on the word before it (before the ‫)ٌَو ٌٌاو‬.
ٌ‫ب‬ ِ ٌَ ‫( َوٌأَ ْنٌٌتَ ٌْك ٌِذ‬
ٌِ ‫ب) ٌَلٌٌتٌَأْ ٌُم ٌْرٌٌبِالصٌ ٌْد‬
e.g. َ ‫قٌ َوٌٌتَ ٌْك ٌذ‬
Do not command the truth while you lie.
(Here, the ‫او‬ ٌَ ‫ٌتَ ٌْك ٌِذ‬.)
ٌٌ ‫ ٌَو‬turned away/stopped the effect of ‫ ٌَل‬from ‫ب‬
 ٌٌ ‫ ٌَو‬is also known as ‫ َو ُاوٌالْ َمعِيٌِة‬or ‫احبٌَِة‬
This ‫او‬ ٌَ ‫ص‬
ٌَ ‫ َو ُاوٌالْ ُم‬.
 The sentence must start with a ‫ي‬
ٌ ‫ نٌَ ٌْف‬or ‫نٌَ ٌْه ٌي‬. ٌ ٌ

e. ٌِ ‫ٌَل ٌُمٌالتٌ ٌْعٌلٌِْي‬: i.e., that ‫ ٌَل ٌٌم‬which has the meaning of ‫( ٌَك ٌي‬it is also called ‫)ٌَل ٌُمٌٌ ٌَك ٌي‬.
After ‫ل‬
ْ ْ
e.g. ‫ح‬ ٌُ ‫ٌِجٌْئ‬
ٌَ ْ‫تٌٌِْلَ ٌْس ٌَِتٌي‬ ٌَ ْ‫(ِْلَ ْنٌٌأَ ٌْس ٌَِتٌي‬
)‫ح‬
I came so I could rest.

f. After ُ‫الََوابِي ٌة‬

ْ /ُ‫اٌَلْ َفا ٌءٌُالسبَبِي ٌة‬: i.e., that ‫ف‬, which comes in reply to any of the following six:
1. ٌ‫اٌَْْلٌَْمُر‬ e.g. ٌ‫ك‬ ٌْ ِ‫ك)ٌٌُزٌْر‬
َ ‫نٌفٌَأُ ٌْكٌِرَم‬ ٌَ ‫(ٌفٌَأَ ٌْنٌأٌُ ٌْكٌِرٌَم‬
Visit me so that I treat you hospitably.

2. ٌ‫اَلنٌ ٌْه ُي‬ e.g. ٌ‫ضِ ْب‬

ٌَ ‫ٌعٌلٌَْي ُك ٌْمٌ ٌَغ‬ ٌِ َ‫ٌَلٌٌتَ ٌطٌْغٌَْواٌفِْي ٌِوٌفٌَي‬
ٌَ ‫حل‬
Do not cross the limit regarding it, lest, My wrath
descends upon you.

3. ٌ‫اَلنٌ ٌْف ُي‬ e.g. َ ‫ٌَماٌتٌٌَُزٌْوٌُرٌنَاٌفٌٌَنُ ٌْكٌِرٌَم‬

ٌ‫ك‬
You do not visit us, so that we may treat you hospitably.

4. ٌ‫اٌَِْل ٌْسٌتِ ٌْف ٌَه ُام‬ e.g. ٌ‫كٌفٌَأٌَُزٌْوَرَك‬

ٌَ ُ‫أٌٌَيْ ٌَنٌبٌٌَْيٌت‬
Where is your house, so I can visit you.
ِ ًٌ ‫لٌ ٌم‬
5. ٌ‫اَلتٌ ٌَم ِْن‬ e.g. ُ‫الٌفٌَأٌُنٌْف ٌَقٌو‬ َ ٌْ ٌِ‫ت‬
ٌَ ‫ٌلٌَْي‬
I wish I had wealth, so I would have spent it.

6. ٌ‫ض‬
ُ ‫اٌَلْ ٌَعٌْر‬ e.g. ‫ٌخْيًٌٌرا‬
ٌَ ‫ب‬ ٌِ ُ‫أٌٌََلٌتٌٌَْنٌِزٌُلٌٌبٌِنَاٌفٌَت‬
َ ‫صٌْي‬
Why don’t you visit us so that you receive good!

100
 ٌِ ‫ ٌَل ٌُمٌالتٌ ٌْعٌلٌِْي‬if the ‫ ٌَل ٌُمٌالتٌ ٌْعٌلٌِْي ٌِل‬is joined to a ‫ٌَل ٌءٌٌٌنَ ٌافٌِيٌَة‬.
3. ‫ أَ ٌْن‬has to be written after a ‫ل‬
e.g. ٌ‫لِئََّلٌيَ ْعلَ َم‬ ٌَ ‫(ٌِْلَ ْن‬
)‫ٌل‬ So that he does not know.

ٌٍ ‫ص‬
4. ‫ أَ ٌْن‬which appears after a verb with the root letters ‫ عٌ–ٌلٌ–ٌم‬is not a ‫ب‬ ٌْ َ‫فٌٌن‬
ٌُ ‫ ٌَحٌْر‬. Therefore, it
does not give ٌ‫ع‬ ٌَ ‫ ٌفِ ٌْع ٌٌل ٌ ٌُم‬a fathah. Such an ‫ أَ ٌْن‬is known as ‫ أً ْن ٌٌاَلْ ُم َخفٌ َفةُ ٌِم َن ٌالْ ٌُمثٌَقلٌَِة‬i.e., that ‫أَ ٌْن‬
ٌ‫ضاٌِر‬
which was ٌ‫أَن‬.
e.g. ٌ‫ٌسيٌَ ٌُق ٌْوَم‬
ٌَ ‫تٌأَ ْن‬ ٌُ ‫ٌَعٌلِ ٌْم‬ I knew that he will stand up.
e.g. ‫ضى‬ ٌَ ‫ٌَعٌلِ ٌَمٌأَ ْن‬
ٌٰ ‫ٌسٌيَ ٌُك ٌْو ٌَنٌ ٌِمٌْن ٌُك ٌْمٌ ٌَمٌْر‬ He knew that some of you will be sick.

EXERCISE

ٌٍ ٌ‫ص‬
1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and point out the ‫ب‬ ْ َ‫ف ٌٌن‬
ٌُ ‫ ٌَحٌْر‬and its effect in the following
sentences.
i. ‫جيتهدٌالطالبٌلينجح‬
ii. ‫لنٌيفوزٌالكسَّلن‬
iii. ‫جئتٌكيٌأتعلم‬
iv. ‫ملٌيكنٌالشرطيٌليسرق‬
v. ‫لٌتأكلٌحتٌجتوع‬
vi. ‫إنٌاللٌيأمركمٌأنٌتذحبواٌبقرة‬
vii. ‫اصنعٌاملعروفٌفتنالٌالشكر‬
viii. ‫فأرادٌربكٌأنٌيبلغاٌأشدمهاٌوٌيستخرجاٌكنزمها‬

101
Section 4.1.2
ُ‫ْجا ِزَْم ْة‬
َ ْ‫ْفْْال‬
ُ ‫ْرْْو‬
ُ ‫ْح‬
ُ ْ‫ – ْاَل‬Particles That Give Jazm
These are as follows: ٌ‫ٌإِ ْن‬ ْ‫ٌَمل‬ ‫لَما‬ ‫ٌاْل ََمر‬
ْ ‫َل ُم‬ ‫َلءٌُالن ٌْه ٌِي‬
 These appear before ٌ‫ع‬ ٌ‫ضاٌِر‬ ٌَ ‫ ٌفِ ٌْع ٌٌلٌ ٌُم‬and cause the following changes at the end:
˗ They give the last letter a sukoon if it is not a ‫نٌٌُْو ٌن‬.
˗ If the last letter is a ‫نٌٌُْو ٌن‬, it will be dropped. The exception is the ‫ نٌٌُْو ٌن‬of the two
ٌٌ ٌ‫جَْ ٌٌعٌ ٌُم ٌَؤن‬
‫ث‬ ٌ.

Table 4.2
ُ‫فْالْ َجا ِزَْم ْة‬
ُْ ‫حُْرْْو‬
ُْ ْ‫ْاَل‬

ْ‫فْ َْجْْزٍم‬ ُْ ‫َْحْْر‬ Meaning Example

‫ٌإِ ٌْن‬ ٌ‫س‬ ِ ٌَِ ‫ٌإِ ْن‬
if ْ ‫سٌٌأَ ٌْجٌل‬ ْ ‫ٌجتٌل‬
ْ If you sit, I will sit.

ْ‫ٌَمل‬ did not ٌْ ِْ‫ضٌِرب‬

‫ِن‬ ٌْ َ‫َملْ ٌٌي‬ He did not hit me.
‫لَما‬ not yet ‫بٌاٌلٌَْوٌلَ ٌُدٌ ٌَوٌلَماٌيٌَ ٌُع ٌْد‬
ٌَ ‫ٌَذ ٌَى‬ The boy went but has not returned yet.
‫ٌِل‬ should, shall, let ٌْ ِ‫جٌل‬
‫س‬ ٌْ َ‫لٌِي‬ He should sit.
ٌ‫َل‬ do not ٌْ ِ‫ٌجتٌل‬
‫س‬ ٌَْ ‫َل‬ Do not sit.

Notes:
1. ‫ ٌإِ ٌْن‬appears before two verbal sentences. The first one is called ٌ‫شٌْرط‬
ٌَ (condition) and the
second ٌ‫اء‬ ٌ ‫( ٌَجٌَز‬answer/result).
2. If ‫ ٌإِ ٌْن‬appears before ٌ‫ٌإِل‬, it should be translated negatively.
e.g. ٌ‫كٌٌ ٌَكٌِرٌْي‬ ٌَ ‫ٌى ٌَذاٌٌإِل‬
ٌٌ َ‫ٌمٌل‬ ٌٰ ‫ٌإِ ْن‬ He is not but an honorable angel. /
He is only an honorable angel.

3. ‫ف‬
ٌَ should be brought before the ٌ‫ ٌَجٌَز ٌاء‬of a ‫ط‬
ٌ ‫ ٌَشٌْر‬when the ٌ‫ ٌَجٌَز ٌاء‬is one of the following:
ٌِْ ِ‫جٌُْلَةٌٌٌا‬
a. ٌ‫ْسيٌة‬ ٌ e.g. ٌ‫ٌم ٌْكٌَرٌم‬
ٌُ ‫ت‬ ٌْ ِِ‫ٌإِ ْنٌٌتٌَأٌْت‬
َ ْ‫ِنٌفَأَن‬
If you come to me you will be treated hospitably.

b. ٌ‫ٌأٌَْمٌر‬ e.g. ٌَ ْ‫ٌإِ ْن ٌٌَرأٌٌَي‬

ُ‫تٌٌَزٌيْ ًٌداٌفٌَأَ ٌْكٌِرْمٌو‬
If you see Zayd, treat him hospitably.
ِ ٌَ َ‫اكٌٌزٌي ٌدٌف‬
c. ٌ‫نٌَ ٌْهي‬
ٌ e.g. ُ‫َّلٌ ٌُُْنٌو‬ ْ َ ٌَ َ‫ٌإِ ْنٌٌأٌَت‬
If Zayd comes to you, do not humiliate him.

102
 d. ٌٌ‫ٌُد ٌَعاء‬ e.g. ‫اللٌُ ٌَخْيًٌٌرا‬
ٌ ٌ‫اك‬
ٌَ ‫جٌَز‬ ٌْ َِ‫ٌإِ ْنٌٌأَ ٌْكٌَرٌْمت‬
ٌَ َ‫ِنٌف‬
If you treat me hospitably, then, may Allah reward you
well.

ٌِ ‫ اٌَلْ ٌِف ٌْع ٌُلٌاٌلْ ٌَم‬will be translated in the future tense when it is…
4. ‫اضى‬
a. used as a ٌ‫اء‬ ٌ ‫ٌُد ٌَع‬ e.g. ‫ٌخْي ًرا‬
َ ُ‫َجَز َاكٌالل‬
May Allah reward you well.
ٌٍ ‫فٌ ٌَشٌْر‬
b. preceded by ‫ط‬ ٌُ ‫ٌَحٌْر‬ e.g. ٌ‫ت‬
ُ ‫ٌجلَ ْس‬
َ ‫ت‬َ ‫ٌجلَ ْس‬ ِ
َ ‫ٌإ ْن‬
If you sit, I will sit.
c. preceded by ‫ل‬ ٌُ ‫ ٌاِ ٌْس ٌٌمٌ ٌَم ٌْو‬e.g.
ٌٌ‫ص ٌْو‬ ‫شُرٌأ َْمثَ ِاِلَا‬
ٌْ ‫ٌع‬ ِ ْ ِ‫منٌجاءٌب‬
َ ُ‫اْلَ َسنَةٌفَلَو‬ َ َ َْ
Whoever comes with good, there will be ten like it
for him.

EXERCISE

1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and point out the ‫جٌْزٌٍم‬

ٌَ ٌ ‫ف‬
ٌُ ‫ ٌَحٌْر‬and its effect on the following
sentences.

i. ‫ليفتحٌعليٌالنافذة‬ iv. ‫كربٌالغَّلمٌوٌملاٌيتهذب‬

ii. ‫لٌتكثرٌمنٌالضحك‬ v. ‫إنٌيسافرٌأخوكٌأسافرٌمعو‬
iii. ‫اختلفٌالشريكانٌوٌملٌيتفقا‬
ٌ vi. ‫إنٌتنصرواٌاللٌينصركم‬

103
Section 4.2
ِْ ‫ – ْاَْْلَفْ َعالُْْالْ َْع‬Governing Verbs
ُ‫امْلَ ْة‬

ُ ‫ – اَل ِْف ْع ُلْال َْم ْع ُرْو‬Active Verb: It is that verb whose doer is known/mentioned.
ْ‫ف‬
 ‫ف‬ ٌُ ‫اَلْ ِف ْع ُل ٌالْ َم ْعُرْو‬, whether transitive or intransitive, governs the following nouns as and
when applicable:
˗ it gives raf‘ to the ‫ل‬ ٌِ َ‫ٌف‬.
ٌٌ ‫اع‬
˗ it gives nasb to the following, as and when applicable:
ٌُ ‫ ٌاٌَلْ ٌَم ٌْف ٌُعٌْو ٌُلٌٌبٌِِو( ٌاٌَلْ ٌَم ٌْف ٌُعٌْو‬can only be governed by a ‫)اَلْ ِف ْع ُلٌاٌلْ ٌُمتٌَ ٌَعدٌى‬
i. ‫لٌٌبٌِِو‬
ii. ٌ‫طٌْلَ ُق‬ ٌ ‫ٌاٌَلْ ٌَم ٌْف ٌُعٌْو ٌُلٌاٌلْ ٌُم‬
iii. ُ‫لٌ ٌَم ٌَع ٌو‬
ٌُ ‫ٌاٌَلْ ٌَم ٌْف ٌُعٌْو‬
iv. ُ‫لٌٌلٌَو‬
ٌُ ‫ٌاٌَلْ ٌَم ٌْف ٌُعٌْو‬
v. ‫لٌفِْي ٌِو‬
ٌُ ‫ٌاٌَلْ ٌَم ٌْف ٌُعٌْو‬
vi. ٌ‫ال‬
ُ َ‫ٌاَ ٌْْل‬
vii. ٌ‫ٌاَلتٌ ٌِمْيٌ ُز‬

ُْ‫ – اَل ِْف ْع ُلْال َْم ْج ُه ْول‬Passive Verb: It is that verb whose doer is not known/mentioned.
 ‫ل‬ ٌُ ‫ اَلْ ِف ْع ُلٌالْ َم ْج ُه ْو‬is also known as ُ‫اعلٌُو‬ ِ َ‫( فِعلٌماٌ َملٌيسمٌف‬a verb whose faa‘il is not named).
َُ ْ َ ُ ْ
 It gives raf‘ to the ‫ل‬ ِ
ٌٍ ‫اع‬ ِ ِ
ٌُ ‫(ٌاٌَلْ ٌَم ٌْف ٌُعٌْو ٌُلٌٌبٌِو)ٌٌنَاٌئ‬.
ٌ َ‫بٌٌف‬
 It gives nasb to all the remaining mansoobaat.
e.g. ‫اٌفٌ ٌَداٌِرهٌٌٌِتٌَأْ ٌِديٌْبًا‬
ٌْ ِ ‫اٌش ِديْ ًد‬
َ ً‫ىٌض ْرب‬ٌِ ‫ٌالُ ٌُم ٌَع ٌِةٌأ ٌََم َامٌاٌلْ ٌَق‬
َ ‫اض‬ َ ‫ض ِر‬
ٌْ ‫ب ٌَزيْ ٌدٌيٌٌَْوَم‬ ُ
Zayd was beaten severely on Friday, in front of the Judge, in his office, to teach
him manners.

ِ
ُ‫ْل ْالّلْ ِز‬
ْ‫ْم‬ ُْ ‫ْع‬ْ ‫ – ْاَلْْف‬Intransitive Verb: It is that verb whose meaning can be understood without a
‫ٌاٌَلْ ٌَم ٌْف ٌُعٌْو ٌُلٌٌبٌِِو‬.
e.g. ‫ٌزيْ ٌد‬
َ‫س‬َ َ‫َجل‬ Zayd sat.

ُ‫ص ْة‬ ِ ُ ‫اَْلَْفْ ع‬: These were discussed earlier in section 1.8.
َ ‫الْالناق‬ َ

104
Section 4.2.1
‫ْعْدْى‬ ِ
َ َ‫ْمْت‬
ُ ْ‫ْلْال‬
ُ ‫ – اَلْف ْع‬Transitive Verb
Definition: It is that verb whose meaning cannot be understood without a ‫لٌٌبٌِِو‬
ٌُ ‫ٌاٌَلْ ٌَم ٌْف ٌُع ٌْو‬.
e.g. ‫ب ٌَزيْ ٌدٌبَكًْرا‬
َ ‫ضَر‬
َ Zayd hit Bakr.

There are four types of ‫لٌاٌلْ ٌُمتٌَ ٌَعدٌى‬ ِ

ُ ‫اَلْف ْع‬. These are as follows:
1. Those verbs, which require one ‫لٌٌبٌِِو‬
ٌُ ‫ ٌاٌَلْ ٌَم ٌْف ٌُع ٌْو‬as is the case with most verbs.
e.g. ‫ب ٌَزيْ ٌدٌبَكًْرا‬
َ ‫ضَر‬
َ
2. Those verbs, which can be given two ‫لٌٌبٌِِو‬
ٌُ ‫ٌاٌَلْ ٌَم ٌْف ٌعٌُْو‬. These include the following:
 ٌ َ‫( اِ ْعط‬to give).
Any verb, which has the meaning of ٌ‫اء‬
e.g. ٌ‫ب‬ َ ‫َمٌنَ ٌَح َوَى‬ ‫َع ٌٰطى‬
ٌْ ‫ أ‬etc.
ٌُ ‫تٌالسٌ ٌائِ َل‬
‫ٌخْبًٌزا‬ ُ ‫أ َْعطَْي‬ I gave the beggar a bread.
 Some other verbs, which can also have two ‫لٌٌبٌِِو‬ ٌُ ‫ ٌاٌَلْ ٌَم ٌْف ٌعٌُْو‬include the following
ٌَ ‫َسأ‬
‫َل‬ ‫أٌََمٌَر َك َسى‬ etc.
e.g. ‫ْسوٌاٌلْ ٌعٌِْل ُمٌٌأَ ٌْىلٌَوٌُ ٌَوٌقَ ًارا‬
ُ ‫يَك‬ Knowledge clothes its possessor with dignity.

3. Those verbs, which must be given two ‫لٌٌبٌِِو‬

ٌُ ‫ٌاٌَلْ ٌَم ٌْف ٌُع ٌْو‬.
 ِْ ‫الْالْ ُقلُ ْو‬
These verbs are known as ‫ب‬ ُ ‫( أَْفْ َع‬verbs which relate to the heart/feelings).
 They enter upon a ُ‫ ٌُمٌْبٌتَ ٌَدٌأ‬and ‫خبَ ٌٌر‬
َ unlike the verbs above (number 2).

Table 4.3
ِ ‫الْالْ ُقلُ ْو‬
ْ‫ب‬ ُ ‫أَْفْ َع‬

Verb Usage Example

‫ٌَرٌأٰى‬ ٌٌْ ‫(ٌيٌَِق‬
used for certainty )‫ي‬ ٌِ ٌَ‫تٌ ٌَس ٌعٌِْي ًداٌذ‬
‫اىبًا‬ ٌُ ْ‫ٌَرأٌٌَي‬ I was sure Sa‘eed was going.
‫َو َج ٌَد‬ ٌٌْ ‫(ٌيٌَِق‬
used for certainty )‫ي‬ ‫اٌع ٌالِ ًما‬
ٌَ ‫ت ٌٌَرٌِشٌْي ًد‬ُ ‫ ٌَو ٌَج ٌْد‬I was sure Rasheed was
knowledgeable.
ٌ‫َعلِ َم‬ ٌٌْ ‫(ٌيٌَِق‬
used for certainty )‫ي‬ ‫ت ٌٌَزٌيْ ًداٌٌأٌَِمْيٌنًا‬ ِ
ُ ‫ٌَعٌل ٌْم‬ I was sure Zayd was trustworthy.
ٌٌْ ‫(ٌيٌَِق‬
used for certainty )‫ي‬
ٌِ ‫اٌح‬
I was sure Zayd was present. /
ٌ‫َز َع َم‬ ‫اضًرا‬ ٌَ ‫ت ٌٌَزٌيْ ًد‬
ُ ‫ٌَزٌَع ٌْم‬
or doubt )ٌ‫شك‬
ٌَ ( I thought Zayd was present.

ٌ‫ب‬ ِ ٌِ َ‫تٌٌَزٌيْ ًداٌٌف‬ ٌِ ‫ٌَح‬

َ ‫َحس‬ used for doubt )ٌ‫شك‬
ٌَ ( ٌ‫اض ًَّل‬ ٌُ ‫سٌْب‬ I thought Zayd was well-educated.
ٌَ ‫َخ‬
‫ال‬ used for doubt )ٌ‫شك‬
ٌَ ( ‫ٌخ ٌالِ ًداٌٌقَ ٌائِ ًٌما‬
ٌَ ‫ت‬ ُ ‫ٌخٌْل‬
ِ I thought Khalid was standing.
ٌ‫ظَن‬ used for doubt )ٌ‫شك‬
ٌَ ( ‫تٌٌبَ ٌْكًراٌٌنَ ٌائِ ًما‬ُ ‫ٌظَنٌٌَْن‬ I thought Bakr was sleeping.

105
Note: Other verbs, which also require two ‫لٌٌبٌِِو‬
ٌُ ‫ ٌاٌَلْ ٌَم ٌْف ٌعٌُْو‬include the following:
ٌ‫صيٌَر‬
ٌَ to make something something else
e.g. ‫اقٌكِتَابًا‬
َ ‫ٌاْل َْوَر‬
ْ ‫ت‬ ُ ‫صي ْر‬
َ I made the pages a book.

ٌ‫اَِّتَ َذ‬ to take someone/something as someone/something

e.g. ٌ‫ٌخٌلٌِْي ًَّل‬
ٌَ ‫اللٌٌُإِبٌٌْٰرٌِىٌْي َم‬
ٌ ٌ‫َوا ٌَّتَ ٌَذ‬ Allah took Ibraheem (peace be upon him)ٌas a friend.

ٌ‫َج َع َل‬ to make something something else

‫ٌمَرتٌبًا‬ ِ ٌ ‫جعٌْل‬
e.g. ُ ‫اب‬
َ َ‫تٌالْكت‬
ُ ََ I made the book organized.

4. Those verbs which require three ‫ٌاٌَلْ ٌَم ٌْف ٌعُ ٌْو ُلٌ ٌبٌٌِِو‬. Each of these has the meaning
“informing/showing.” These are as follows:

Table 4.4

Verb Example
‫أ َٰرى‬ ‫اٌخ ٌالِ ًداٌٌنَ ٌائِ ًما‬
ٌَ ‫تٌٌَزٌيْ ًد‬ ٌُ ْ‫ٌأٌََرٌأٌَي‬ I informed Zayd that Khalid is sleeping.
ٌ‫ٌأَ ْعلَ َم‬ ًٌ ‫اض‬
‫َّل‬ ٌِ َ‫اٌبَ ٌْكًراٌٌف‬ ٌ ‫ت ٌٌَزٌيْ ًد‬ُ ‫ٌأَ ٌْعٌلَ ٌْم‬ I informed Zayd that Bakr is well-educated.
َ‫أَنْبٌَأ‬ ٌِ َ‫اْلٌَِمْيٌَرٌٌق‬
‫اد ًما‬ ٌْ ٌ‫َنٌا ٌلر ٌُسٌْو ٌُل‬ٌ ِ‫أَنْبَأ‬ The messenger informed me that the chief is
coming.
َ‫نَبٌأ‬ ٌَ ‫نَبأَتُ ُه ْمٌٌاٌَلْ ٌِكْبٌَر‬
‫ٌمٌُْق ٌْوتًا‬ I informed them that arrogance is blameworthy.
ٌ‫َخبَ َر‬
ْ‫أ‬ ‫ٌم ٌِفٌْي ًدا‬
ٌُ ‫ب‬ ِ ‫أٌَ ٌخبٌٌر‬
َ ‫تٌاٌلْ ٌغٌْل ٌَما َنٌاللٌ ٌْع‬
ُ َْ ْ I informed the boys that sport is beneficial.
‫َخب ٌَر‬ ‫ٌمٌتٌَأَخًٌرا‬ ِ ِ
ٌُ ‫تٌالْ ُم َساف ِريْ َنٌاٌلْ ٌق ٌطَ َار‬
ٌُ ‫ٌَخبٌٌْر‬ I informed the travellers that the train is late.
ٌَ ‫َحد‬
‫ث‬ ً‫احةٌٌَنَ ٌافٌَِعٌة‬
ٌَ َ‫ٌاْلٌَْوٌَل َدٌالسٌٌب‬ ٌْ ‫ت‬ ُ ْ‫ٌَحدٌٌث‬ I informed the children that swimming is
beneficial.

EXERCISE

1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and analyse the following sentences.

i. ‫نبأتٌسعيداٌأخاهٌقادما‬ iv. ‫رأيتٌالصلحٌخريا‬

ii. ‫أعطيتٌزيداٌدرمها‬ v. ‫أخربىنٌزيدٌأباهٌمريضا‬
iii. ‫فهمٌسعيدٌالدرس‬ vi. ‫ظننتٌالوٌمعتدل‬

106
Section 4.2.2
ُّ ‫ْو‬
ْ‫الش ُرْو ِع‬ ِ ِ
َ ‫ْْوالر َجاء‬
َ ‫الْال ُْم َق َارْبَْة‬
ُ ‫أَْفْ َع‬

Definition: These verbs behave the same way as ‫ َكا ٌَن‬.

They are used for the following purposes:
1. ‫اربٌٌَِة‬
ٌَ ‫الٌالْ ُم َق‬
ُ ‫ ٌأَفْ َع‬show nearness in the attainment (‫ص ْو ٌُل‬
ُ ُ‫ )ٌاَ ْْل‬of the ‫خبَ ٌٌر‬.
َ
ٌِ ‫الٌالر َج‬
2. ‫اء‬ ٌُ ‫ ٌأَفْ َع‬show desire for attainment of ‫ َخبَ ٌٌر‬.
3. ٌ‫ُّرْوِع‬
ُ‫الٌالش‬
ٌُ ‫ ٌأَفْ َع‬show commencement of action.

Table 4.5
ُّ ‫ْو‬
ِْ ‫الش ُرْو‬
‫ع‬ ِ ِ
َ ‫الْال ُْم َق َْارْبَْةْ َوالر َجاء‬
ُ ‫أَْفْ َع‬

ٌ‫ٌفِ ٌْع ٌل‬ ٌ‫ٌاِ ٌْس ٌم‬ ‫َخبَ ٌٌر‬ Type Example

ٌَ ‫َك‬
‫اد‬ ‫ضاٌِرعٌٌ ٌَرٌفْ ٌٌع‬
ٌَ ‫ ٌُم‬preferably without ‫أَ ٌْن‬ ٌ‫ص ٌْوٌل‬
ٌُ ‫بٌ ٌُح‬
ُ ‫َك َاد ٌَزيْ ٌدٌيَ ْذ َى‬
Zayd was about to
go.
*‫ب‬
ٌَ ‫َكَر‬ ٌ‫ضاٌِرعٌٌ ٌَرٌفْ ٌع‬
ٌَ ‫ ٌُم‬preferably without ‫أَ ٌْن‬ ٌ‫ص ٌْوٌل‬ٌُ ‫سٌ ٌُح‬ ِ َ ‫َكربٌخالِ ٌد‬
ُ ‫ٌجيل‬
Khalid was about to
ْ َ ََ
sit.
ٌ‫ك‬
َ ‫أ َْو َش‬ ٌ‫ٌَرٌفْ ٌع‬ ٌ‫ضاٌِر‬
ٌ‫ع‬ ٌَ ‫ ٌُم‬preferably with ‫أَ ٌْن‬ ‫ص ٌْوٌٌل‬
ٌُ ‫س ٌُح‬ٌَ ِ‫ٌجيل‬ َْ ‫ك ٌَزيْ ٌدٌأَ ْن‬
َ ‫ أ َْو َش‬Zayd was about to sit.
*‫َع ٰسى‬ ‫ٌَرٌفْ ٌٌع‬ ٌ‫ضاٌِر‬
ٌ‫ع‬ ٌَ ‫ ٌُم‬preferably with ‫أَ ٌْن‬ ٌ‫اء‬
ٌ ‫ج ٌَر ٌَج‬ٌَ ‫ىٌزيْ ٌدٌأَ ْنٌ ََيُْر‬
َ ‫َع ٰس‬ Hopefully Zayd will
come out.
*‫ٌطٌَِف ٌَق‬ ٌ‫ٌَرٌفْ ٌع‬ ٌ‫ضاٌِر‬
ٌ‫ع‬ ٌَ ‫ ٌُم‬without ‫أَ ٌْن‬ ٌ‫ع‬
ٌ ‫بٌ ٌُشٌُرٌْو‬ ِ
ُ ُ‫ٌطٌَف َق ٌَزيْ ٌدٌيَكْت‬ Zayd began writing.
*‫َج َع ٌَل‬ ‫ٌَرٌفْ ٌٌع‬ ٌ‫ضاٌِر‬
ٌ‫ع‬ ٌَ ‫ ٌُم‬without ‫أَ ٌْن‬ ٌ‫ع‬
ٌ ‫َج َع َل ٌَزيْ ٌدٌيَ ْقَرٌأُ ٌُشٌُرٌْو‬ Zayd began reading.
*‫َخ ٌَذ‬
َ‫أ‬ ‫ٌَرٌفْ ٌٌع‬ ٌ‫ضاٌِر‬
ٌ‫ع‬ ٌَ ‫ ٌُم‬without ‫ٌأَ ٌْن‬ ٌ ‫َخ َذ ٌَزيْ ٌدٌيَأْ ُك ٌُل ٌُشٌُرٌْو‬
ٌ‫ع‬ َ‫أ‬ Zayd began eating.

* These verbs are used only in past tense.

 The ‫ع‬ ٌِ‫الٌالشُُّرْو‬
ٌُ ‫ ٌأَفٌْ ٌَع‬can be used as normal verbs too.
e.g. ُ‫َخ َذ ٌَزيْ ٌدٌثَ ْوبٌَو‬
َ‫أ‬ Zayd took his clothes.

Sentence Analysis: ٌ‫ٌَيُْر َج‬

َ ‫ىٌزيْ ٌدٌأَ ْن‬
َ ‫َع ٰس‬ Hopefully Zayd will come out.

ْ‫ج‬
َ ‫أَ ْنْيَ ْخ ُر‬ ْ‫َزيْ ٌد‬ ‫َع ٰسى‬
ٌِ َ‫ٌٌف‬+ٌ‫ٌفِ ٌْع ٌٌل‬
)‫اع ٌٌلٌ( ٌُى ٌَو‬

‫ٌع ٰسى‬ ِ ٌ‫ٌفِ ٌْع ٌُلٌ ٌالر ٌَج ِاء‬

َ ‫َخْب ُر‬ ‫ٌع ٰسى‬
َ ‫ا ْس ُم‬

107
 ‫‪EXERCISE‬‬
‫‪1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and analyse the following sentences.‬‬

‫َع ٰسىٌاللٌأنٌيشفيك ‪i.‬‬ ‫أوشكٌأنٌيفتحٌبابٌاملدرسة ‪iv.‬‬

‫اتٌيتفطرن ‪ii.‬‬
‫ٌ‬ ‫تكادٌالسمو‬ ‫أخذتٌأكتب ‪v.‬‬
‫عستٌاملرأةٌأنٌتقوم ‪iii.‬‬ ‫جعلٌرسولٌاللٌميسحٌرأسو ‪vi.‬‬

‫‪108‬‬
Section 4.2.3
‫ْوْالذم‬
َ ‫الْال َْم ْد ِح‬
ُ ‫ – أَفْ َع‬Verbs of Praise and Blame

Verbs of praise: ٌ‫ٌنِ ْع َم‬ e.g. ٌ‫ٌنِ ْع َمٌالر ُج ُل ٌَزيْد‬ What a wonderful man Zayd is!
‫َحب َذا‬ e.g. ‫اٌزيْ ٌد‬
َ ‫َحب َذ‬ What a wonderful man Zayd is!
Verbs of blame: ٌَ ‫بِْئ‬
‫س‬ e.g. ‫سٌالر ُج ُل ٌَزيْ ٌد‬ ِ
َ ‫بْئ‬ What an evil man Zayd is!

َ‫اء‬
ٌ ‫َس‬ e.g. ‫َساءٌَالر ُج ُل ٌَزيْ ٌد‬ What an evil man Zayd is!

 That which appears after the ‫ل‬ ٌِ َ‫ ٌف‬is called ٌِ‫صٌبِالْ َم ْدح‬
ٌٌ ‫اع‬ ٌٌ ‫ص ْو‬ ِ ٌٌ ‫َمَْصو‬.
ُ َْ‫ َم‬or ٌ‫صٌبالذٌم‬ ُْ
 The ‫ل‬ ٌِ َ‫ ٌف‬of ‫سٌ–ٌٌنِ ْع ٌَم‬
ٌٌ ‫اع‬ ٌَ ‫اءٌَ–ٌبِْئ‬
ٌ ‫ َس‬must be one of the following:
i. prefixed with ‫ال‬.
e.g. ٌ‫نِ ْع َمٌالر ُج ُل ٌَزيْد‬ What a wonderful man Zayd is!
ii. ٌ‫اف‬
ٌ ‫ض‬ٌَ ‫ ٌ ٌُم‬to a noun prefixed with ‫ال‬.
ِ ‫اح‬ ِ ٌ‫نِعم‬
e.g. ‫ٌزيْ ٌد‬ َ ‫بٌالْ ٌع ْل ِم‬
ُ ‫ص‬ َ َْ What a wonderful learned man Zayd is!
iii. a hidden ‫ض ٌِمْيٌٌٌر‬ ٌَ followed by a ‫ص ٌْوٌبٌَة‬ ٌُ ‫( ٌنَ ٌِكٌَرةٌٌ ٌَمٌْن‬being ‫)ٌَتِْيٌٌٌز‬.
e.g. ‫ٌزيْ ٌد‬ ِ ِ
َ ‫[ن ْع َمٌ( ٌُى ٌَو)ٌ َر ُج ًَّل ٌَزيْ ٌد] ن ْع َم ٌَر ُج ًَّل‬ What a wonderful man Zayd is!

In ‫اٌزيْ ٌد‬
َ ‫ َحب َذ‬, ٌ ‫ َح‬is the ‫ٌفِ ٌْع ٌٌل‬.
‫ب‬
‫ (ٌاِ ٌْس ٌُمٌٌإِ ٌَش ٌَارةٌٍ)ٌ ٌٰذا‬is its ‫اع ٌٌل‬
ٌِ َ‫ٌف‬.
‫ َزيْ ٌد‬is the ٌِ‫صٌبِالْ َم ْدح‬ ٌٌ ‫ص ْو‬ُ َْ‫َم‬.

Notes:
1. These verbs are used in the past tense in their singular form (masculine or feminine).
2. At times the ٌِ‫صٌبِالْ َم ْدح‬
ٌٌ ‫ص ْو‬
ُ َْ‫ َم‬is dropped.
e.g. ٌ‫نِ ْع َمٌالْ َعْب ُد‬ i.e. ٌ‫ب‬ ِ
ُ ‫ن ْع َمٌالْ َعْب ُدٌأَيُّ ْو‬ What a wonderful slave Ayub is!

Sentence Analysis:

ْ‫َزيْ ٌد‬ ْ‫الر ُج ُل‬ ْ‫نِ ْع َم‬

ٌِ‫صٌبِالْ َم ْدح‬ ٌٌ ‫ص ْو‬
ُ َْ‫ َم‬+ ٌِ َ‫ٌف‬
‫اع ٌٌل‬ + ٌِ‫فِ ْع ُلٌالْ َم ْدح‬

ٌ‫ٌخ ٌَِربية‬ ِِ
َ ٌ‫= جُْلَةٌٌا ْْسية‬ ٌ‫ٌٌم َؤخٌر‬
ُ ‫ُمْبتَ َدأ‬ ٌ‫َخبَ ٌٌرٌ ُم َقد ٌم‬

109
 EXERCISE
1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and analyse the following sentences.

i. ‫نعمتٌالبنةٌفاطمة‬
ii. ‫حبذاٌالتفاق‬
iii. ‫نعمٌاملوىل‬
iv. ‫بئسٌماٌكانواٌيفعلون‬

110
Section 4.2.4
ِ ‫الْالت َع ُّج‬
ْ‫ب‬ ُ ‫ – أَفْ َع‬Verbs of Wonder

ٌَ ‫َّلٌثِ ٌُّيٌاٌلْ ٌُم‬

There are two wazns to express wonder for three letter verbs )‫جٌرٌُد‬ ٌَُّ‫(ٌاَلٌث‬.
1. ٌُ‫ َماٌأَفْ َعلَو‬: ‫ ٌَما‬has the meaning of ‫ي ٌٍء‬
ٌْ ‫ٌش‬
َ ‫َى‬
ُّ ‫أ‬.
e.g. ‫نٌ َزيْ ًدا‬ ٌَ ‫َح َس‬
ْ ‫ َماٌأ‬How wonderful Zayd is!
‫َزيْ ًدا‬ ْ‫س َن‬َ ‫َح‬ ْ‫أ‬ ‫َما‬
ٌ‫ٌَم ٌْف ٌعٌُْوٌٌلٌبِِو‬ + )‫لٌ( ٌُى ٌَو‬ ٌِ َ‫ٌٌف‬+ٌ‫ٌفِ ٌْع ٌٌل‬
ٌٌ ‫اع‬

‫= جُْلٌَةٌاِ ِْْسيةٌٌإِنْ َشائِيٌة‬ )‫ٌخ ٌَِربيٌة‬ ِِ

َ ٌ‫َخبَ ٌٌرٌ(جُْلَةٌٌف ْعلية‬ + ٌ‫ُمْبتَ َدأ‬

2. ‫لٌبٌِِو‬ ِ ٍ ِ ِ
َ ‫أَفْ َع‬: ‫ (ٌف ٌْع ٌُلٌٌأٌَْم ٌر)ٌأَفْع ٌْل‬has the meaning of past tense and the ‫ ب‬is extra )ٌ‫( َزائ ٌَدة‬.
e.g. ‫َح ِس ْنٌبَِزيْ ٌٍد‬ ْ‫أ‬ )‫ٌزيْ ٌد‬
َ ‫َح َس َن‬
ْ ‫(أ‬ How wonderful Zayd is!
‫جُْلَةٌٌفِ ْعلِي ٌةٌإِنْ َشائِيٌة‬
ٌ

 To express wonder for other than three letter verbs )‫جٌرٌِد‬ ٌَُّ‫( ٌَغْيٌٌُرٌالٌث‬, a word such asٌِ‫ٌأَ ْش ِد ٌْدٌب‬/
ٌَ ‫َّلٌثِيٌٌاٌلْ ٌُم‬
ٌ‫َشد‬
َ ‫ٌٌ َماٌأ‬or ‫َح َس ٌَن‬ ِ ‫ أ‬etc. should be placed before the masdar of the desired verb. The
ْ ‫ٌ َماٌأ‬/ٌِ‫َحس َنٌب‬ ْ
masdar will be ‫لٌب ٌو‬ ِ ِ ٌٌ‫ ٌَم ٌْف ٌعُ ٌْو‬, thus mansoob.
e.g. ‫اء‬ ٌِ ‫اسٌلِلْ ُعلَ َم‬ِ ‫َشدٌٌإِ ْكَر َامٌالن‬ َ ‫َماٌأ‬ How very respectful people are towards the
learned.

EXERCISE
1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and analyse the following sentences.

i. ‫أطولٌبزيد‬
ii. ‫ماٌأشدٌبياضٌشعره‬
iii. ‫ماٌأطولٌالرجلي‬

111
Section 4.3
ِْ ‫اءُْالْ َْع‬
ُ‫امْلَ ْة‬ ْ ‫ – ْاَْْلَ ْْس َْم‬Governing Nouns

ٌِ ‫ٌالَفْ َع‬
Amongst these, ‫ال‬ ْ ُ‫َْسَاء‬
ْ ‫ أ‬were discussed in section 2.4.4. Here, we will discuss the rest.

Section 4.3.1
ُ‫ْس َماءُْالش ْر ِطي ْة‬
ْ َ‫ – اَْل‬Conditional Nouns
 They govern two ٌ‫ع‬ ٌَ ‫ ٌفِ ٌْع ٌٌلٌ ٌُم‬giving both a jazm.
ٌ‫ضاٌِر‬
 They appear before two sentences. The first is called ‫ط‬
ٌ ‫( ٌَشٌْر‬condition) and the second
ٌ‫( ٌَجٌَز ٌاء‬result).

Table 4.6
ُ‫اءُْالش ْر ِطي ْة‬
ْ ‫ْاَْْلَ ْْس َْم‬

Noun Meaning Usage Example

1. ‫ن‬
ٌْ ‫َم‬ who, ٌ‫ٌلٌِْل ٌَع ٌاقِ ِل‬ ُ‫ِنٌأٌُ ٌْكٌِرْمٌو‬
ٌْ ِ ‫َم ْن ٌٌيُ ٌْكٌِرْم‬ Whoever treats me hospitably, I
who ever will treat him hospitably.
2. ‫َما‬ what, ٌ‫ٌلٌِغَ ٌِْريٌاٌلْ ٌَع ٌاقِ ِل‬ ٌ‫َماٌٌتٌَأْ ٌُك ْل ٌٌأٰ ٌُك ْل‬ Whatever you eat, I will eat.
whatever
3. ‫َم ْه َما‬ however ٌ‫ٌلٌِغَ ٌِْريٌاٌلْ ٌَع ٌاقِ ِل‬ َ ‫الٌَِْريٌيٌَْنٌ ٌَف ْع‬
ٌ‫ك‬ ٌ ِ ‫َم ْه َماٌتٌُنٌْ ٌِف ْق‬
ٌْ ٌ‫ٌف‬ Whatever you spend in the way of
much good, will benefit you.
4. ‫ت‬
ٌ ٰ ‫َم‬ ِ ‫ٌلِ ٌلزٌم‬
ٌ‫ان‬ ٌ‫ب‬ ْ ‫بٌٌأٌَْذ ٌَى‬ ْ ‫َم ٰتٌٌتَ ٌْذ ٌَى‬
when Whenever you go, I will go.
َ
5. ‫أَيا ٌَن‬ when ٌ ‫ٌلِ ٌلزٌَم‬
ِ‫ان‬ ‫س ٌافِْرٌٌأُ ٌَس ٌافٌِْر‬ ٌَ ُ‫أَيا َنٌت‬ Whenever you travel, I will travel.

6. ‫ن‬
ٌَ ْ‫أَي‬ where ٌِ ‫ٌلٌِْل ٌَم ٌَك‬
‫ان‬ ٌْ ‫بٌأٌٌَْذ ٌَى‬
‫ب‬ ٌْ ‫أَيْ َنٌٌتَ ٌْذ ٌَى‬ Wherever you go, I will go.
7. ‫َىن‬
ٌّٰ ‫أ‬ where ٌِ ‫ٌلٌِْل ٌَم ٌَك‬
‫ان‬ ‫َىنٌتٌٌَْنٌِزْلٌٌأٌَنٌِْزٌْل‬
ّٰ ‫أ‬ Wherever you stay, I will stay.

8. ‫حْيثُ َما‬
َ
where ٌِ ‫ٌلٌِْل ٌَم ٌَك‬
‫ان‬ ‫س ٌافِْرٌٌأُ ٌَس ٌافٌِْر‬
ٌَ ُ‫ٌَحٌْيٌثُ ٌَماٌٌت‬ Wherever you travel, I will travel.

9. ‫َكْيٌ ٌَف َما‬ how, ٌِ ‫ح‬

‫ال‬ ٌَ ‫ٌلٌِْل‬ ٌ‫َكْيٌ ٌَف َماٌتٌَ ٌْق ٌُع ْدٌٌأَقٌْ ٌُع ْد‬ Whichever way you sit, I will sit.
manner
10. ٌ‫أَى‬ any of any of the ٌ‫ب‬
ْ ‫بٌٌأٌَْذ ٌَى‬ ٌٍ ‫ٌم ٌَك‬
ْ ‫انٌٌتَ ٌْذ ٌَى‬ ٌَ ‫َى‬
ُّ ‫أ‬ Whichever place you go, I will go.
the above above

Notes:
1. ‫ ٌإِ ٌْن‬and ‫ ٌإِ ْذ َما‬have the same function as ُ‫ْلَ ْْسَاءٌُالش ْر ِطي ٌة‬ ٌِ ‫( ٌَحٌْرٌفَاٌالشٌٌْر‬
ٌَْ‫ا‬, except that they are particles )‫ط‬
and not nouns. Collectively they are called ‫ط‬ ٌِ ‫اتٌالشٌْر‬ ُ ‫أ ٌََد َو‬.
ٌ‫ٌإِ ْن‬ if e.g. ٌ‫ب‬ ْ ‫بٌأٌٌَْذ ٌَى‬ ٌْ ‫ٌإِ ٌْنٌٌتَ ٌْذ ٌَى‬ If you go, I will go.
‫ٌإِ ْذ َما‬ when e.g. ‫ٌإِ ْذ َماٌتٌَ ٌْف ٌَع ٌْلٌ ٌَشٌراٌتٌٌَْن ٌَد ٌْم‬ If you do evil, you will be regretful.

112
 ٌٌ ‫( ٌاِ ٌْسٌتِ ٌْف ٌَه‬interrogative), they appear before one
2. When the following nouns are used for ‫ام‬
sentence.
ٌ‫أَى‬ ٌ‫َىن‬
ّٰ ‫أ‬ ‫أَيْ ٌَن‬ ٌ‫ت أَيا َن‬ ٌ ٰ ‫َم‬ ‫َما‬ ٌ‫َم ْن‬
e.g. ‫َم ٰتٌتُ َسافٌُِر‬ ٌُ ‫أَيْ َنٌتَ ْذ َى‬
‫ب‬ ٌَ ْ‫َم ْنٌأَن‬
‫ت‬ ‫َماٌ ٰى َذا‬

EXERCISE

1. Complete the following sentences with a suitable ٌ‫اء‬

ٌ ‫ ٌَجٌَز‬.
i. _______ ‫منٌيصنعٌمعروفا‬ iii. _______ ‫ماٌَّتفٌمنٌأعمالك‬
ii. _______ ‫أىنٌينزلٌذوٌالعلم‬ iv. _______ ‫متٌتسافر‬

113
Section 4.3.2
ِ ‫اِسمْالْ َف‬
ْ‫اع ِل‬ ُْ

ٌٌ ‫ (ٌفِ ٌْع ٌٌلٌ ٌَم ٌْعٌُرٌْو‬i.e. it gives raf‘ to the ‫اع ٌٌل‬
Definition: It has the same effect as that of an active verb )‫ف‬ ٌِ َ‫ٌف‬
and nasb to the ‫لٌٌبٌِِو‬
ٌٌ‫ ٌَم ٌْف ٌُعٌْو‬.

Notes:
ٌِ ‫ ٌاِ ٌْس ٌُمٌاٌلْ ٌَف‬is prefixed with ‫ال‬, it could include any of the three tenses.
ٌِ ‫اع‬
1. If the ‫ل‬
e.g. ُ ‫َزٌيْ ٌدٌاَلضا ِر‬
‫بٌأَبُ ْوهٌُبَكًْرا‬ Zayd’s father beat/is beating/will beat Bakr.

ٌِ ٌِ‫ ٌاِ ٌْس ٌُم ٌاٌلْ ٌَفاع‬without ‫ ال‬is often used as ٌ‫اف‬
2. ‫ل‬ ٌ ‫ض‬ٌَ ‫ ٌُم‬to its ‫ ٌَم ٌْف ٌعٌُْوٌٌل ٌٌبٌِِو‬, in which case it would generally
give the meaning of past tense.
e.g. ‫بٌبَ ْك ٌٍر‬ ُ ‫ٌضا ِر‬
َ ‫َزيْ ٌد‬ Zayd is the beater/hitter of Bakr.

ٌِ ‫ ٌاِ ٌْس ٌُم ٌاٌلْ ٌَف‬without ‫ ال‬when preceded by any of the following would give the meaning of
3. ٌ‫اع ِل‬
present or future tense:

a. ٌ‫ٌُمٌْبٌتَ ٌَدأ‬ e.g. ‫بٌأَبُ ْوهٌُبَكًْرا‬ٌ ‫ٌضا ِر‬

َ ‫َزيْ ٌد‬ Zayd’s father is beating/will beat Bakr.
b. ‫ف‬
ٌٌ ‫ص ٌْو‬
ٌُ ‫ٌَم ٌْو‬ e.g. ٌُ‫بٌأَبُ ْوه‬ٍ ‫ٌضا ِر‬َ ‫تٌبَِر ُج ٍل‬
ُ ‫َمَرْر‬ I passed by a man whose father is
beating/will beat Bakr.
‫بَكًْرا‬
c. ‫ل‬ ٌُ ‫ٌاِ ٌْس ٌٌمٌ ٌَمٌْو‬
ٌٌ‫ص ٌْو‬ e.g. ‫بٌأَبُ ْوهٌُبَكًْرا‬ُ ‫نٌالضا ِر‬ ٌ َِ‫َجاء‬ The one whose father is beating/will
beat Bakr came to me.

ٌِ َ‫وٌاْل‬
d. ‫ال‬ ٌْ ُ‫ٌذ‬ e.g. ‫ىن ٌَزيْ ٌد ٌَراكِبًاٌاِبٌْنُوٌُفَ َر ًسا‬
ٌْ َِ‫َجاء‬ Zayd came to me while his son was
riding a horse.

ٌِ ‫ال ٌْسٌتِ ٌْف ٌَه‬

e. ‫ام‬ ٌِْ ٌُ‫ٌَمهٌَْزٌة‬ e.g.
ٌ ‫َضا ِر‬
‫ب ٌَزيْ ٌدٌبَكًْرا؟‬ َ‫أ‬ Is Zayd beating Bakr?/Will Zayd beat
Bakr?
f. ‫ي‬
ٌِ ‫فٌالنٌ ٌْف‬
ٌُ ‫ٌَحٌْر‬ e.g. ٌ‫َماٌقَائِ ٌم ٌَزيْد‬ Zayd is not standing/will not stand.

Sentence Analysis:

‫بَ ْك ًرا‬ ُ‫أَبُ ْوْه‬ ٌْ ‫ضا ِر‬

‫ب‬ َ ْ‫َزيْ ٌد‬
| )‫افٌإِلَْي ٌِو‬ ٌَ ‫افٌ ٌَوٌ ٌُم‬
ٌٌ ‫ض‬ ٌٌ ‫ض‬
ٌَ ‫( ٌُم‬ |

ُ‫ٌَم ٌْف ٌعٌُْوٌلٌُو‬ + ٌِ َ‫ٌف‬

ُ‫اعٌلٌُو‬ ٌِ ‫ٌاِ ٌْس ٌُمٌاٌلْ ٌَف‬
+ ٌ‫اع ِل‬

‫ٌخ ٌَِربيٌة‬ ِِ + ٌ‫ٌُمٌْبٌتَ ٌَدأ‬

َ ٌ‫= جُْلَةٌٌا ْْسية‬ ٌ‫َخبَ ٌر‬

114
 EXERCISE
ِ ‫ ٌاِ ٌس ٌم ٌاٌلْ ٌَف‬in the
ٌِ ٌ‫اع‬
1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and point out the effect and tense of the ‫ل‬ ُْ
following sentences.

i. ‫أذاىبٌصديقنا؟‬ iii. ‫الضاربٌزيدٌبكرا‬

ii. ‫ماٌشاربٌزيدٌالقهوة‬ iv. ‫زيدٌشاربٌالقهوة‬

115
Section 4.3.3
ْ‫ْمْال َْم ْفعُ ْو ِل‬ ِ
ُ ‫ا ْس‬

ٌٌ‫)ٌفِ ٌْع ٌٌلٌ ٌَْم ٌُه ٌْو‬, i.e. it givesٌraf‘ to the

Definition: It has the same effect as that of a passive verb (‫ل‬
ٌ‫اعِ ِل‬ ٌُ ِ‫ٌنَ ٌائ‬.
ٌ ‫بٌاٌلْ ٌَف‬
 The rules mentioned above regarding the ‫ل‬ ٌِ ‫ ٌاِ ٌْس ٌُمٌاٌلْ ٌَف‬also apply here.
ٌِ ‫اع‬
Examples:
a. ٌ‫ٌُمٌْبٌتَ ٌَدأ‬ ِ ‫زي ٌدٌمضرو‬
ُ‫بٌابْنٌُو‬
e.g. Zayd’s son is being beaten/will be
ٌ ْ ُ ْ َ َْ
beaten.
b. ‫ف‬
ٌٌ ‫ص ٌْو‬
ٌُ ‫ٌَم ٌْو‬ ِ ٍ ‫مررتٌبِرج ٍلٌمضرو‬
ُ‫بٌابْنٌُو‬
e.g. I passed by a man whose son is being
ُْ ْ َ ُ َ ُ َْ َ
beaten/will be beaten.

c. ‫ل‬ ٌُ ‫ٌاِ ٌْس ٌٌمٌ ٌَمٌْو‬

ٌٌ‫ص ٌْو‬ e.g. ِ ‫جاءِىنٌالْمضرو‬
ُ‫بٌابْنٌُو‬
ُ ُْ ْ َ ْ َ َ
The one whose son is being
beaten/will be beaten, came to me.

ٌِ َ‫وٌاْل‬
d. ‫ال‬ ٌْ ُ‫ٌذ‬ ِ ِ
ُ‫ضُرْوبًاٌابْنٌُو‬
ْ ‫ٌم‬
َ ‫ىن ٌَزيْ ٌد‬
ْ َ‫َجاء‬
e.g. Zayd came to me while his son was
being beaten/will be beaten.

ٌِ ‫ال ٌْسٌتِ ٌْف ٌَه‬

e. ‫ام‬ ٌِْ ٌُ‫ٌَمهٌَْزٌة‬ e.g. ‫ب ٌَزيْ ٌد؟‬
ٌ ‫ضُرْو‬
ْ ‫أ ََم‬ Is Zayd being beaten?/Will Zayd be
beaten?

f. ‫ي‬
ٌِ ‫فٌالنٌ ٌْف‬
ٌُ ‫ٌَحٌْر‬ e.g. ٌ‫ب ٌَزيْد‬
ٌ ‫ضُرْو‬
ْ ‫اٌم‬
َ ‫َم‬
Zayd is not being beaten /will not be
beaten.

EXERCISE

ٌِ‫ اِ ْس ُم ٌالْ َم ْف ُع ْو‬in the

1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and point out the effect and tense of the ‫ل‬
following sentences.

i. ‫خربه‬
ٌ ٌ‫زيدٌمسموع‬ ii. ‫خالدٌمعلمٌابنوٌاْلياكة‬

116
Section 4.3.4
ِ ‫شب هةُْْبِاس ِمْالْ َف‬
ْ‫اع ِل‬ ِ ‫اِْسْمْْاْلْ َف‬
ِْ ‫ْاع‬
ْ َ َ ‫ – اَلص َفةُْال ُْم‬That Adjective Which Is Similar to ‫ْل‬ ُْ

ٌُّ ِ‫( اَلث ََُّّلث‬three-letter

Definition: It is a noun, which is created from the masdar of a ‫ي ٌالَّلٌِزٌُم‬
intransitive verb) to indicate permanent existence of the meaning in the doer.

 ٌٌَ‫ٌفِ ٌْع ٌٌل‬, it generally gives the ‫اع ٌٌل‬

Like its ‫لٌِزٌٌم‬ ٌِ َ‫ ٌف‬a raf‘.
e.g. ُ‫َح َس ٌن ٌَو ْج ُهٌو‬ His face is beautiful.

 It shows the meaning of permanency in the object it relates to e.g. ‫ن‬

ٌٌ ‫( َح َس‬beautiful) is a
permanent quality, as compared to ‫ل‬ ٌ ٌ‫ٌاِ ٌْس ٌُم ٌاٌلْ َف‬, which indicates a temporary meaning
ٌِ ِ‫اع‬
ٌٌ ‫ضا ِر‬
e.g. ‫ب‬ َ is a temporary quality, which exists only at the time of the action.
 ٌُّ ِ‫( اَلث ََُّّلث‬three-letter intransitive verb) and
All such nouns, which are derived from a ‫ي ٌالَّل ِزٌُم‬
ٌِ ‫ ٌاِ ٌْس ٌُمٌاٌلٌَْف‬but are not on its wazn, are ‫شبٌ ٌَهٌة‬
ٌِ ‫اع‬
give the meaning of ‫ل‬ ٌِ .
ٌَ ‫ص ٌَفٌةٌ ٌُم‬

ْ‫شب َه ِة‬
َ ‫أ َْوَزا ُنْالص َف ِةْال ُْم‬
Some of the common wazns of ٌ‫شبٌ ٌَهة‬ ٌِ (based on usage) are as follows:
ٌَ ‫ص ٌَفةٌٌ ٌُم‬
ٌ‫فَعِ ٌل‬ e.g. ٌ‫ِح‬ٌ ‫فَر‬ happy
‫فَ َع ٌٌل‬ e.g. ‫َح َس ٌٌن‬ beautiful
‫فَعِْي ٌٌل‬ e.g. ٌٌ ْ‫ٌَش ِري‬
‫ف‬ noble/honorable
ٌٌ ‫فَ َع‬
‫ال‬ e.g. ‫َجبَا ٌن‬ coward
ٌٌ ‫فُ َع‬
‫ال‬ e.g. ٌ‫اع‬ ٌ ‫ُش َج‬ brave

 Colors and bodily defects appear on the following wazns:

ٌ‫أَفْ َع ُل‬ (masculine) e.g. ٌ‫َْحَُر‬
ْ‫أ‬ red
‫أَبْ َك ٌُم‬ mute

ُ‫( فَ ْع ََّل ٌء‬feminine) e.g. ُ‫ْحََْر ٌاء‬ red

ُ‫اء‬
ٌ ‫ْم‬ َ ‫بَك‬ mute

 The ٌ‫شبٌ ٌَهة‬ ٌِ of non-three letter verbs )‫جٌرٌِد‬

ٌَ ‫ص ٌَفةٌٌ ٌُم‬ ٌَ ‫َّلٌثِيٌ ٌاٌلْ ٌُم‬
ٌَُّ‫ ( ٌَغْيٌٌُر ٌالٌث‬is brought on the wazn of its
ٌِ ‫ ٌاِ ٌْس ٌُمٌاٌلْ ٌَف‬on the condition that permanency of meaning is intended.
‫اع ٌِل‬
e.g. ٌ‫ُم ْستَ ِقْي ٌم‬ straight

117
Section 4.3.5
ِ ‫اِسمْالت ْف‬
ْ‫ض ْي ِل‬ ُْ
Definition: It is that noun, which indicates that a quality is found to a greater extent in one
person/thing when compared to another.
e.g. ‫ٌع ْم ٍرو‬ ِ ِ
َ ‫َخال ٌدٌأَ ْش َج ُعٌم ْن‬ Khalid is more courageous than ‘Amr.

Table 4.7
ِ ‫أَوَزا ُن ْْاِس ِمْالت ْف‬
ْ‫ض ْي ِل‬ ْ ْ
Masculine Example Feminine Example Meaning
Singular ٌ‫أَفْ َع ُل‬ ٌ‫أَ ْكبَ ُر‬ ٌ‫لى‬ٰ ‫فُ ْع‬ ٌ‫ُك ْرب ٰى‬ Bigger/older
Dual ‫أَفْ َع ََّل ٌِن‬ ٌِ ‫أَ ْكبَ َر‬
‫ان‬ ٌِ َ‫فُ ْعلَي‬
‫ان‬ ٌِ َ‫ُكْب َري‬
‫ان‬ Bigger/older
Plural ‫ٌأَفْ َعلُ ْو ٌَن‬ ‫أَ ْكبَ ُرْو ٌَن‬ ٌٌ َ‫فُ ْعلَي‬
‫ات‬ ٌٌ َ‫ُكْب َري‬
‫ات‬ Bigger/older
‫اع ٌُل‬ ِ َ‫أَف‬ ‫أَ َكابٌُِر‬ ‫فُ َع ٌٌل‬ ‫ُكبَ ٌٌر‬ Bigger/older

Usage:
ِ ‫ اِسمٌالت ْف‬is used in three ways.
ٌ‫ضْي ِل‬ ُْ
1. With ‫ن‬ ٌْ ‫ ِم‬: the ‫ضْي ٌِل‬ ِ ‫ اِسمٌالت ْف‬will always be a singular masculine )‫( ٌمٌَذكٌ ٌرٌ ٌم ٌْفٌرٌٌد‬.
ُْ ٌَُ ُ
ِ
e.g. ‫َزيْ ٌدٌٌأَ ٌْعٌلَ ٌُمٌم ْنٌبَ ْك ٌٍر‬ Zayd is more knowledgeable than Bakr.
ٌَ َ‫َعائِ َشةٌُأَ ْكبَ ُر ٌِم ْن ٌَزيْن‬
‫ب‬ ‘Aishah is older than Zaynab.
ِ ‫ اِسمٌالت ْف‬must correspond with the word before it in gender and number.
ٌِ ‫ضْي‬
2. With ‫ال‬: the ‫ل‬ ُْ
ِ ‫انٌ َغائِب‬
ٌ‫ان‬ ِ ٌْ ‫َزي َد ِان‬
e.g. َ ٌ ‫ٌاْلَ ٌْعٌلَ ٌَم‬ ْ The two more knowledgeable Zayds are absent.
ِ ِ
ٌ‫َعائ َشةٌُاٌلْ ٌُكْبٌٌٰرىٌ َحاضَرة‬ The older ‘Aishah is present.
ِ ‫ اِسمٌالت ْف‬may be ‫اح ٌدٌ ٌمٌَذكٌ ٌر‬
ٌَ ِ‫ٌإ‬: the ‫ضْي ٌِل‬
3. With ٌ‫ضاٌفَة‬ ِ
ُْ ٌ ُ ٌ ‫ ٌَو‬or it may correspond with the word before it.
e.g. ٌ‫َزيْ ُد ْو َنٌٌأَ ٌْعٌلَ ٌُمٌالْ َق ْوِم‬ ٌ‫َزيْ ُد ْو َنٌأٌَ ٌْعٌلَ ٌُم ْواٌالْ َق ْوِم‬
The Zayds are the most knowledgeable of people.

ٌ‫َزيْ َد ِانٌٌأَ ٌْعٌلَ ٌُمٌالْ َق ْوِم‬ ٌ‫َزيْ َد ِانٌأٌَ ٌْعٌلَ ٌَماٌالْ َق ْوِم‬
The two Zayds are the most knowledgeable of people.
ِ ‫َعائِ َشةٌُأَ ْكبَ ُرٌالن‬
ٌ‫اس‬ ِ ‫َعائِ َشةٌٌُ ٌُكْبٌٌٰرىٌالن‬
ٌ‫اس‬
‘Aishah is the oldest of people.

118
Notes:
ِ ‫ اِسم ٌالت ْف‬of words, which indicate color, physical defects and of ‫جٌرٌِد‬
1. ٌ‫ضْي ِل‬ ٌَ ‫َّلٌثِيٌ ٌاٌلْ ٌُم‬
ٌَُّ‫ ٌَغْيٌٌُر ٌالٌث‬verbs is
ُْ
made by placing the words ‫َش ٌُّد‬ َ ‫أ‬, ‫أَ ْكثَ ٌُر‬, etc. before the masdar of that word. The masdar will
be the tameez, and therefore, will be mansoob.

e.g. ٌ‫َشدٌُّْحَُْرةً ٌِم ْن ٌَزيْ ٍد‬

َ ‫ُى َوٌأ‬ He is redder than Zayd.
‫اٌم ْن ٌَزيْ ٌٍد‬
ِ ‫َشدٌُّعرج‬
ً ْ َ َ ‫ُى َوٌأ‬ He is lamer than Zayd.
ِ ‫ىوٌأَ ْكثَرٌاِجتِهاد‬
‫اٌم ْن ٌَزيْ ٌٍد‬ ً َ ْ ُ َُ He is more hard-working than Zayd.
ِ ِ
َ and ٌ‫ َشر‬are also used for ‫ا ْس ُمٌالت ْفضْي ٌِل‬.
2. The words ‫خْي ٌٌر‬

ِ ‫ٌشُّرٌالن‬
ٌ‫اس‬ ِ
e.g. َ ُ‫اَلظامل‬ The oppressor is the worst of people.
ِ ‫ اِسمٌالت ْف‬gives its hidden dameer a raf‘.
3. ٌ‫ضْي ِل‬ ُْ
ِ ‫زي ٌدٌأَفْضل‬
e.g. ‫ٌم ْنٌبَ ْك ٌٍر‬ ُ َ َْ Zayd is more virtuous than Bakr.
The dameer ‫ ٌُى ٌَو‬in ‫ل‬
ٌُ ‫ض‬ ٌِ َ‫ٌف‬.
َ ْ‫ أَف‬is its ‫اع ٌٌل‬

EXERCISE
ِ ‫ اِسمٌالت ْف‬in the following sentences.
ٌِ ‫ضْي‬
1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and explain the usage of ‫ل‬ ُْ
i. ‫بعضٌاْليواناتٌأقٌوىٌمنٌاْلنسان‬ v. ‫النساءٌالفضليات‬
ii. ‫اْلنبياءٌأفضلٌالناس‬ vi. ‫اْلنبياءٌأفاضلٌالناس‬
iii. ‫مريٌفضلىٌالنساء‬ vii. ‫الرجَّلنٌاْلفضَّلن‬
iv. ‫أولئكٌىمٌخريٌالربية‬ viii. ‫ثوبكٌأشدٌسواداٌمنٌثويب‬

119
Section 4.3.6
ْ‫ص َد ُر‬
ْ ‫اَل َْم‬
Definition: It is that noun which refers to the action indicated by the corresponding verb
without any reference to time.

Effect: It has the same effect as that of its verb i.e. it gives raf‘ to the ‫ل‬ ٌِ َ‫ ٌف‬and nasb to the ٌ‫ٌَم ٌْف ٌُع ٌْوٌٌل‬
ٌٌ ‫اع‬
ٌ‫بِِو‬.
e.g. ‫بٌالْيَ ْوَم ٌَزيْ ٌدٌبَكًْرا‬
َ ‫ٌض ْر‬
َ ‫ت‬ُ ْ‫َرأَي‬ Today, I saw Zayd’s beating of Bakr.

Usage:
Masdar is generally used in one of the following ways:
 as a ‫اف‬ ٌٌ ‫ض‬ ٌِ َ‫ٌف‬.
ٌَ ‫ ٌُم‬to its ‫اع ٌٌل‬
e.g. ‫ب ٌَزيْ ٍدٌبَكًْرا‬
َ ‫ٌض ْر‬
َ ‫ت‬ُ ‫َك ِرْى‬ i.e. )‫ْرا‬ َ ‫ض ِر‬
ً‫ب ٌَزيْ ٌدٌبَك‬ ْ َ‫(أَ ْنٌي‬ I disliked Zayd’s beating of
Bakr.
 as a ‫اف‬ ٌَ ‫ ٌُم‬to its ‫ ٌَم ٌْف ٌُعٌْوٌٌلٌبٌِِو‬.
ٌٌ ‫ض‬
َ ‫بٌبَ ْك ٍر‬
e.g. ‫ٌزيْ ٌد‬ َ ‫ٌض ْر‬
َ ‫ت‬ ُ ‫َك ِرْى‬ i.e. )‫اٌزيْ ٌد‬ َ ‫ض ِر‬
َ ‫بٌبَكًْر‬ ْ َ‫(أَ ْنٌي‬ I disliked Zayd’s beating of
Bakr.
EXERCISE
1. Fill in the i‘raab and explain the usage of the masdar in the following sentences.

i. ‫سرىنٌقراءةٌرشيدٌالقرٌاٰن‬ iii. ‫إكرامٌالعربٌالضيفٌمعروف‬

ii. ‫حبكٌالشيءٌيعميٌوٌيصم‬ iv. ‫وٌللٌعلىٌالناسٌحجٌالبيتٌمنٌاستطاعٌإليوٌسبيَّل‬

Section 4.3.7
ْ‫اف‬
ُ ‫ض‬َ ‫اَل ُْم‬
In the case of mudaaf, it is assumed that one of the following prepositions )ٌ‫جر‬
ٌَ ٌ‫ف‬
ٌُ ‫ ( ٌُحٌُرٌْو‬is hidden
between the mudaaf and mudaaf ilayhi.
 ٌ‫ِم ْن‬ ٌٌ ‫ ( ٌِجٌْن‬of the mudaaf ilayhi.
when the mudaaf is a part/type )‫س‬
e.g. ٌ‫َخ َاَتٌُفِض ٍة‬ i.e. ٌ‫َخ َاَتٌ ٌِم ْنٌفِض ٍة‬ silver ring

 ٌ‫ِ ْف‬ when the mudaaf ilayhiٌis a ‫ف‬

ٌٌ ‫ ٌظٌَْر‬.
e.g. ٌ‫َّلةٌُاللْي ِل‬
ٌَ ‫ص‬َ i.e. ٌ ِ ٌ‫َّلة‬
ٌ‫ٌفٌاللْي ِل‬ ٌَ ‫ص‬َ night prayer

 ٌ‫ِل‬ when it is neither of the above two.

e.g. ٌ‫اِبْ ٌُنٌ َزيْ ٍد‬ i.e. ٌ‫اِبْ ٌٌنٌلَِزيْ ٍد‬ Zayd’s son

120
Section 4.3.8
ْ ‫اَِْل‬
ُّْ‫ْس ُمْالتام‬

Definition: It is that noun, which would give the noun )‫ (ٌَتِْيٌٌٌز‬after it a nasb.
 A noun will be considered as ٌ‫ ٌتَام‬when it has one of the following:
a. tanween.
‫حابًا‬ ٌَ ‫اح ٍة‬
ٌَ ‫ٌس‬ ِ ٌ ِ ‫ٌَم‬ )‫اح ٌٍة‬
e.g. َ ‫اٌفٌالسٌ ٌَم ٌاءٌٌقَ ٌْد ٌُرٌ َر‬ َ ‫( َر‬
There is not even palm’s measure of clouds in the sky.
b. hidden tanween.
ٌ‫ٌع َشَر ٌَر ُج ًَّل‬ ِ
e.g. َ ‫َح َد‬
َ ‫َمع ٌْيٌأ‬ (‫شٌَر‬
َ ‫ٌع‬
َ ‫َح َد‬
َ ‫ أ‬was originally ‫ٌع َشٌٌر‬
َ ‫َح ٌد ٌَو‬
َ ‫)أ‬
There are eleven men with me.

c. ‫ ن‬of a dual noun.

e.g. ‫يٌفَِقْي َز ِانٌبُرا‬
ٌْ ‫ٌِعٌْن ٌِد‬ ٌِ ‫(فَ ِقْي َز‬
)‫ان‬
I have two qafeezes1 of wheat.

d. ٌِ ‫جَْ ٌُعٌ ٌُمٌَذكٌ ٌٍرٌ ٌَس‬

‫ ن‬which resembles the ‫ ن‬of a sound masculine plural )ٌ‫امل‬ ٌ (.
ِ ‫يٌ ِع ْشرو َن‬
‫ٌد ْرَمهًا‬ ِِ ْ ‫( ِع‬
e.g. ْ ُ ٌْ ‫ٌعٌْن ٌد‬ )‫ش ُرْو ٌَن‬
I have twenty dirhams.

ٌَِْ‫ ا‬in the above examples cannot be mudaaf while having a tanween or having a
The ٌُّ‫ل ْس ُم ٌالتام‬
noon of dual/plural, thus the noun after it gets a nasb because of it being ‫ٌَتِْيٌٌٌز‬.

1
A qafeez is a classical Islamic measure of weight.

121
Section 4.3.9
ْ‫ْكنَايَِة‬
ِ ‫أَْسماءْال‬
ُ َْ

Definition: It is that noun, which indicates an unspecified quantity.

 It is clarified by the noun following it.
 These are ‫ َك ٌْم‬and ‫ َك َذا‬.

ٌٌ ‫ (ٌاِ ٌْسٌتِ ٌْف ٌَه‬or as an informative exclamation

ْ‫ َْك ْم‬: can be used in two ways: as an interrogative )‫ام‬
ٌَِ ‫( ٌَخ‬.
)‫ربيٌ ٌة‬

ِ ‫( – َكمْاَِْلستِ ْفه‬how many)

1. ُ‫اميْ ْة‬ َ ْ ْ
 It gives the noun )‫ (ٌَتِْيٌٌٌز‬after it a nasb.
 The ‫ ٌَتِْيٌٌٌز‬is brought singular.
ِ ‫َكمٌكِت ٌاب‬
ٌ‫اٌعْن َد َك‬
e.g. ًَ ْ How many books do you have?
 At times, the preposition ‫ن‬ ٌْ ‫ ِم‬appears before the ‫ٌَتِْيٌٌٌز‬.
e.g. ‫ك‬ ٌَ ‫ابٌعِْن َد‬
ٍ َ‫َكم ٌِمنٌكِت‬
ْ ْ How many books do you have?

2. ُ‫خبَ ِري ْة‬

َ ْ‫( – َك ْمْاَل‬so many)
 It gives the noun )‫ (ٌَتِْيٌٌٌز‬after it a jarr (because of it being a mudaaf ilayhi).
 The ‫ ٌَتِْيٌٌٌز‬may be singular or plural.
ٌ‫ت‬ ٍ ‫َكم‬
e.g. َ ‫ٌمالٌأَنْ َف ْق‬
َْ So much of wealth you have spent!
 At times the preposition ‫ ِم ٌْن‬appears before the ‫ٌَتِْيٌٌٌز‬.
ِ ‫ٌفٌالس ٰم ٰو‬
ٌ‫ت‬ ٍ َ‫ َكم ٌِمنٌمل‬There are so many angels in the skies/heavens.
ٌِ ‫ك‬
e.g. َْ ْ

‫( – َك َذا‬so much, such and such)

 It gives the noun )‫ (ٌَتِْيٌٌٌز‬after it a nasb.
 The ‫ ٌَتِْيٌٌٌز‬is brought singular.
ِ ‫يٌٌ َك َذ‬
e.g. ‫اٌد ْرَمهًا‬ ٌْ ‫ِعْن ٌِد‬ I have this much dirhams.

EXERCISE

1. What is the difference between the following sentences.

i. ‫كمٌكتاباٌقرأت‬ ٍ
ii. ‫كمٌكتابٌقرأت‬

122
Section 4.3.10
ْ‫اِ ْس ُمْال ُْمبَالَغَ ِة‬

Definition: It is that noun, which shows extremity/intensity in meaning.

Some of the wazns of ٌ‫ ٌُمٌبَاٌلٌَغَة‬are as follows:

ٌ‫فَعِْي ٌل‬ ٌ‫َعلِْي ٌم‬ most learned
‫اع ْوٌٌل‬ ُ َ‫ف‬ ٌٌ ‫ٌفَ ُارْو‬
‫ق‬ great distinguisher
ٌٌ ‫فَع‬
‫ال‬ ٌٌ ‫ضح‬
‫اك‬ َ excessive jester
‫فَعُّ ْوٌٌل‬ ‫قَيُّ ْوٌٌم‬ careful maintainer/sustainer
‫ِم ْفعِْي ٌٌل‬ ‫ِمْن ِطْي ٌٌق‬ very eloquent

Notes:

1. The round ‫ ة‬at the end of some wazns is for ‫ ٌُمٌبَاٌلٌَغٌَة‬and not for gender.
e.g. ‫فَعٌالٌَة‬ ‫َعَّل َمٌة‬ well-learned

2. The wazn ‫ال‬

ٌٌ ‫ فَع‬is also used to denote a profession.
e.g. ٌ‫اخ‬
ٌ ‫طَب‬ cook ٌ‫ََن ٌار‬ carpenter

123
Section 4.4
ِْ ‫فْالْ ْغَْيْ ُْرْالْ َْع‬
ْ‫امْلَ ِة‬ ُْ ‫ح ُْرْْو‬
ُْ ْ‫ – ْاَل‬Non-Governing Particles

1. ‫فْالت ْنبِْي ِْو‬

ُ ‫ – ُح ُرْو‬Particles of Notification:
These are used to draw the attention of the listener. These are as follows:
ٌ‫أََل‬ ‫أ ََما‬ ‫َىا‬ meaning Lo! / Behold! / Take heed!
e.g. ‫اٌزيْ ٌدٌنَائِ ٌٌم‬
َ ‫أ ََم‬ Behold! Zayd is sleeping.
‫ٰى َذا‬ This
ٌٌ ْ‫صَرٌاللٌِقَ ِري‬
‫ب‬ ِ
ْ َ‫أََلٌانٌن‬ Behold! Indeed, Allah’s help is near.
ِ ‫ىاٌأَنَاٌح‬
‫اضٌٌر‬ َ َ Lo! I am present.

ِ ‫ْالْيْ َج‬
2. ْ‫اب‬ ِْ ‫ف‬ُ ‫ – ُح ُرْو‬Particles of Affirmation:
These are used for affirmation of a statement made earlier. These are as follows:

ٌ‫نَ َع ْم‬ ٌ‫لى‬

ٰ َ‫ب‬ ٌ‫َج ْل‬
َ‫أ‬ ٌ‫ٌإِ ْي‬ ٌ‫َج ِْري‬ ‫ٌإِ ٌن‬
ْ‫( – نَ َع ْم‬yes)
 It is used to verify a statement, be it positive or negative. For example,
˗ If someone says ‫ٌزيْ ٌد‬ َ َ‫َجاء‬
َ ‫( أ‬Did Zayd come?), the reply will be ٌ‫( نَ َع ْم‬yes)
meaning ‫ٌزيْ ٌد‬
َ َ‫( َجاء‬he came).
˗ If someone says ‫ٌزيْ ٌد‬
َ َ‫اٌجاء‬
َ ‫( أ ََم‬Has Zayd not come?), the reply will be ‫( نَ َع ٌْم‬yes)
meaning ‫ٌزيْ ٌد‬
َ َ‫اٌجاء‬
َ ‫( َم‬He did not come.).
ْ‫لى‬
ٰ َ‫( – ب‬yes, why not)
 It is used to convert a negative statement into a positive one.
e.g. If someone says ‫ٌزيْ ٌد‬
َ ‫( َملْ ٌيَ ُق ْم‬Zayd did not stand up.), the reply will be ‫لى‬
ٌٰ َ‫ب‬
(yes, why not) meaning ‫ٌزيْ ٌد‬ َ ‫( قَ ْدٌقَ َام‬Zayd has stood up.).
ْ‫( – ْإِ ْي‬yes)
 It is the same as ‫نَ َع ٌْم‬. However it is used with an oath )‫س ٌٌم‬
ٌَ َ‫ (ٌق‬after a question.
If someone says ‫ٌزيْ ٌد‬ ٌِ ‫ي ٌو‬ ِ
e.g. َ ‫( أَقَ َام‬Did Zayd stand up?), the reply will be ‫ٌالل‬ َ ٌْ ‫ٌإ‬
(yes, by Allah!) meaning ‫ٌزيْ ٌد‬ َ ‫( قَ َام‬Zayd stood up.).

124
 َ ‫ أ‬/ْ‫ْ َج ْي ِر‬/ ْ‫( – ْْإِن‬yes)
ْ‫َج ْل‬
 It is the same as ‫نَ َع ٌْم‬.
e.g. If someone says ‫ٌزيْ ٌد‬َ َ‫( َجاء‬Zayd came.), the reply will be ٌ‫ ٌإِن‬or ‫ َج ٌِْري‬or ‫َج ٌْل‬
َ‫أ‬
(yes) meaning ‫ٌزيْ ٌد‬
َ َ‫( َجاء‬Zayd came.).
Note: ٌ‫ ٌإِن‬is very rarely used for this purpose.

3. ‫ – َحْْرفَاْالت ْف ِس ْي ِْر‬Particles of Clarification:

These are used to clarify a word in a sentence. These are as follows:
ٌْ َ‫أَ ٌْن ٌأ‬
‫ي‬ (that is)
e.g. ٌ‫يٌأ َْى َلٌالْ َق ْريَِة‬ ٌْ َ‫اسئَ ِلٌالْ َق ْريٌَةٌٌَأ‬
ْ ‫َو‬ And ask the town, that is, the people of the town.
‫َوٌنَ َاديْنَاهٌُأَ ْنٌيٌٌٰإِبْ ٰرِىْي ٌُم‬ And We called him, that is, O Ibraheem!

4. ُْ‫ص َد ِرية‬
ْ ‫فْال َْم‬
ُ ‫ْح ُرْو‬
ُ ْ‫اَل‬: These are used to give a masdary meaning. These are as follows:
‫َما‬ ٌ‫أَ ْن‬ ٌ‫أَن‬
 ‫ َما‬and ‫ أَ ٌْن‬come before a ‫جٌُْلٌَةٌٌفٌِْعٌلِيٌٌة‬ ٌ.
 ٌ‫ ٌأَن‬comes before a ‫ْسيٌٌة‬ ٌِْ ِ‫جٌُْلٌَةٌٌا‬
ٌ.
e.g. ‫ت‬ ٌْ َ‫اٌر ٌُحب‬ ُ ْ ُ ْ َ ْ ٌَ ٌ‫)ب ُر ْحبِ َها( إِذَا‬
ِ ‫ضاقَتٌعلَي ِه ٌمٌ ْاْلَر‬ ِ
َ َ‫ضٌِب‬
When the earth became straitened for them despite its vastness.

ٌ‫ص ْد َق‬ ُ َ‫نٌأَ ْنٌت‬ ٌْ ِ‫يَ ُسُّر‬ ٌَ ُ‫) ِص ْدق‬

(‫ك‬ Your truthfulness pleases me.

‫ِنٌأَن ٌَزيْ ًداٌنَائِ ٌٌم‬ٌْ َِ‫بَلَغ‬ (ُ‫)نَ ْوُم ٌو‬ (News of) his sleeping reached me.

Note: ‫ أَ ٌْن‬and ٌ‫ أَن‬are governing particles.

ِ ‫فْالتح‬
ِْ ‫ض ْي‬
5. ‫ض‬ ْ ُ ‫ – ُح ُرْو‬Particles of Exhortation:
ٌُ ‫اٌَلْ ٌِف ٌْع‬
These are used to encourage someone to do something when they appear before ٌ ‫ل‬
ٌ‫ضاٌِر‬
ُ‫ع‬ ٌَ ‫اٌلْ ٌُم‬. These are as follows:
ٌ‫أَل‬ ٌ ‫َى‬
‫َّل‬ ‫لَ ْوٌَل‬ ‫لَ ْوَما‬
e.g. ‫صلٌ ٌْي؟‬
َ ُ‫َىَّلٌت‬ Do you not pray salah?

 These particles are also used to create regret and sorrow in the listener when they
ٌِ ‫اٌَلْ ٌِف ٌْع ٌُلٌاٌلْ ٌَم‬. Therefore, they are also called ‫فٌالت ْن ِد ٌِْي‬
appear before ‫اضى‬ ُ ‫ ُحُرْو‬.
e.g. ‫صٌَر؟‬
ْ ‫تٌالْ َع‬
َ ‫ٌصلْي‬
َ ‫َىَّل‬ Have you not prayed ‘Asr salah?

125
6. ْ‫فْالت َوقُّ ِع‬
ُ ‫ – َح ْْر‬Particle of Anticipation:
It is ‫قَ ٌْد‬, which is used for one of the following:
ٌ‫ب‬ ٌ ْ‫ تَ ْق ِري‬: It gives ‫اضى‬ ٌِ ‫ اٌَلْ ٌِف ٌْع ٌُلٌاٌلْ ٌَم‬the meaning of near past.
e.g. ‫ٌزيْ ٌد‬ َ َ‫ٌجاء‬ َ ‫قَ ْد‬ Zayd has arrived (recently).

‫ تَ ْقلِْي ٌٌل‬: It gives ُ‫ع‬ ٌ‫ضاٌِر‬ٌَ ‫ اٌَلْ ٌِف ٌْع ٌُلٌاٌلْ ٌُم‬the meaning of seldomness.
e.g. ‫ل‬ ٌُ ‫ٌإِنٌا ْلََو َادٌقَ ْدٌيَْب َخ‬ Indeed, sometimes, a generous person is miserly.

‫ ََْت ِقْي ٌٌق‬: It gives ‫اضى‬ ٌِ ‫ اٌَلْ ٌِف ٌْع ٌُلٌاٌلْ ٌَم‬or ُ‫ع‬ ٌَ ‫ اٌَلْ ٌِف ٌْع ٌُلٌاٌلْ ٌُم‬the meaning of certainty.
ٌ‫ضاٌِر‬
e.g. ‫ٌزيْ ٌد‬ َ َ‫ٌجاء‬ َ ‫قَ ْد‬ Certainly Zayd came.

ُ‫ٌالل‬
ٌ ‫قَ ْدٌيَ ْعلَ ُم‬ Certainly Allah knows.

7. ْ‫اْال ْستِ ْف َه ِام‬

ِْ َ‫ – حرف‬Particles of Interrogation:
َْ
These are َ‫ ٌأ‬and ‫ل‬ ٌْ ‫ى‬.
َ
e.g. ٌ‫أ ََزيْ ٌدٌقَائِ ٌم‬ Is Zayd standing?
‫َى ْلٌقَ َام ٌَزيْ ٌد‬ Did Zayd stand up?

8. ‫ع‬
ِْ ‫فْالر ْد‬
ُ ‫ – َح ْر‬Particle of Rebuke:
This is ٌ‫ َكَّل‬, which means “Never!”
 It is used to rebuke or reprimand.
ِ
e.g. ْ ‫ض ِر‬
ٌ‫ َكَّل‬is said to some one who says ‫ب ٌَزيْ ًدا‬ ْ ‫( ا‬Hit Zayd.).
 It gives the meaning of certainty.
e.g. ٌ‫فٌتَ ْعلَ ُم ْو َن‬
َ ‫ٌس ْو‬
َ ‫َكَّل‬ Indeed, soon you will know.

9. ْ‫اَلت ْن ِويْ ُن‬: It is used for one of the following:

ٌ‫تََ ٌُّك ٌن‬ : that tanween, which shows a noun to be mu‘rab.
e.g. ٌ‫زيد‬
ٌ‫ تَْن ِكْي ٌر‬: that tanween, which shows a noun to be nakirah.
e.g. ‫ل‬ ٌٌ ‫ٌَر ٌُج‬
ٌٌ ْ‫ تَ ْع ِوي‬: that tanween, which subsitutes a mudaaf ilayhi.
‫ض‬
e.g. ‫ يَ ْوَمئِ ٌٍذ‬i.e. ‫ يَ ْوَمٌٌإِ َذاٌ َكا َنٌ َك َذا‬the day when so and so happened

126
10. ‫نُ ْو ُن ْالتأْكِ ْي ِْد‬: It is used for emphasis in ٌ‫ٌع‬
ٌ‫ٌضٌا ِر‬ ٌٌ‫أٌَْم‬.ٌIt is of two forms: ‫ ثَِقْيٌلٌَة‬and ‫ َخ ِفْي َفٌة‬. Both
َ ‫ ُم‬and ‫ٌر‬
have the same meaning.

)‫اَلث ِق ْي لَةُْ( ّْن‬ )‫اَلْ َخ ِف ْي َفةُْ( ْن‬

ٌ‫ض ِربَن‬
ْ َ‫لَي‬ ‫ض ِربَ ٌْن‬
ْ َ‫لَي‬ Indeed, he should hit.
ٌ‫صَرن‬
ُ ْ‫أُن‬ ٌ‫صَر ْن‬
ُ ْ‫أُن‬ You must help.

11. َْ‫فْل‬
ُ ‫ َح ْر‬: It is used for the following:
ِِ
ٌ‫ ابْت َد ٌاء‬: It is used for emphasis.
e.g. ً‫ش ٌُّدٌٌَرٌْىٌبٌَة‬
ٌَ َ‫ٌَْلَنٌٌْتُ ٌْمٌٌأ‬ Indeed, you are more feared

ٌ‫اب‬
ٌ ‫ َج َو‬: It comes in the answer to ‫ لَ ْوٌ–ٌلَ ْوٌَل‬and ‫س ٌٌم‬ ٌَ َ‫ٌق‬.
e.g. ‫ض‬ ٌُ ‫اْلٌَْر‬ ٌِ ‫س ٌَد‬
ٌ ْ ٌ‫ت‬ ٌٍ ‫ض ٌُه ٌْمٌٌبِبٌَ ٌْع‬
ٌَ ‫ضٌلٌََف‬ ٌَ ‫اللٌِالن‬
ٌَ ‫اسٌبٌَ ٌْع‬ ٌ ٌ‫ٌدٌفْ ٌُع‬
ٌَ ‫ٌَوٌٌلٌَْوٌَل‬
If Allah did not repel some people by means of others, the earth would
be corrupted.

ٌُ َ‫اللٌٌَِْل‬
‫صٌْوٌَمنٌٌ ٌَغ ًٌدا‬ ٌ ٌ‫ٌَو‬ By Allah! I will fast tommorrow.

‫َزائِ َدٌة‬ : extra.

e.g. ٌ‫ٌإِنٌ ٌُه ٌْمٌلٌَيٌَأْ ٌُكٌلٌُْو ٌَنٌالطٌ ٌَع َام‬ Indeed, they eat food.

12. ُ‫ف ْالزْائِ َْد ْة‬

ُ ‫ْح ُرْو‬
ُ ْ‫ – اَل‬Extra Particles: These are not translated. However, they add beauty and
emphasis to the meaning. These are:
ٌ‫ٌإِ ْن‬ ٌ‫أَ ْن‬ ‫َما‬ ٌ‫َل‬ ٌ‫َل‬ ٌ‫ِم ْن‬ ٌ‫َك‬ ِ (‫ٌ ِم ٌن‬،‫ٌ ٌَك‬،‫ب‬
ٌ‫ب‬ ْ ٌِ are governing particles – ٌ‫) ٌَعا ٌِمٌلَة‬
Usage:
ٌ‫ ٌإِ ْن‬: It appears after ُ‫ ٌَماٌٌاَلنٌ ٌافٌِيٌَة‬.
e.g. ‫ٌزيْ ٌدٌقَائِ ٌٌم‬
َ ‫َماٌٌإِ ْن‬ Zayd is not standing.

ٌ‫ أَ ْن‬: It appears after ‫لَما‬.

e.g. ‫ٌجاءٌَالْبَ ِشْي ٌُر‬
َ ‫فَلَماٌأَ ْن‬ When the bearer of good news came.

‫ َما‬: appears after the following:

‫ٌإِ َذا‬ e.g. ‫رب‬ ٌِْ‫اص‬ ِ ِ
ْ َ‫تٌف‬
َ ‫اٌماٌابْتُلْي‬
َ ‫ٌإ َذ‬ When you are afflicted, be patient.

ٌ‫َم ٰت‬ e.g. ٌ‫ٌماٌتُ َسافِْرٌاُ َسافِْر‬

َ ‫َم ٰت‬ When you travel, I will travel.

ٌ‫أَى‬ e.g. ُ‫ٌجا ٌءَ َكٌفَأَ ْك ِرْمٌو‬

َ ‫أَُّميَاٌالر ُج ُل‬ Whoever comes to you, treat him
hospitably.

127
 ٌ‫أَيْ َن‬ e.g. ِ‫ٌالل‬
ٌ ُ‫أَيْنَ َماٌتُ َولُّْواٌفَثَم ٌَو ْجو‬ Whichever way you turn, there is the face
of
Allah.

ٌ‫ٌإِ ْن‬ ِ ِ
e.g. ُ ‫ٌفٌَِإماٌيَأْتيَ ن ُك ْمٌمِّن‬
‫ٌى ًدى‬ Then, should some guidance come to youٌ
from Me.

ٌ‫فٌ ٌَجر‬
ٌُ ‫ٌَحٌْر‬ ٌ‫تٌ َِلُ ْم‬ ِ ِ ِ ٍ ‫ فَبِم‬So, it is through mercy from Allah that you
e.g. َ ‫اٌر ْْحَةٌم َنٌاللٌلْن‬
َ َ
are gentle to them.

ٌ‫َل‬ e.g. ٌ‫َلٌأُقْ ِس ُم ٌِِبٰ َذاٌالْبَ لَ ِد‬ I swear by this city.

ٌ‫َل‬ e.g. ٌ‫ٌإِن ُه ْمٌلَيَأْ ُكلُ ْو َنٌالط َع َام‬ Indeed, they eat food.

ٌ‫ِم ْن‬ e.g. ٌ ‫ٌخالِ ٍقٌ َغْي ُر‬

ِ‫ٌالل‬ ِ
َ ‫َى ْلٌم ْن‬ Is there a creator besides Allah?
ِ
ٌ‫َك‬ e.g. ٌ‫ٌش ٌْي ٌء‬َ ‫سٌ َك ِمثْل ِو‬َ ‫لَْي‬ There is nothing like Him.

ِ
ٌ‫ب‬ e.g. ٌٍ ‫س ٌَزيْ ٌدٌبِ َك ِاذ‬
‫ب‬ َ ‫لَْي‬ Zayd is not a liar.

ِْ ‫ – َح ْرفَاْالش ْر‬Conditional Particles:

13. ‫ط‬

‫( أَما‬however, as far as…is concerned)

 It is used to explain/clarify something, which was mentioned briefly.
 ‫ ف‬has to be brought in its answer )‫اب‬ٌٌ ‫( ٌَجٌَو‬.
e.g. ٌ‫ٌش ُق ْواٌفٌَِفيٌالنا ِر‬ ِ
َ ‫ٌسعِْي ٌدٌفَأَماٌالذيْ َن‬
ِ ٌ ‫فَ ِمْن هم‬
َ ‫ٌش ٌقىٌو‬
َ ُْ
So, some of them will be wretched and (some) blessed. As for the
wretched, they will be in the Fire.
ْ‫( ل َْو‬if)
 It is used to negate the second sentence )‫اب‬
ٌٌ ‫ ( ٌَجٌَو‬on account of the first sentence
)‫ط‬
ٌ ‫ ( ٌَشٌْر‬not being fulfilled.
e.g. ‫لَ ْوٌ َكا َنٌفِْي ٌِه َماٌاٰ ِِلَةٌٌٌإِلٌاللٌُلََف َس َدتَا‬
If there had been gods besides Allah in them (the heavens and the earth),
they would have been corrupted.
(There will not be corruption because there is notٌmore than oneٌgod.)

Note: If a ‫ ٌَو‬is added to ‫ لَ ٌْو‬i.e. ‫ َولَ ٌْو‬it will give the meaning of “even though” and will be
known as ‫صلِيٌ ٌة‬
ٌْ ‫لَ ْو ٌَو‬.
e.g. ٌَ ِ‫أ َْوِملْ ٌَولَ ْوٌب‬
ٍ‫شاٌة‬ Celebrate walimah even if it be with one
(slaughtered) goat.

128
14. ‫ل‬
َْ‫ل َْو‬: Apart from being used for ‫ض‬ ِ ‫ ََْت‬and ‫تَْن ِد ٌْي‬, it is also used to demonstrate that the
ٌٌ ‫ضْي‬ ٌ
second sentence )‫اب‬ ٌٌ ‫ ( َج َو‬cannot be attained because of the presence of the condition of the
first sentence )‫ط‬
ٌ ‫( َش ْر‬.
e.g. ٌ‫كٌبَكٌْر‬
َ َ‫لَ ْوَل ٌَزيْ ٌدٌ ٌَِلَل‬ Had it not been for Zayd, Bakr would have perished.

15. ‫ام‬
َْ ‫اْد‬
َ ‫ َماْ–ْ َم‬: It is that ‫ما‬,
َ which has the meaning of ‫اٌد ٌَام‬
َ ‫( َم‬as long as).
e.g. ٌ‫ٌاْل َِمْي ُر‬
ْ ‫س‬ َ َ‫اٌجل‬
َ ‫ٌم‬َ ‫أَقُ ْوُم‬ i.e. ٌ‫س‬
َ َ‫ٌجل‬
ِ ْ ‫أَقُومٌماٌدام‬
َ ‫ٌاْلَمْي ُر‬ َ َ َ ُْ
I will stand as long as the leader is sitting.

ِْ ‫فْال َْعط‬
16. ‫ْف‬ ُ ‫ ُح ُرْو‬: These are as follows:
ٌ‫َو‬ ٌ‫ف‬
َ ٌ‫ُث‬ ٌ‫َح ّٰت‬ ‫ٌإِما‬ ٌ‫أٌَْو‬ ٌ‫أ َْم‬ ٌ‫َل‬ ٌ‫بَ ْل‬ ٌ‫ٌٰل ِك ْن‬
ْ‫( َو‬and): This is without regard to sequence.
e.g. ‫ْر‬ ٌٌ‫ َجاءَ ٌَزيْ ٌد ٌَوٌبَك‬Zayd and Bakr came.
Here, sequence is not considered.

ْ‫ف‬
َ (then, thus):
 It shows sequence with slight delay.
e.g. ٌ‫َجاءَ ٌَزيْ ٌدٌفَبَكٌْر‬ Zayd came. Then, Bakr (came).

 It can also show cause )‫ب‬

ٌٌ َ‫( ٌَسٌب‬.
ً‫ضرٌة‬ ْ ‫صبِ ُح‬ ِ ِ
e.g. َ ُْ‫ضٌَم‬
ُ ‫ٌاْل َْر‬ ْ ُ‫ٌم ٌاءًٌفَت‬
َ ‫أَنْ َزَلٌم َنٌالس َماء‬
He sends down water from the sky, because of which the earth becomes
green.

ْ‫( ثُم‬then): It shows sequence with delay.

e.g. ٌ‫ٌثٌبَكٌْر‬
ُ ‫ َجاءَ ٌَزيْ ٌد‬Zayd came. Then, (after some time) Bakr (came).
‫( َحْٰتّى‬upto, till, even): It shows the end point.
e.g. ُ‫تٌٌاٰ ِخَرٌه‬ ٌّٰ ‫ٌح‬
َ ‫ْتٌالْ ُق ْراٰ َن‬
ُ ‫قَ َرأ‬ I read the Qur’an until the end.
ٌّٰ ‫ٌح‬
ُ‫تٌالْ ُم َشاٌة‬ َ ‫اج‬ُ ‫ٌاْلُج‬ ْ ‫قَ ِد َم‬ The pilgrims came, even those on foot.

‫( إِما‬either…or):
ٌ‫اٌمر‬ ِ ِ
e.g. ُ ‫اٌح ْل ٌو ٌَوٌٌإم‬
ُ ‫اَلث َمُرٌٌإم‬ The fruit is either sweet or bitter.

ْ‫( أ َْو‬or):
e.g. ٌ‫ضٌيَ ْوٍم‬ ٌْ ‫لَبِثْنَاٌيَ ْوًماٌأ‬
َ ‫َوٌبَ ْع‬ We stayed for a day or a part of a day.

129
 ٌٌ ‫(ٌاِ ٌْسٌتٌِْف ٌَه‬.
ْ‫( أ َْم‬or): It is generally used with an interrogative )‫ام‬
e.g. ‫ْر‬ ِ ‫أٌَزي ٌد‬
ٌٌ‫ٌعْن َد َكٌاَْمٌبَك‬ َْ Is Zayd with you or Bakr?

ْ‫( َل‬not): This negates from the ‫ف‬ ٌٌ ‫ ٌَم ٌْع ٌطٌُْو‬that which has been established for the ٌ ‫ف‬
ٌٌ ‫ٌَم ٌْع ٌطٌُْو‬
‫ ٌَعٌلٌَْيٌِو‬.
e.g. ‫ْر‬ ٌْ َِ‫َجاء‬
ٌٌ‫نٌ َزيْ ٌد ٌَلٌبَك‬ Zayd came to me and not Bakr.

ْ‫( بَ ْل‬but, instead, rather): It is used for ‫اب‬ ْ ِ‫ ٌإ‬i.e. to give up one notion for another.
ٌٌ ‫ضَر‬
e.g. ‫ْر‬ ٌٌ‫نٌ َزيْ ٌدٌبَ ْلٌبَك‬ٌْ َِ‫َجاء‬ Zayd came to me. Rather, Bakr (came).

‫( ْٰل ِك ْْن‬but): It is used with a ‫ نٌَ ٌْف ٌٌي‬and serves the purpose of ‫اك‬ ٌٌ ‫ اِ ْستِ ْد َر‬i.e. to rectify.
ِ
e.g. َ‫اء‬ َ ‫نٌ َزيْ ٌدٌٌٰلك ْنٌبَكٌْر‬
ٌ ‫ٌج‬ ٌْ َِ‫اٌجاء‬
َ ‫َم‬ Zayd did not come to me but Bakr came.

ٌِ‫الل‬
ٌ ٌ‫ىٌر ٌُس ٌْوٌِل‬
ٌَ ‫َّل ٌُمٌ ٌَعٌٰل‬ ٌَ ٌ‫اْلَ ْم ُدٌٌلِ ٌِلوٌ ٌَوٌالص‬
ٌَ ٌ‫َّلٌةٌُ ٌَوٌالس‬ ْ َ‫ٌف‬

130
 BIBLIOGRAPHY

‘Abd al-Ghaniyy al-Daqr (1993). Mu‘jam al-Qawa‘id al-‘Arabiyyah fi al-Nahw wa al-Tasreef.

Damascus: Dar al-Qalam.
‘Abdullah ibn ‘Aqeel (n.d.). Sharh ibn ‘Aqeel ‘ala Alfiyyat ibn Malik, vols. 1-4. Karachi:
Qadeemi Kutubkhana.
‘Ali al-Jaarim and Mustafa Ameen (n.d.). Al-Nahw al-Wadih li al-Madaris al-Ibtida’iyyah, vols.
1-3. Cairo: Dar al-Ma‘arif.
‘Ali al-Jaarim and Mustafa Ameen (n.d.). Al-Nahw al-Wadih li al-Madaris al-Thaniwiyyah,
vols. 1-3. Cairo: Dar al-Ma‘arif.
Ibn Hayyan al-Andalusi (2008). Hidayat al-Nahw. Karachi: Maktabat al-Bushra.
Mawlana Hasan Dockrat (2003). Tawdeeh al-Nahw: A Simplified Arabic Grammar. Azaadville,
South Africa: Madrasah Arabiah Islamia.
Mawlana Mushtaq Ahmad Charthawali (n.d.). ‘Ilm al-Nahw. Karachi: Altaf & Sons.

131